SLABS Page 1 of 308

SLABS
Software Manual
INDUCTA Engineering www.inducta.com.au

INTRODUCTION - SLABS
- What the Software does

Title: What the Software Does

[ SLABS > Introduction ]

Description: SLABS

SLABS software is used to model, analyse and design reinforced concrete slab systems of any shape, including suspended slabs and slabs­on­ground. SLABS provides a
comprehensive solution for a concrete slab design, including: reinforcement design, long term deflections, beam design, reactions, automatic two­way action,
effective moment of inertia, punching shear, and much more.

The software currently complies with:

AS3600 ­ 2001 and 2009, Australian Standard

CSA A23.3, Canadian Standard

BS8110, British Standard

Project by MSL Consulting Engineers Pty Ltd, NSW

Date Modified: 14/05/2014

Title: What's New In SLABS

[ SLABS > Introduction > Waht's New in SLABS ]

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 2 of 308

Description: General Summary and Description of the new features in SLABS

NOTE: For more up to date new features list check [ Help > Check for Updates ] in the software.

01/11/2012, New feture: Forced Vibrations Solver.

04/09/2012, Function added to allow user to click on two points to define a rectangular shape geometry line box.
31/08/2012, User defined minimum steel now allowed to assign to different slab zones.
28/08/2012, Select range function improvement.
24/08/2012, Improvement on integration across voids.
23/08/2012, Missing Max/Min results for beam design print report added
20/08/2012, Improve printscreen function.
17/08/2012, Improvement on punching shear: exclude column for punching shear check when it is close to walls
06/08/2012, Fix a but in Ast boxe integration
31/07/2012, Fix a bug in display of small circles indicating that Crack Control Governs.
30/07/2012, 3D preview and printing bug fixed.
19/07/2012, Introduce user selectable Beam Effective Cover in [mm], linked to the Beam Depth
21/06/2012, Include load factores and basic load labels library.
06/06/2012, Improvement to speed of wide beam design.
30/05/2012, Improvement to results range selection feature.
30/05/2012, Improvement to calculation of the effective slab thickness for the column in Punching shear check.
27/05/2012, New feature: Load combination library.
08/05/2012, Include one default load combination: 1.35G.
05/05/2012, Fix bug in line load copying.
01/05/2012, Fix bug in range result display.
01/05/2012, Include one more default load combination: 1.35G.
23/03/2012, Point loads/Line loads/ Pressure loads are added to 3D view.
15/03/2012, New version of the 3D viewer.
24/02/2012, Include “insert intersection point” editing feature.

13/12/2011, New feature: show counter lines range.

13/12/2011, Allow user to select result display range.
12/12/2011, Fix problem in live load reduction form.
07/12/2011, Improved Moment relaxation module.
11/11/2011, New feature: Include import PT3D data file.
10/11/2011, New feature: show shear results in the slab and indicate potential shear failure.
02/11/2011, Improvement: Export Beam Results to DXF
18/10/2011, Improvement: Export from R/C BUILDING to SLABS
23/09/2011, New feature: 10, 20, 30 and 40 Load Case and Load Combinations
08/09/2011, New feature: Decimal places in the grid setting and showing grid lines
01/09/2011, Improvement: Soil Interaction Equation Solver is 30% faster
30/08/2011, Improvement: CAD import
22/08/2011, Improvement: Automatic Update
19/08/2011, Improvement: Showing zero pressure zone areas in color is introduced
09/08/2011, New feature: Links to Revit Structure 2011/2012 are available for download
25/07/2011, New feature: Ast Zones, steel mark­up zones used for semi­automatic detailing of slab bars.
12/07/2011, New feature: New version of the 3D Viewer.
11/07/2011, Improvement: Export Reactions
10/07/2011, New feature: Elastic springs
06/06/2011, New feature: Different concrete properties can be assigned to the slab zones. Now, in the same model we can have different concrete grades and different covers.
18/05/2011, Improvement: saving the CAD scaling factor
16/05/2011, Improvement: Integration of extra steel.
13/05/2011, New feature: Plot deflected shape in 3D.
09/05/2011, Improvement: Importing of piles from R/C BUILDING.
03/05/2011, Improvement: Delete Elements Outside Slab
03/05/2011, New feature: 3D viewer
29/04/2011, New feature: Isolated walls in the punching shear check
19/04/2011, Improvement: CAD import
12/04/2011, New feature: Export/Import Wide Beams – R/C BUILDING
30/03/2011, Improvement: Frequency Analysis: 6 mode shapes instead of one.
03/03/2011, Improvement: Beam Shear Design, AS 3600, 8.2.5 ( i )
22/02/2011, Improvement: User defined E on the Material Input panel.

15/12/2010, Improvement: CAD Import

10/12/2010, New feature: Short cut keys F4 to F11.
15/11/2010, New feature: shift CAD with arrows on keyboard
02/11/2010, New feature: Auto Manual update
15/10/2010, Improvement: slab­on­ground on slope
07/10/2010, Improvement: punching shear design­vertical legs
30/09/2010, New feature: Auto software update
24/09/2010, New feature: Switch to show Slabs thicknesses by values
23/09/2010, Improvement: extra steel in addition to the basic grid steel
16/09/2010, Improvement: punching shear design for envelope
22/07/2010, Improvement: Import from R/C BUILDING ­ Moment loads
28/06/2010, Improvement: Punching Shear
03/05/2010, Improvement: reinforcement in angle
13/04/2010, Improvement: Import from R/C BUILDING ­ get default material and LC factors.
02/03/2010, New feature: print beam result diagrams
18/01/2010, New feature: Merge Line Loads

Date Modified: 01/11/2012

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 3 of 308

Title: Slab­on­ground ­ Summary

[ R/C BUILDING > Introduction ]

Description: Summary List of All Slab­on­ground Chapters in INDUCTA software

General

Slabs on Ground ­ General (SLABS) >>>

High Soil Pressure Along Footing Edges >>>

Soil­Structure Interaction of Highly Reactive Soils >>>

Strip Footings >>>

Waffle Slab >>>

R/C Building Only

Footing and Slab on Ground Considerations >>>

SLABS Only

Material Properties ­ AS 3600 (2001, 2009) >>>

Material Properties ­ BS 8110 (1997) >>>

Material Properties ­ CSA A23.3 (2001) >>>

Moment Redistribution >>>

Pile Elements >>>

Pile Caps >>>

Centrally Reinforced Slab >>>

Frequency of a Footing >>>

PT3D Only

Slabs on Ground ­ General (PT3D) >>>

Material Properties and Input Parameters >>>

Load Combinations (see Note for Slab on Ground) >>>

Examples

Design Strip Footings in a House (SLABS and R/C Building) >>>

Raft Slab (SLABS) >>>

Pavement for Moving Truck Load >>>

Date Modified: 19/01/2015

SOFTWARE INTERFACE ­ SLABS

­ General

­ Working Area

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 4 of 308

­ Main Task Bar

­ Dynamic Task Bar (DTB)

­ Dynamic Font Size

­ Grid

­ Property Table

­ Tool Box

­ Zoom & Pan

Title: Software Interface ­ General

[ SLABS > Software Interface ]

Description: Major tools and components of the Software Interface

The major components of the user interface are highlighted and labelled below;

The function of each of the major components of the interface is discussed in the following chapters:

Working Area

Main Task Bar

Dynamic Task Bar (DTB)

Dynamic Font Size

Grid

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 5 of 308

Property Table

Tool Box

Zoom & Pan

Date Modified: 14/05/2014

Title: Working Area

[ SLABS > Software Interface ]

Description: General notes about the Working Area

The working area is a virtual sheet of grid paper where the model will be drawn and displayed.

A major improvement to the functionality of the Working Area in SLABS is the option to automatic resizing of the Working Area limits when the Zoom Limits icon is
pressed. The user needs to have the check box labelled 'Auto Limits' selected in the Grid Settings window in order for the limits to be automatically adjusted by the
software (as shown below). The Grid Settings window is available under [ Settings > Grid Settings ] from the Main Menu.

It is not necessary to position the model exactly at (0,0) coordinates (bottom left corner). The only requirement regarding the position of the model is that all
elements (entire model) must not have negative coordinates in either axes.

Date Modified: 14/05/2014

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 6 of 308

Title: Main Task Bar

[ SLABS > Software Interface ]

Description: Description of the icons located on the Main Task Bar

The description of each icon on the Main Task bar is defined in the following series of screen shots;

Some of the items on the Main Task Bar are linked to keyboard shortcuts for ease of use. The shortcut keys are:

Snapping Mode: [F2]

CAD Visibility On/Off: [F3]

Bitmap Visibility On/Off: [F4]

Grid On/Off: [F10]

Zoom Limits: [F11]

Date Modified: 14/05/2014

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 7 of 308

Title: Dynamic Task Bar (DTB)

[ SLABS > Software Interface ]

Description: Description of the functions associated with the icons located on the Dynamic Task Bar

The Dynamic Task Bar (DTB) was introduced in SLABS4 as a method of providing the user with tools and options that are applicable to the current status of the
software or current input made by the user. In SLABS there have been some additions and modifications to the existing tools, and the notes below reflect the latest
inclusions.

The tools and options displayed on the DTB change based on the tool selected within the Tool Box, however if there are no tools selected the default options provide
common settings to multiple operations and elements such as ‘Orthogonal Mode’ and ‘Get Distance’. For the description of the common elements on the DTB see
the General chapter.

More DTB options become available when different tools are selected from the toolbox. The overview of those options is available in the pages below:

Select Tool

Geometry Line Tool

Column Tool

Wall Tool

Beam Tool

Pressure Load Tool

Point Load, Line Load and Moment Load Tools

Wide Beam Tool

There are no additional DTB functions available for the Ast Zone Tool and the Single Bars Tool.

Date Modified: 15/05/2014

Title: General

[ SLABS > Software Interface > Dynamic Task Bar (DTB) > General ]

Description: Description of the functions associated with the common elements of the Dynamic Task Bar

When there are no tools selected on the Dynamic Task Bar, the following functions are available:

Orthogonal Mode: When created elements directly onto the Working Area, the user can choose to set the Orthogonal Mode ‘On’ in order to generate all elements at
right angles to either the X or Y axes. The Orthogonal mode can be turned On and Off at any time by pressing the ‘o’ key on the keyboard.

Get Distance: The distance between two points can be easily extracted by first clicking on the Get Distance icon, followed by clicking on two points with the Working

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 8 of 308

Area. When there are no tool box buttons selected, pressing the 'd' key on the keyboard will automatically select the distance tool.

Crosshair: In certain modelling situations some elements may need to be aligned with other geometry within to the model. The crosshair switch in the DTB will display
a crosshair in the Working Area to assist with aligning elements visually.

Show Angle-Distance Input: When this option has been turned on the user can specify an exact distance and an exact angle for any element that is a line ­ position is
made up of x1,x2 and y1,y2 (or segment of a slab geometry line). It is important to note that when the angle and distance input boxes are displayed and the user clicks
the left mouse button, the snapping option that is displayed on the Main Task Bar is IGNORED and the position in x and y is exactly at the location of the mouse.

When existing geometry in a model is modified with the angle and distance button selected, the user can move the ends of a beam, wall, line load or a geometry line
node to the exact location of the mouse cursor. Again, then the geometry is modified this way all the snapping options are ignored. The angle and distance input
boxes can be turned on and off by pressing the 'f' key on the keyboard. The Orthogonal Model option will automatically set the input for the angle input box as
perpendicular/parallel to the global X/Y based on the position of the mouse.

Date Modified: 21/05/2014

Title: Select Tool

[ SLABS > Software Interface > Dynamic Task Bar (DTB) > Select Tool ]

Description: Description of the functions associated with the icons located on the Dynamic Task Bar for the Select Tool

The following options will appear in the DTB when the Select Tool is used:

Net Select: This option is used when the user wants to select a large number of elements within the model in a single operation. When the Net Select mode is
engaged, there is an additional icon (small rectangle) displayed below the cursor to indicate the selection mode.

Cumulative Select: When this option is selected the user can continuously select elements in the model without holding down the ‘Shift’ key on the keyboard.

Select by Type: This option is used to select elements by specific properties such as all the columns above the slab, or beam element by a particular depth.

Explode Slab Geometry Lines:When a slab geometry line is made up of continuous multiple segments, selecting any part of the continuous geometry and pressing
this icon will explode the continuous segments into individual lines.

Group Slab Geometry Lines: This icon is used to make a continuous slab geometry line from individual slab geometry lines, or a single continuous geometry line from
2 or more continuous geometry lines. When one or more segments are selected the software will check that each end (or node) is connected to another in order for
the total continuous length to be determined. If there two ends or nodes do not have the same co­ordinates in either X or Y the software will report the problem in
the Information Window including the location of the discontinuity. If all the selected slab geometry line from a closed shape, the software will display 'closed' in the
Information Window.

Show All Loads: All the loads that are applied to a particular Load Case are displayed on screen when this icon is selected. If the user has selected a particular load
type in the tool box, say Line Load, then the software will display the Line Loads in red and all other loads in black.

Merge Walls:If two or more walls are aligned along their length, the user can merge the walls by selecting the walls elements and then clicking on this icon.

Date Modified: 20/05/2014

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 9 of 308

Title: Geometry Line Tool

[ SLABS > Software Interface > Dynamic Task Bar (DTB) > Geometry Line Tool ]

Description: Description of the functions associated with the icons located on the Dynamic Task Bar for the Geometry Line Tool

When the Geometry Line tool is selected, the following functions are available:

Show All Loads: All the loads that are applied to a particular Load Case are displayed on screen when this icon is selected. If the user has selected a particular load
type in the tool box, say Line Load, then the software will display the Line Loads in red and all other loads in black.

Colour Slab Zones by thickness: A very efficient method of checking the slab thickness in the model is to colour the slab zones by the thickness. Pressing this button
will colour all slab zones in the model with a corresponding legend presented in the top left corner of the Working Area. It is important to note that the finite element
mesh much be generated in order to use this tool.

Colour Slab Zones by Type : A new feature included in SLABS is the ability to assign a type to each element in a model. This facility allows the user to set a global
parameter to a defined group of elements, and this option on the DTB will colour the slab zones by the Type.

Colour Slab Zones by Stiffness Factor: In SLABS each slab zone can be assigned an individual stiffness factor. This option will colour the slab zones according to the
stiffness factor assigned.

Show Slab Zones Numbers: The user can choose to show the internal slab zone numbers (as assigned by the software) by clicking on this icon.

Drop Panel / Circular Drop Panel: This feature allows the user to quickly and easily generate a drop panel above a column by entering the X and Y dimensions of the
drop panel (or diameter in the case of a circular drop panel). The new slab zone is then created by clicking on an existing column with the snapping mode set to 'snap
to corner'.

Colour By Reo: The set of buttons can be used to display the slabs according to the amount of user­defined reinforcement in top and bottom of the slab in both X­X
and Y­Y primary directions.

Date Modified: 20/05/2014

Title: Wall Tool

[ SLABS > Software Interface > Dynamic Task Bar (DTB) > Wall Tool ]

Description: Description of the functions associated with the icons located on the Dynamic Task Bar for the Wall Tool

When the Wall Tool is selected, the following functions are available:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 10 of 308

Show All Loads: All the loads that are applied to a particular Load Case are displayed on screen when this icon is selected. If the user has selected a particular load
type in the tool box, say Line Load, then the software will display the Line Loads in red and all other load in black.

Colour Wall Elements by Fixity: The wall elements in the model will be coloured according the fixity option that is assigned in the Property Table by the user.

Colour Wall Elements by Thickness: This option will colour the wall elements by the dimensions entered for the thickness.

Date Modified: 20/05/2014

Title: Column Tool

[ SLABS > Software Interface > Dynamic Task Bar (DTB) > Column Tool ]

Description: Description of the functions associated with the icons located on the Dynamic Task Bar for the Column Tool

When the Column Tool is selected, the following functions are available:

Show All Loads: All the loads that are applied to a particular Load Case are displayed on screen when this icon is selected. If the user has selected a particular load
type in the tool box, say Line Load, then the software will display the Line Loads in red and all other loads in black.

Colour Column Elements by Type: This option on the DTB will colour the column elements by the Type parameter set in the Property Table.

Colour Column Elements by Fixity:The column elements in the model will be coloured according the fixity option that is assigned in the Property Table by the user.

Date Modified: 20/05/2014

Title: Beam Tool

[ SLABS > Software Interface > Dynamic Task Bar (DTB) > Beam Tool ]

Description: Description of the functions associated with the icons located on the Dynamic Task Bar for the Beam Tool

When the Beam tool is selected, the following functions are available:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 11 of 308

Show All Loads: All the loads that are applied to a particular Load Case are displayed on screen when this icon is selected. If the user has selected a particular load
type in the tool box, say Line Load, then the software will display the Line Loads in red and all other load in black.

Colour Beam Elements by Geometry: This option will colour the beam elements by the dimensions entered for the sections.

Date Modified: 20/05/2014

Title: Pressure Load Tool

[ SLABS > Software Interface > Dynamic Task Bar (DTB) > Pressure Load Tool ]

Description: Description of the functions associated with the icons located on the Dynamic Task Bar for the Pressure Load Tool

The following options will appear in the DTB when the Pressure Load Tool is used:

Show All Loads: All the loads that are applied to a particular Load Case are displayed on screen when this icon is selected. If the user has selected a particular load
type in the tool box, say Line Load, then the software will display the Line Loads in red and all other load in black.

Colour Slab Zones by Pressure: Similar to the ‘Colour Slabs by Thickness’, this option is very useful for checking the ap plied pressure load (for each load case) by
colouring each slab zones by the pressure applied in the Load Case currently displayed in the Main Task Bar.

Apply Pressure to All Slab Zones: When this option is selected and there is a value entered for the pressure load magnitude, the software will apply that pressure load
to all Slab Zones in the model (for the current load case only).

Edit Pressure: When this button is pressed, the dialog box is displayed, and the user is prompted to replace all pressure loads in the current loadcase that have a
specific value with a different pressure value.

Date Modified: 20/05/2014

Title: Point Load, Line Load and Moment Load Tools

[ SLABS > Software Interface > Dynamic Task Bar (DTB) > Point Load, Line Load and Moment Load Tools]

Description: Description of the functions associated with the icons located on the Dynamic Task Bar for the Point Load, Line Load and Moment Load Tools

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 12 of 308

There is only one option that appears in the DTB when Point Load, Line Load or Moment Load Tool is used:

Show All Loads: All the loads that are applied to a particular Load Case are displayed on screen when this icon is selected. If the user has selected a particular load
type in the tool box, say Line Load, then the software will display the Line Loads in red and all other load in black.

Date Modified: 21/05/2014

Title: Wide Beam Tool

[ SLABS > Software Interface > Dynamic Task Bar (DTB) > Wide Beam Tool ]

Description: Description of the functions associated with the icons located on the Dynamic Task Bar for the Wide Beam Tool

The concept of Wide Beams has been significantly developed in SLABS to improve extracting results. The DTB for the Wide Beams offers the user the following
options;

Define by 2 Points :This setting allows the user to define a wide beam by manually clicking on 2 points within Working Area using the mouse.

Define by 3 Points :This setting allows the user to define a wide beam by manually clicking on 3 points within Working Area using the mouse.

Show Wide Beam Numbers: The individual Wide Beam numbers (as assigned automatically by the software) can be shown by clicking on this icon.

Date Modified: 20/05/2014

Title: Dynamic Font Size

[ SLABS > Software Interface ]

Description: General notes about the Dynamic Font Size feature

A major improvement in SLABS is the new feature that allows the user to control the size of all the text displayed on the screen dynamically. All results, element
numbers or integration results etc, can be adjusted at any time.

For example, if the user displays and reviews moment results as shown in the sample screen shot below, and then zooms into the bottom right corner of the model,

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 13 of 308

the text becomes too large in relation to the rest of the model and the user can reduce the size of the results as shown in the second screen shot below.

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Grid

[ SLABS > Software Interface ]

Description: General usage and notes about the settings of the major and minor grid

The grid is a series of evenly spread dots displayed within the working area. These dots can be used as reference points in order to define the slab geometry. Elements

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 14 of 308

can be generated manually by setting the snapping mode to ‘Snap­to­Grid’ and then clicking on the drawing area. Each time the left mouse button is pressed the
software will snap to the closest grid point. In addition to the Snap­to­Grid mode, there are two other snapping modes: ‘Snap­to­Corner’ and ‘Snap­to­Edge’.
Additionally, if a CAD file has been loaded, 'Snap to CAD' mode becomes available.

Snapping Mode: Snap to Grid

Generally the Major Grid size should be set to 1m and the Minor Grid is set to a fraction of the Major Grid. The Minor Grid settings are located under [Settings > Grid
Settings] on the Main Menu as shown below.

Grid Settings: Minor Grid Options

The drop­down list can then be set to: 1/2, 1/3, 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/10, 1/12 and 1/20 of the Major Grid size. In order to set a 100mm minor grid, the Major Grid size
needs to be entered as 1.0 m and the Minor Grid is then set to 1/10.

Adopting a minor grid setting of 100mm will provide very reliable results (regarding the accuracy of geometry) while allowing the user to easily create and work with
the elements contained in a model.

When the Minor Grid is used, the mouse pointer will snap to the closest Minor Grid point, although it may not be visible (due to the density of the dots).

Major Grid lines and Minor Grid

The user can choose to show a Cross Hair by selecting the 'Show Mouse Cross Hair' icon in the Dynamic Task Bar (DTB).

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 15 of 308

Date Modified: 15/05/2014

Title: Property Table

[ SLABS > Software Interface ]

Description: Overview of the Property Table for structural elements (including loading)

Each structural element (including loading) has a set of properties that are displayed in the Property Table when that particular element is selected. The screen shot
below is an example of a slab zone that has a thickness of 0.25m.

The screen shot below is taken when multiple columns are selected, as shown by the blank x and y values. It is important to note that all the values that are common
to the selected elements are displayed in the Property Table and can be modified in one operation.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 16 of 308

If different elements are selected, such as a slab panel element and a wall element, the Property Table will not be shown as an indication that none of the values are
common.

Date Modified: 16/05/2014

Title: Tool Box

[ SLABS > Software Interface ]

Description: Description of the icons contained in the Tool Box

There are twelve drawing tools for defining and editing the model and the loading. The list of the tools and the associated buttons is shown below.

Drawing Tools

Supplementary functions related to the tools contained in the Tool box can be accessed by selecting the additional icons that are contained in the Dynamic Task Bar
(DTB). (See Dynamic Task Bar)

Date Modified: 16/05/2014

Title: Zoom & Pan

[ SLABS > Software Interface ]

Description: Overview of the Zoom and Pan tools

The Zoom Limits, Zoom Box and the Pan tools can be used to adjust the location of the model on the screen and to examine smaller details of the model. An
improvement in SLABS is the automatic adjustment of the Working Area limits so the entire model is visible when the Zoom limits icon is pressed, regardless of the
size of the model in Plan.

The Pan tool can be switched On and Off at any time to ‘grab’ and move the model around the working area. When there are results displayed on the screen and the
Pan button is pressed, the display will remain on screen but the user can not extract results at a node until the Pan mode is unselected.

Zoom and Pan Icons

The Mouse Wheel in can be used as an alternative zooming tool. When turning the Mouse Wheel the position of the mouse pointer is used as a central reference.
When the [ Shift ] key is held down and the mouse wheel is rolled one step, the position of the mouse cursor becomes the central position of the Working Area.

Date Modified: 16/05/2014

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 17 of 308

MODELLING - SLABS

­ Concept

­ Building Models

­ Slab on Ground

­ Checking Model Geometry

­ How To...

Title: Modelling ­ Concept

[ SLABS > Modelling ]

Description: Outline of the modelling concept including comparisons between different versions of SLABS

The process of generating a SLABS model involves creating the floor geometry and the elements that will support the floor such as columns, walls and beams. The
floor geometry parameters include slab thickness values and material parameters. The loading that is applied to the slab can be made up of pressure loads, line and
point and moment loads. Each type of load can be entered in Basic Load cases and then combined by the user in up to 40 Load Combinations using factors for each
Load Case as required.

Generating the structural elements in SLABS can be summarized by the following methods;

Manually entered by co-ordinate input: The user knows the distance between the supporting columns and walls (spans) and the section values of the columns,
and/or the thickness of the supporting walls. Each element is entered at a specific location (using 'snap to grid' as the snap setting) to represent the arrangement of
the supports. The floor geometry (slab and beams) is entered in a similar manner taking into account areas on the floor that may require a different thickness or a
different pressure load to be applied in any of the Load Cases.

Manually entered using Bitmap or CAD file as reference (background image): The supporting elements (columns and walls) and the floor geometry are generated
using a CAD file or Bitmap image of the geometry as a guide to the relative location of the elements.

Importing the geometry from a CAD file: The information contained in a CAD file is read by SLABS and then converted into structural elements and
slab/beam geometry that defines the model. This is the most accurate and most efficient method to generate a model.

Regardless of the method used the generate a model, the overall process of the modelling procedure and the difference between SLABS version 4 and SLABS can be
shown in the flow diagram below;

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 18 of 308

A direct comparison between the different modelling procedures is illustrated in the video below (Modelling_concept.wmv). The location of the 'switch' between
SLABS4 and SLABS is also presented.

www.inducta.com.au/h57g/Modelling_concept.wmv

Date Modified: 16/05/2014

BUILDING MODELS - SLABS

­ Manual Data Entry

­ Using a Background Image

­ Importing from CAD

­ Importing from Revit

- Meshing Principles

­ Modelling Tips to Prevent Meshing Errors

Title: Building Models: Example 1 ­ Manual Data Entry

[ SLABS > Modelling > Buildig Models ]

Description: Detailed notes about generating models by manually entering data into SLABS

Manually entering the co­ordinates for elements is not typically the most efficient method of generating models in SLABS, however if the geometry is simple it may be
an option the user can consider.

Below is an example showing a drawing of a suspended slab that shows the dimensions required to enter the co­ordinates of the elements that well be needed to
build the model. The modelling procedure involves starting at a positive X and Y location, say (10,10), and then entering X and Y input for the elements using the tools
available in the Tool box.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 19 of 308

The follwoing video (Video: manual_data_entry.wmv) shows the complete procedure of generating the model from the information shown in the screen shot above.

www.inducta.com.au/h57g/manual_data_entry.wmv

Date Modified: 16/05/2014

Title: Building Models: Using a Background Image

[ SLABS > Modelling > Buildig Models ]

Description: Detailed notes about generating models by using a background image and entering data into SLABS

Using a bitmap image to generate a model is very efficient particularly when the geometry of the floor is simple.

The concept of the BMP Import utility in SLABS is to use a Bitmap image to display the geometry of the floor as a background image. Once the Bitmap image is
imported, the standard drawing tools can be used to create the slab panels, walls, beams and columns over the Bitmap image. The Bitmap image is only a background
and it will not interfere with the slab model. A Bitmap image can be created by scanning a paper copy of the plan (using a scanning device), or the image can be
created by taking a screenshot from a CAD file using any CAD package.

Creating a bitmap image (using a CAD file) is outlined below;

1. Start AutoCAD.
2. Open the architectural drawing.
3. Change the colour of the background to White.
4. Press the [Alt] + [Print Screen] keys on the keyboard. This will save the image of the screen to the clipboard.
5. Close the CAD package.
6. Start MS Paint or an alternate photo / image editor.
7. Press the [Ctrl] + [v] buttons on the keyboard. This will paste the image form the clipboard.
8. Crop the image to remove the unnecessary areas of the screen.
9. Save the file to any directory on the hard drive. Note: the format of the file must be set to ‘16 Colour Bitmap’ in order to reduce the size of the file.

Note: Creating Bitmaps using AutoCAD [ File > Export > bmp format ] is not a suitable method of creating Bitmap files for importing into SLABS4.

The following example is a step by step procedure that includes detailed key strokes and specific commands entered by the user.

Below is a CAD drawing in AutoCAD where: the supporting columns and wals are displayed in purple, the slab geometry is blue.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 20 of 308

The procedure of importing, scaling and building model model is shown in the following video (Video: bitmap_method.wmv);

www.inducta.com.au/h57g/bitmap_method.wmv

Notes on BMP Import

! The location of the bitmap within the Working Area can be shifted by holding down the [Ctrl] button and using the arrow buttons on the keyboard.
! The ‘PageUp’ and ‘Page Down’ can be used to scale the image by incremental steps.
! After the import and scaling are performed the Bitmap should be ‘locked’ so it is not accidently shifted or scaled The Bitmap image can be switched Off and On
at any time, and can be unloaded from the model at any time by selecting the [ Tools > Bitmap > Unload ].
! Once the image is unloaded a new Bitmap image can be loaded in the same SLABS model.
! It is recommended to keep a backup copy of the Bitmap, so it can be loaded again at any time.
! Bitmap Visibility On/Off Shortcut Key: [F4]

Date Modified: 16/05/2014

Title: Building Models: Example 3 ­ Importing from CAD

[ SLABS > Modelling > Building Models > Importing from CAD ]

Description: Detailed notes about generating models by importing geometry information from a CAD file

The most efficient method of generating models is to use CAD file that contain the architectural layout of the geometry. SLABS, R/C BUILDING and PT3D can load
CAD files that are saved as DXF or DWG formats.

A common issue with importing from a CAD file is that the relative location of the data contained within the file is positioned at a significant distance away from
the (0,0) origin in X and Y. To manage this problem SLABS, R/C BUILDING and PT3D has a setting built into the software that will allow the position of the extreme
bottom left element contained in the imported file to be automatically shifted to (0,0) in the X and Y co­ordinate system. The alternative option presented to the user
when a CAD file is first imported into the software is to not shift the CAD file and to import the file at the exact location the data was entered in the CAD program.

When CAD files have been created with layers that do not contain particular elements in isolated layers, the user will need to manually select the specific lines that
represent certain elements, such as columns or walls. The example video below (Video: Example_1­Carpark.wmv) shows how elements are imported when the wall
elements and the column elements are contained within the same layer. In this case the user can not isolate a particular layer and import say the columns using the
Net Select option, but each column element is selected independantly. Some columns in this example are not created as 'closed polylines' and each segments of the
column perimeter is selected manually.

www.inducta.com.au/h57g/Example_1­Carpark.wmv

The following video (Video: Example_1­Carpark­Modifying_the_Model­drop_panels.wmv) shows how modifications to the model that was generated in the previous
video are made to include drop panels.

www.inducta.com.au/h57g/Example_1­Carpark­Modifying_the_Model­drop_panels.wmv

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 21 of 308

The next video (Video: Example_1­Carpark­Modifying_the_Model­band_beams.wmv) is based on the original flat slab model that was generated in the Video:
Example 1 ­ Carpark. This example shows how to create band beams in a model.

www.inducta.com.au/h57g/Example_1­Carpark­Modifying_the_Model­band_beams.wmv

The next example video (Video: Example_2­Apartment.wmv) illustrates a case when the UCS (user co­ordinate system) has been set to an angle other than
orthogonal X,Y in the CAD program and the imported CAD file needs to be rotated before any data is imported into SLABS. This CAD file has the layers prearranged so
that the elements (and Slab Geometry Lines) are contained in isolated layers allowing the user to import all the columns, walls and Slab Geometry Lines in single
operations. There is also an example in this video that shows how to fix a common geometry error that is caused by a column centroid being slightly off­set from an
adjacent Slab Geometry Line.

Assigning slab thickness values (including voids) and pressure loads is also demonstrated at the end of this video.

www.inducta.com.au/h57g/Example_2­Apartment.wmv

The final video (Video: Example_3­CAD_Reference_Point.wmv) shows how to align 2 (or more) CAD files when generating a model that contains elements below the
slab in one CAD drawing, and the elements above the model in a separate drawing. In some cases the relative position between the 2 CAD drawings is not the same if
they were to simply be imported into SLABS.

The problem of aligning the drawing that contains the columns and walls above the slab to the existing elements is resolved by setting a Reference Point to a
particular element or position to the CAD file that was initially imported (and the supporting elements were created from) and then a second CAD file containing the
walls and columns above to slab is imported and the Reference Point is 'matched'. The most suitable type of Reference Points are the inside corners of a lift shaft as
this type of geometry will typically be present on all the floors within a multi level building (lift pit at the lowest level and a lift over run at the roof) and if the
thickness of the lift was to be modified the external face would change, keeping the inside face consistent.

Once the second CAD file is imported into SLABS and the Reference Point is matched, the columns and walls that are located above the slab can be imported and the
associated loads can be applied to model in order to analyse a transfer slab.

www.inducta.com.au/h57g/Example_3­CAD_Reference_Point.wmv

Notes :

CAD Visibility On/Off Shortcut Key: [F3]

CAD Background can be shifted using [Alt+Arrow Button]. The shifting step is equal to the grid size or to the minor grid size if there is any.

Date Modified: 16/05/2014

Title: Importing from Revit

[ SLABS > Modelling > Building Models > Importing from Revit]

Description: Detailed notes about generating models by importing geometry information from Revit files

Models can be imported from Revit files into INDUCTA software. Please install Revit Link to proceed with the import.

On the Revit Link Web page there is a document with detailed instruction for the import.

Date Modified: 02/10/2014

Title: Meshing Principles

[ SLABS > Modelling > Building Models > Meshing Principles ]

Description: Outlines the principles behind the finite element mesh generated by INDUCTA software.

In order to input slab thicknesses and pressures and them to run the model the finite element mesh must be generated [Solve > Mesh] .

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 22 of 308

See [ R/C BUILDING > Modelling > Building Models > Meshing Principles ]

Date Modified: 11/08/2014

Title: Modelling Tips to Prevent Meshing Errors

[ SLABS> Modelling > Building Models > Modelling Tips to Prevent Meshing Errors]

Description: Outlines the procedure to eliminate the meshing errors in INDUCTA software.

For modelling tips that apply for all INDUCTA software please see the following chapters:

General Modelling Tips ­ this chapter will guide the user on how to simplify and clean up the model geometry.

Preparation Of CAD Files ­ the files imported from CAD will need to be prepared in a certain way to ensure the files are imported correctly and the model will
run as intended.

Preparation Of Revit Files ­ Revit models are set up in a different way to R/C Building, and some adjustments need to be made to import the models using Revit
Link.

Please note that PT3D software has some additional tips.

Date Modified: 21/08/2014

SLAB ON GROUND - SLABS

­ General

­ High Soil Pressure Along Footing Edges

­ Application Example No 1

­ Design Strip Footings in a House

­ Pavement Design for Moving Loaiding

­ Frequency of a Footing

­ Pile Caps

­ Waffle Slab

­ Soil­Structure Interaction of Highly Reactive Soils

Title: Slabs on Ground ­ General

[ SLABS > Modelling > Slab on Ground > General ]

Description: Detailed outline of 3 alternate methods (including examples) for modelling and analysing Slabs on Ground

SLABS software offers three alternative methods to model raft slabs and slabs­on­ground:

Winkler Model with Uniform Spring Constant

Winkler Model with Spring Constant Related to Slab Panel Types

Soil­Structure Interaction, Liner Elastic Half­Space

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 23 of 308

Raft Slab Example

When the ‘Slab on Ground’ option is selected in the [Material Properties] input panel, SLABS will assume that the entire slab or some parts are supported by the soil,
and there is no need to define any other supports, such as walls or columns. The floor can be made of slab panels and beam elements.

In this case some or all of the slab panels should be set to be in contact with the soil. Each slab panel can be selected separately to be ‘in contact’ or ‘not in contact’
with the soil. These settings are in the Slab Panel Property Table.

Winkler Model - Uniform Spring Constant

If this approach is used only one value for the soil stiffness should be entered. The soil stiffness represents the elastic properties of the soil in the vertical direction.
SLABS assumes that the lateral movement of the slab is constrained. The Soil Stiffness parameter has the same meaning as to the Coefficient of Sub Grade
Reaction. That is an equivalent ‘area’ spring at each nodal point of the finite element mesh.

If there is any tension in the soil (negative deflection), SLABS will indicate these zones. In the Soil Pressure results screen, the zones with tension in the soil will be
indicated with red dots. If this happens the model should be modified so the slab panels in these zones are set to not be in contact with the soil.

Winkler Model with Spring Constants Related to Slab Panel Types

This method allows the user to define different soil stiffness values for different slab types.

Winkler Model: Soil Stiffness Parameter

SLABS can calculate the equivalent soil stiffness, which will represent several soil layers with different mechanical properties. In the [Soil Properties] input panel, the
[Soil Layers] button will open an input table where the soil layer properties can be entered. The soil layer properties are entered from the top layer to the bottom,
down to the bed­rock. The Poisson's ratio must be less than 0.5 and the 1st Load Combination is used to evaluate the equivalent soil stiffness parameter. The
software will calculate an equivalent soil stiffness parameter, which will give the same settlement for the 1st Load Combination as the soil layers.

In the soil layers input panel, there is a special option which will be used to enter layers on a slope. In order to enter the properties of the soil layers on a slope, select
the ‘Slope’ option on the drop­down box. The soil layers properties at three points must be entered and the (X,Y) co­ordinates in plane of each point must also be
entered.

Winkler Model: Soil Stiffness Gradient

This is an additional input parameter, which can be used to vary the soil properties proportionally to the distance from the slab centroid. If the Gradient is zero, then
for a uniformly distributed load the soil pressure will to be uniformly distributed. But if the Gradient is not zero, the soil pressure will increase or decrease
proportionally to the distance from the slab centroid. This is a simple method which allows the user to model the soil more realistically.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 24 of 308

Winkler Model: Application Notes

The Winkler model approximates the soil as a series of independent elastic springs (area springs). There is one spring at each corner of all finite element triangles,
representing 1/3 of the area of all finite element triangles attached to that node. The stiffness of the elastic spring is derived from the Modulus of Elasticity of the soil
layers. The stiffness of each spring is calculated assuming a uniformly stressed, 1m deep block of soil deposit. In order to consider the actual depth of the soil deposit,
the actual Modulus of Elasticity should be modified.

The manual calculation of equivalent Soil Stiffness is based on equating the settlement (d) of the soil deposit, assuming the actual stress distribution in the soil (left
figure), and the deflection of the uniformly stressed 1x1m block of soil with some equivalent finite depth De (right figure). Both models should provide identical
settlements (d).

The procedure for calculating the Ec (corrected Modulus of Elasticity) follows below:

1. Estimate the average soil pressure (q) for the raft slabs you are analysing.

2. Select an appropriate Modulus of Elasticity (E) for the soil type:

soft normally­consolidated clays: 1,400 ­ 4,200 kPa

medium clays: 4,200 ­ 8,400 kPa

stiff clays: 8,400 ­ 20,000 kPa

loose normally­consolidated sands: 7,000 ­ 20,000 kPa

medium normally­consolidated sands: 20,000 ­ 40,000 kPa

dense normally­consolidated sands: 40,000 ­ 48,000 kPa

Poisson's Ratio 0.20 to 0.45

3. Calculate the soil settlement (d), considering the actual stress distribution in the soil and the depth of the deposit by using the actual E and q, and some equivalent
size rectangular shape load representing the slabs.

4. The equivalent soil Modulus of Elasticity, which should be used in SLABS is calculated as:

Ec = q / d

q ­ kN/(m*m)

d­m

Ec ­ kN/(m*m)

Note that the right­hand­side of the above expression is multiplied by 1m to balance the units.

Generally, the equivalent Modulus of Elasticity (Ec) will be smaller than the actual Modulus of Elasticity (E).

For instance, if the Soil Stiffness is set to 3,000 kN/m^2, and if we apply a uniform pressure load of 7.0 kPa on the slab then the vertical settlement will be:

Settlement = 7.0 / 3,000 = 0.0023 m = 2.3 mm

The soil pressure will be 7.0 kPa, uniformly distributed under the entire slab.

Usually, a Soil Stiffness value of 500 to 1,000 kN/m^2 indicates a very soft soil, and a value of 10,000 kN/m^2 or more represents a very stiff soil.

Winkler Model: Example Input Data

Vertical settlement (point 3 above) for load G+Q is 15.12 mm.

Total slab area: 288 m2

Total load (G + Q): 6,500 kN

Equivalent E = ( 6,500 / 288 ) / ( 15.12 / 1,000 ) = 1,493

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 25 of 308

The figure 1,493 should be entered as Soil Stiffness in the [Material Properties] input panel.

Soil­Structure Interaction, Liner Elastic Half­Space

This method considers the soil as a liner­elastic half­space. The slab is a plate in bending and the soil is a 3D half­space. The slab and the 3D half­space ‘work’ together
as a combined system, which includes a soil­structure­interaction effect. SLABS allows you to properly consider the interaction between the slab and the soil. This
method is considered to be the most appropriate analytical approach for the evaluation of slab­on­ground settlements and its effect on the structure.

This approach requires the user to enter material properties of the soil layers. The software will evaluate the Influence Factors under each nodal point of the finite
element mesh, and it will analyse the slab and the soil as one integral structural system. (a nodal point is a corner of each finite element triangle.)

The Influence Factors for the soil are based on the Boussinesq formula, assuming homogeneous liner elastic isotropic material. The Modulus of Elasticity and thickness
of each soil layer is taken into account and the size of the corresponding area under each nodal point and the influence to all other nodal points are included in the
analysis. The Influence Factors for the soil do not include long term effects, such as creep and clay consolidation.

Using this approach does not consider any tension in the soil. If the results indicate negative soil pressure (soil tension), the slab panels in these zones must be set not
be in contact with the soil. This should be a rare case for most of the structures.

The soil layers can be horizontal or on a slope, however the surface is always flat. If the soil layers are on a slope (figure above) the values for each layer thickness and
Modulus of Elasticity (E) must be defined in three points. Each point is defined with the (x,y) coordinates in plan. In all three points the number for soil layers must be
identical, while E and the thickness can vary. These three points will be used to evaluated E at any other point and at any depth by linear interpolation between the
three points.

Slab­on­Ground: General Note

There are many other factors which will contribute to the slab­on­ground analysis. This is only a simplified linear elastic approach, which should be used very carefully
in combination with some other alternative method to confirm the results. It is also recommended to vary the Modulus of Elasticity by +/­ 30%, or even 50% in order
to examine the influence on the final results.

Also see: Slabs on Ground ­ Application Example No 1 See also: SLABS; Structural Elements; Pile Elements Design Strip Footings in a House

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: High soul pressure concentration along footing edges

[ SLABS > Modelling > Slab on Ground > High Soil Pressure Along Footing Edges ]

Description: How to treat high soul pressure concentration along footing edges in design.

Along a mat footing edges there is a high soil pressure concentration. This is a normal pressure distribution under a typical mat footing. This is happening because a
relatively stiff concrete block is pressing into much softer soil, and the footing edges are “trying” to cut into the soft soil. So, the high soil pressure along the footing
edges is very typical in mat footings. (see picture below)

Now, if the high soil pressure along the edges exceed the allowable soul pressure, we can simply reject the design, or we can examine the soil pressure distribution
more carefully, and we can make a decision whether we can accept a particular design.
­­­­­­

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 26 of 308

Here, we will present our suggested approach on an illustrative example.

Let us consider a 3.1 x 2.4m mat footing with four point loads. (see picture below)

The soul pressure for the service load case is shown in the picture below. We can observer that the soil pressure at the edges is 260 kPa, and if we assume that the
allowable pressure is only 120 kPa, we might immediately conclude that this design will fail.

However, if we examine carefully the stress distribution close to the edges, we can see that the soul pressure is dropping dramatically at a very short distance from
the edges. (see picture below)

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 27 of 308

We can observe that only a narrow belt around the footing perimeter exceeds the allowable pressure, and generally it can be ignore. This observation is based on
the following premises:

The high pressure values at the corners, such as 708 kPa, are only at one point and for that reason they can be ignored.
The soil pressure exceeds the 120 kPa allowable value only in a narrow belt around the edges, about 150mm wide. (see picture below) In average at distance
of 350mm from the edge the pressure drops to 90 kPa, and considering the soil pressure distribution we can assume that the pressure exceed the 120 kPa
limit only in the 150mm belt. Now, it is very likely that the ultimate soil pressure will not to be exceeded at all, and the soil will remain in elastic range. But, if
the ultimate soil pressure will be reached, than it will be only in a very narrow strip, a maximum of 50mm, and if that happens the soul will undertake plastic
deformations, and the pressure will be redistribute to the rest of the footing. Since, 95% of the footing has a very low soil pressure, about 50kPa, a small
increase of the overall pressure due to plastic deformations along the edges will be easily absorber. Following this reasoning, we assume that this particular
design is accepted.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 28 of 308

Also, we might consider that the allowable pressure is usually underestimated, and we might adopt that the actual allowable pressure is not 120 kPa, but it is
about 30% grater, which is about 160 kPa.
Please, note this is only a suggestion, and we strongly recommend that this type of designs are confirmed with some alternative methods, in consultation with
another engineer.
­­­­
Note that for this type of structure, small mat footing, the twisting moment Mxy can govern the reinforcement design. We recommend that this is switched on in the
material properties input panel.

Last Modified 03/09/2014

Title: Slabs on Ground ­ Application Example No 1

[ SLABS > Modelling > Slab on Ground > Application Example No 1 ]

Description: Raft Slab ­ Illustrative Example

Let us consider a 600mm raft slab supporting a several storey building (see picture 1.) The size of the raft is 55 x 30m. On the raft there are a number of point and
line loads. Note the line loads along the slab perimeter.

(1) Raft Slab, 600mm Flat Slab

In the picture below a 3D view of the raft slab and the loading is shown.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 29 of 308

(2) 3D View o the Raft Slab with Loading

Some loading detail is shown in picture 3 below.

(3) 3D View o the Raft Slab ­ Detail

If we open the Loading Report we can see that the average soil pressure due to un­factored dead and live load is 70 kPa. (picture 4) This indicates that the raft is
supporting 6 to 7 levels, assuming a typical weight one floor of 10 kPa. Now, we need to check is the allowable soil pressure greater than 70kPa. If that is not the
case, then there is no need to proceed with the raft design, because we know that the actual soil pressure will be greater than the average pressure. In our example
the allowable pressure is greater than 70 kPa.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 30 of 308

(4) Total Load, Unfactred

Now, in SLABS software we can select the Soil Model: Elastic Half­Space, as the most accurate option (picture 5). Note that the Winkler Method, which is available in
the software, approximates the soil with series of independent springs, and it is too simplistic. The Elastic Half­Space soil model assumes liner­elastic continuum,
which is considered as much better and more precise approach.

(5) Soil Model: Elastic Half­Space

Now, from the Geomechanical Report in the image below, we can see that the bedrock is at depth between 15 to 18m. In our analysis we will assume the soul layers
depth of 20m, which is more conservative. (picture 6)

(6) Geomechanical Report: Soil Layers Depth

In the Geomechanical Report we can also note that the allowable bearing soil pressure is 200 kPa, and the modulus of elasticity is 15 MPa. (pictures 7 And 8 below) It
is not clear why the allowable pressure is defined separately under the beams and under the pad footing. Anyhow, the values are identical, 200 kPa, and in our
analysis we will use this value. We can safely assume that this value is very conservative. It is important to remember that if we use the allowable pressure as a
design parameter, than we need to compare it with the soil pressure results from the service load combination, such as 1.0G+0.3Q or 1.0G+0.7Q.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 31 of 308

(7) Geomechanical Report: Allowable Pressure and Modulus of Elasticity

In the Geomechanical Report the modulus of elasticity is give as E = 15 MPa (picture 5). This value is give under the basement slab, and we know that the value of the
modulus of elasticity will increase with depth. Also, we know that the soil is almost uniform consolidate send (picture 9), and from the reference literature we know
that the typical modulus for this type of soil is greater. Therefore, in our analysis we will use a value of E = 30 MPa, double the value than the modulus right under the
slab.

(8) Geomechanical Report: Allowable Pressure

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 32 of 308

(9) Borehole Log Example

Now, in SLABs software, for this particular example, we will use one soil layer with depth of 20m, and Modulus of Elasticity, E = 30,000 kPa, and we can assume that
the Poisson’s ratio is 0.4, typical for soils (picture 10 below).

(10) SLABS: Soil Layers Input Data

Then, we will mesh and analyze the mode in SLABS software, as normal. After the analysis, we can display the deflection results for the service load combination
(1.0G+0.7Q). We can do this because in this example the soil type is sand and therefore all the settlements will be realized as soon as the load is applied. In sand,
there is no long term movement. However, if the soil was clay we need to consider the clay consolidation. For clay we need to evaluate the consolidation factor
manually on a simple soil model, and then we can apply this factor in SLABS software. For instance, if we evaluate the consolidation factor of 1.50, then we need to
create another long term service load combination (1.5G+1.05Q).

In our example the service load settlements are between 10 and 50mm. This is considered acceptable. (picture 11 below)

(11) Service Load Settlement

Note that even under uniform load the settlement under the raft will have “dish” like shape, with maximum values at the center (picture 12 below). SLABS software
provides this shape of settlements (picture 11 above).

(12) Soil Pressure Distribution and Settelemnt of Raft Slab

The settlements of 30mm along the perimeter may look too big (picture 11 above), and one may assume that this will be visible as the slab “cuts” into the soil.
Actually, this is not happening, since the entire area, even outside the raft will “sink”, and there will be no visible settlements along the slab perimeter. This is

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 33 of 308

happening because the soul is elastic continuum, and the load from the raft will affect the surrounding area (picture 12 above).

Now, we need to examine the soil pressure for the service load combination (1.0G+0.7Q). We will use the allowable pressure of 200kPa as a design criteria, and
therefore we need to compare it with the pressure due to service load. In our example the soil pressure is about 30 to 140 kPa in the central zone, and we can
also observer some high pressure along the slab perimeter (picture 13 below).

This soil pressure concentration along the slab edge is expected, since we have a relatively stiff plate pushing into softer soil. This high stresses along the edges are
developing because the stiff slab plate is trying to “cut” into the soft soil. This is known effect, and generally is not a problem because it is happening only along a
very narrow belt along the edge. We can assume that even the soil ultimate capacity is exceeded, and the soil exhibits plastic behavior, it is only a small isolated
zones, and the soil pressure will redistribute into the surrounding zones. For practical design we can ignore these narrow high pressure zones along the edges.
However, if the zones of high pressure cover larger areas, the stress re­distribution may not be possible, and we have to review our design.

(13) Soil Pressure - Full Range

It is very useful to display the soil pressure within certain range. In the picture 14 below, we have shown the zones with pressure below 100kPa. We can see that
most of the slab is in this zones. Now, if the allowable pressure is 200 kPa, and if the larger portion of the raft has pressure below 100 kPa, we can assume that the
design is safe. Also, this diagram (picture 14) shows some zone in the central area, which have pressure greater than 100 kPa. We may want to consider using ticker
slab in this central zones.

(14) Soil Pressure - Range: Less Than 100 kPa

Now, we can display zones with pressure between 100 and 150 kPa. About 5% of the slab has pressure between 100 and 150 kPa, and as we know the allowable
pressure is 200 kPa, than this is still acceptable. (picture 15 below)

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 34 of 308

(15) Soil Pressure - Range: between 100 and 150 kPa

And finally we can display zones with pressure greater than 150 kPa, and we can confirm that only the slas edges exhibit this level of pressure. (picture 16 below)

(16) Soil Pressure - Range: greater than 150 kPa

This example illustrates the usage of raft slab on relatively soft soil, which may normally require piles footing. Raft slab is usually more economical design.

Slab on Ground ­ General See also: SLABS; Structural Elements; Pile Elements

Date Modified: 21/05/2014

Title: Design Strip Footings in a House

[ SLABS > Modelling > Slab on Ground > Design Strip Footings in a House ]

Description: How to make the models and design strip footings in a small brick house

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 35 of 308

It is a common task to design the slab­on­ground and strip footings in a brick house.

Here, we will suggest a procedure using a combination of SLABS and R/C Building software to perform a design of a slab­on­ground with strip footings, supporting a
small brick house (see picture below).

Slab­on­ground with strip footing, supporting brick house (R/C Building model)

The first step is to create a 3D model of the house in R/C Building software with all walls, columns and loading. The slab­on­ground is made of a 200mm slab and a
system of strip footings stretching under each wall. At this stage we assume the depth of the strip footings to be 500mm (see picture below).

Slab and Strip Footings in R/C Building Model

In the R/C Building model the strip footings are made as slab zones 0.5m thick. In this example we will not use Line Beam elements to make the strip footings. This is
done because we assume that the footing is an integrated system made of slab­on­ground and a system strip footings, which work together. This approach treats the
slab­on­ground as an equally important structural element, which will have two layers structural steel. We prefer this approach because the slab is already there, and
we can use it as a structural element. Also, a footing will perform better if we integrate the slab in the footing system. This approach will make the soul pressure
lower and more evenly spread.

An alternative approach is to use a thin slab, say 110mm, with a single layer of mesh. Now, the role of the slab is negligible and the strip footings in the R/C Building
have to be made of Line Beam elements. In this approach the strip footings are the primary supporting elements, and they will have more steel than the previous
approach.

Once the 3D model is competed in R/C Building software, we will mesh and analyse the 3D model. Note that the model in R/C Building is not set to be on ground.
Then, we will export the slab on ground to SLABS, including all the wall reactions by Area Method. If it is a brick house there is no frame action, and therefore the
reactions by Area Method shoud be used. (see picture below)

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 36 of 308

Export from R/C Building to SLABS

In SLABS software we can set that all the slab thicknesses and the wall reactions are imported. (see picture below)

SLABS Model with Wall Reactions From Above

Now, in SLABS we will mesh the model and enter the soil layer properties, using the Soil­structure Interaction method (see picture below). Note, in this exercise the
soil is not a reactive clay. Then, we have to set all slab panels to be in contact with soil. Then, we can run the analysis in SLABS software.

Soil Properties in SLABS Software

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 37 of 308

In order to design the strip footings, in SLABS software we need to define Wide Beams over each strip footing. (see picture below).

Define Wide Beam over each Strip Footing

In order to design the steel in the strip footings, we can select one Wide Beam at the time and select “Wide Beams Envelope/design” option. (see picture below)

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 38 of 308

Wide Beam (strip footing) Design Results

The steel in the slab is design as normal, like in a suspended slab.

Also, we need to check the pressure for the Service Load combination, and compare the maximum values with the allowable soil pressure. (see picture below)

Soil Pressure for Service Load combination

We also need to check the vertical settlements, and confirm that the walls above are able to take the relative settlements. It is recommended to use articulated
masonry for constructions of this type.

­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­

As a discussion, we may observe that the slab has a narrow zone at the middle, and we may expect some stress concentration along the lines A and B (see picture
below). One suggestion might be to extend the horizontal beam, in order to stiffen up the weak zone (see point C in the picture)

Weak Zones

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 39 of 308

Date Modified: 21/05/2014

Title: Pavement Design for Moving Loaiding ­ SLABS

[ SLABS > Modelling > How to... > Design Pavement for Moving Loaiding ]

Description: How to Design Pavement for Moving Truck Loads

SLABS software can be used to design pavements for trucks used in mining industry or any other moving load. A guideline for pavement slab design is described
below; however users are encouraged to check the procedure and results and make their own engineering judgements as necessary.

Step 1: Modelling the geometry of one independent pavement slab and assigning the thickness.

Any slab geometry can be modelled in SLABS software, but in this case of pavement design it is generally a simple rectangular shape.

In some cases, the pavement has increased thickness (or beams) along the edge:

In the case where each slab pavement is not independent but connected to each other with shear joints, the slab geometry can be modelled as shown in the picture
below. For more shear joints see Simulate Joints.

Step 2: Calculating the load which will be applied by each tire and the distance between the loads.

In this example, the total weight of the truck (empty or loaded) is assumed to be divided to each tire equally. Note: That might not be always the case, please check
the truck specifications.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 40 of 308

Step 3: Deciding the positions of the truck moving on the pavement.

In order to cover less favorable cases, several positions need to be considered. Some of the recommended cases, but not limited to, are illustrated in the following
figure.

Step 4: Applying each loading condition to a separate basic load case.

For the example shown in the previous figure there will be 1 Dead Load and 9 Live Loads.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 41 of 308

Step 5: Applying each Live Load case to a separate strength load combination to simulate the moving truck load.

Step 6: Entering the Material Properties such as concrete and steel grade, bar diameter, concrete cover in the Material Table available from [Input>Material
Properties].

Also, make sure that the slabs are in contact with soil and Soil Properties are defined as stated in the Geotechnical Report. See also Material Properties & Input
Parameters, Slab on Ground.

Step 7: Mesh and Analyse the model from [Solve] Menu.

Step 8: Revise Soil Pressure

Step 9: Revise the reinforcement rate top and bottom in both directions. The reinforcement results are for the envelope of all strength load combinations.

­­­­

Note: In cases where there are edge beams, those areas can also be designed using 'Wide Beam' tool. See also Wide Beams.

Date Modified: 23/03/2012

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 42 of 308

Title: Frequency of a Footing on Friction Piles ­ SLABS

[ SLABS > Modelling > How to... ]

Description: How to Calculate the Frequency of an Isolated Footing on Friction Piles

In order to calculate the frequency of an isolated footing on friction piles, the user can model the piles as elastic springs for the purpose of frequency analysis.

See also Elastic Spring

Date Modified: 16/05/2014

Title: Pile Caps ­ SLABS

[ SLABS > Slab on ground > Pile Caps ]

Description: How to design Pile Caps

Strictly speaking SLABS software should not be used to design pile caps, because of the complex 3D stress distribution in the concrete block. The load path from the
column above to the piles under is relatively complex and only a 3D finite element analysis can provide a complete picture of the internal stresses.

Pile Cap Examples

A pile cap design is governed by shear forces, and SLABS can evaluate slab shear based on Thick Plate theory, which will provide relatively reliable values for the shear
in the pile cap. Note that SLABS software does not perform a detailed shear steel design for this configuration, and therefore the shear steel design has to be
perfumed manually.

SLABS software can be used relaibley to evaluate the reactions on the piles.

­­­

Geenral notes wher SLABS is used for pile cap design

­The plies are modelled as circular column under.

­The pile cap is modelled as suspended slab, ignoring the soil contact.

­On the model and solver settings [ Settings > Model and Solvers ] select “ Slab Shear by Thick Plate Theory ”.

­Use mesh size of 0.25m

­Examine internal shear forces by “Thick Plate Theory” in X and Y direction individually.

­Design the shear steel manually.

­Confirm the results with some alternative method.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 43 of 308

Note: We consider that the Strut­and­tie approach is too simplistic, and we do not recommend it.

Also see: Slab Shear

Date Modified: 16/05/2014

Title: Waffle Slab

[ SLABS > Slab on ground > Waffle Slab ]

Description: How to model a waffle slab on ground.

When modelling a waffle slab on ground in SLABS software, the suggested approach is to model the ribs with “line beams ”, and to set the entire slab to be in contact
with the soil.

The figure below illustrates the difference between the more "intuitive" solution and the recommended modelling approach.

We understand that only the bottom surface of the ribs will be in contact with soil, but for the purpose of the analysis we put the entire slab on soil. This approach
will not make any difference to the ribs design, but it will produce a more realistic soil pressure and settlements values. Also, the slab segments between the ribs are
very small and this will not make no difference in their design. We assume that the concentrated soil pressure right at the bottom surface of the ribs will be very
quickly redistributed, forming a uniform soil pressure, evenly spread over the entire slab. SLABS models reflect this situation.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 44 of 308

Date Modified: 4/08/2014

Title: Soil­Structure Interaction of Highly Reactive Soils.

[ SLABS > Slab on ground > Soil­Structure Interaction of Highly Reactive Soils ]

Description: How to simulate the soil­structure interaction of highly reactive soils.

Overview

Highly reactive soils exhibit high characteristic surface movement which is critical in the design of slab on ground structures. SLABS software can be used to effectively
simulate and predict the effects of the soil­structure interaction of highly reactive soils.

The simplified approach used in this chapter is taken from AS2870:2011 ­ Residential Slabs and Footings.

Two extreme conditions are considered when dealing with the soil­structure interaction of highly reactive soils:

! centre heave mound;

! edge heave.

The final design of the slab and beam reinforcement should satisfy both the extreme cases.

To simulate these cases in SLABS, the user has to manually perform calculations for both of the extreme situations as detailed below. The mound shape is assumed to
be flat, with movement occuring over edge distance, e.

AS2870:2011 gives the following formulas (see Appendix F, p. 83):

! For centre heave mound:

where:

e = edge distance;

Hs= depth of design soil suction change in m (depends on location and climate: AS2870 ­ Table 2.4);

ym = differential mound movement in mm, may be taken as 0.7 ys for centre heave in absence of more reliable calculations;

ys = characteristic surface movement.

! For edge heave:

where

L = slab length in the design direction in m;

ym = differential mound movement in mm, may be taken as 0.5 ys for edge heave in absence of more accurate calculations;

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 45 of 308

Wf = shape factor used to define the compound parabola in edge heave (refer to AS2870:2011, Figure F2, p84).

Example

For slab on ground pictured above, assume the following soil properties:

ys = 75 mm (H2 class soil)

Hs = 1.5 m (For Sydney, taken from AS2870:2011, Table 2.4)

Now we can model the soil­structure interaction in SLABS:

! Centre heave mound:

ym = 0.7 ys = 52.5 mm

e = 1.5/8 + 52.5/36 = 1.64 m

! Edge heave:

e = 0.6 + 52.5/25 = 2.7 m

Wf = 0.67 (assume normal profile, taken from AS2870:2011, Figure F2)

(1 ­ Wf)*e = (1 ­ 0.67)*2.7 = 0.89 m

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 46 of 308

The next step would be to analyse both situations and design appropriate reinforcement. The final design should cover both the central heave mound and edge heave
cases.

Date Modified: 31/07/2014

CHECKING MODEL GEOMETRY - SLABS

­ Check Model Data

­ Checking Slab Geometry

Title: Checking Model Geometry: Check Model Data

[ SLABS > Modelling > Cheking Model Geometry ]

Description: Internal check of geometry erros that may have occured while generating the model

Once a model has been generated and the load applied, it is recommended to run the algorithms in the Check Structure window as a method of confirming the model
geometry is correct. The Check Structure form is displayed by selecting [ Tools > Check Model Data ] from the Main Menu.

If there are any errors or suspicious input contained in the model data a report is displayed with the details in the Information Window. This report can be opened as
a Note Pad document by double clicking inside the Information Window.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 47 of 308

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Checking Model Geometry: Checking Slab Geometry

[ SLABS > Modelling > Cheking Model Geometry ]

Description: Detailed check of the Slab Geometry Line input in a model

The Slab Geometry Lines that are contained within a SLABS model can be checked in detail for any errors such as off­sets or misalignments with other elements that
are contained in the model by running [ Tools > Check Slab Geomtery ] from the Main Menu.

The software will present an input box that allows the user to set a tolerance. It is recommended to run the check with 0.1m and then 0.05m as the tolerance setting.

If there are any potential errors in the geometry, SLABS will present a table in the top left corner of the Working Area as shown in the screen shot below;

When the user clicks on the co­ordinates that are displayed in the table, [for example in the screen shot above: (33.08,57.46)] then the software will automatically

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 48 of 308

zoom to the location of the errors as shown in the screen shot below;

The same error is shown in the following screen shot, however for clarity the zoom has been magnified to identify the type of errors that has been detected ­ in this
case the slab geometry line that was imported is slightly too long and does not align correctly to form a corner.

If the user now clicks the buttom in the table lebelled as 'fix it' SLABS will try and resolve the error automatically. In this situation the software recognised the type of
error and correctly modified the geometry by clipping the Geometry Line so the lines align forming a 90 degree corner, as shown in the screen shot below;

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 49 of 308

If the software can not automatically fix any geometry errors correctly when the 'fix it' button is pressed, the user can press the 'undo' button.

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

SLABS ­ HOW TO...

­ Find Elements & Co­ordinates

­ Simulate Joints

­ Cut the Model

­ View the Model in 3D

­ Use Snapping Mode

­ Double­skin Walls

­ Short Return Walls

­ Improve Accuracy of Slab Reinforcement Design

Title: Find Elements & Co­ordinates

[ SLABS > Modelling > How to... ]

Description: How to use the Find options to search for elements or co­ordinates within a model

The Find window in SLABS has been refined to include many options that were not available in previous versions of SLABS such as Nodes and Finite Elements (by
number).

The Find menu is available under [ Edit > Find ] from the Main Menu, or can be displayed by using the short cut input 'Ctrl + F' on the keyboard.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 50 of 308

Date Modified: 16/05/2014

Title: How To Simulate Joints in a SLABS model

[ SLABS > Modelling > How to... ]

Description: Detailed overview of generating joints and how they modify the behaviour of the model

Joints were introduced in SLABS as a method of modelling 2 separate floors that are connected along a particular location. The 'connection' between the 2 sides
represents a corbel joint or 'hinge' ­ no moment transfer but full shear transfer. This means that there is not bending moment transferred across the joint, however
the deflections are the same on either side of the joint. Because SLABS assumes that the floor is fully restrained against horizontal movement, the in­plane actions
along the joints are always 0 (zero).

A joint is created by selecting [ Edit > Cut Model > Create Joint ] from the Main Menu, followed by entering a distance between 0.1m and 0.5m. The final step is to
click on 2 points within the model that will 'split' the floor into 2 parts. The Orthogonal Mode in the DTB along with the Snapping Mode can help with the location of
the joint position in the model relative to existing elements. Once the joint has been created, SLABS will automatically select the check box labelled 'Short Beams as
Corbel' in the Model and Solvers Settings Window, as shown below;

The sample screen shot below shows deflections results either side of the joint;

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 51 of 308

The moments in the following screen shot show a 'hinge' simulated at the location of the joint (zero moment tranferred across the joint);

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: How to Cut a Model

[ SLABS > Modelling > How to... ]

Description: Detailed overview of the steps required to cut a model

In SLABS a new tool has been introduced to cut a model at a particular location while keeping once side of the geometry (and applied loads). The software will
automatically delete the elements (and all loads in all Load Cases) on the other side of the cut line location as specified by the user.

The options for the cut tool are available under [ Edit > Cut Model ] from the Main Menu. The sub menu will offer the user the option to keep the geometry of the

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 52 of 308

model on either the left or the right side of the cut line. It is important to note that the direction the user specifies the cut line will determine which side of the cut line
is 'Left' and which side is 'Right'.

The example screen shot below shows that if the user selects [ Edit > Cut Model > Keep Left Side of Cut Line ] and then generates the cut line by clicking on point 1
and point 2, the 'left' side of the model that is retained is on the left side of the cut line shown below. If the user was to create the cut line by specifying point 2 first
followed by point 1 (ie: the line is created from top to bottom on screen) then the 'left' side will be the right part as shown in the screen shot below.

The screen shot below is the result after SLABS cut the model at the location shown in the screen shot above, retaining the left side of the model.

The screen shot below is an example if the user wanted to cut a model and retain the top part. The procedure would be to select [ Edit > Cut Model > Keep Right Side
of Cut Line ] and then create the cut line by clicking on the points marked as '1' following by clicking on the location marked as '2' (ie: the cut line is generated from
right to left on screen).

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 53 of 308

The result after the software deleted the elements (including all load applied in all Load Cases) is shown below;

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: How to View the Model in 3D

[ SLABS > Modelling > How to... ]

Description: Displaying the model using the 3D Viewer

In the Main Working Area of SLABS, the models are always displayed in Plan view. In SLABS a new 3D viewer has been included that allows the user to view the
model as a rendered 3D representation. The model can be rotated and options are included within the form to turn off certain elements and adjust the transparency.
After the analysis of the structure has been completed, the user can also select to view the deformed shape by clicking the appropriate box.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 54 of 308

The 3D view can be launched by selecting [ Tools > 3D View ] from the Main Menu. A sample screen shot of the 3D form is shown below;

3D View Find Element Shortcut Key: [Ctrl + F]

Date Modified: 19/05/2014

Title: How to Use Snapping Modes

[ SLABS > Modelling > How to... ]

Description: Description of the snapping modes

When generating or editing model geometry on the main screen with the mouse, an appropriate Snapping Mode needs to be selected. When the user clicks on the
main screen, the resulting geometry will depend on the active Snapping Mode. The Snapping Mode can be changed by clicking on the snapping tool (see picture
below), or by pressing the [ F2 ] on the keyboard.

Snapping Mode Tool [ F2 ]

The Snapping Mode will allow us to snap to different parts of the existing objects. There are three main, and three additional Snapping Modes.

Main Snapping Modes:

­ Snap to Grid (snap to the closes grid point, including the minor grid when it is invisible)

­ Snap to Corner (snap to column centroid, wall and beam end points, slab geometry line corners)

­ Snap to Edge (snap to closes point of the wall, beam, and geometry line)

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 55 of 308

Additional Snapping Modes:

­ Snap to CAD (snap to line ends on the CAD drawings background if it is loaded)

­ Snap to Colum Corner (rectangular columns only, works when Snap to Corner is active)

­ Snap to Wall Mid­point (works when snap to Corner is Active)

The "Snap to Colum Corner" and "Snap to Wall Mid­point" are optional, and they can be selected on the System Settings input panel accessible via [ Settings > System
Settings ].

Snap to Corner

Snap to Grid

Snap to Edge

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 56 of 308

Snap to CAD

Date Modified: 19/05/2014

Title: How to Model Double­Skin Walls

[ SLABS > Modelling > How to... ]

Description: How to Model Double­Skin Walls

If both walls in a double­skin walls are modelled, then the wall will create fixity along, which is not realistic. The reaction from two walls will make a moment couple,
which will create artificial fixity. (see pictures below)

Double –skin walls create fixity (WRONG)

Double –skin walls create fixity (WRONG)

The correct way to model double­skin walls is to enter only one of the walls.

Date Modified: 09/10/2013

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 57 of 308

Title: How to Simulate Pin­Pin Beams

[ SLABS > Modelling > How to... Simulate Pin­Pin Beams ]

Description: How to Simulate Pin­Pin Beams

In SLABS, only fix­fix beams are available, because they work as an integrated part of the slab. In order to simulate the pin­pin beams, 0.1m gaps can be created
between the beam ends and the beam supports.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 58 of 308

Date Modified: 10/10/2013

Title: How to Treat Short Return Walls

[ SLABS > Modelling > How to... Treat Short Return Walls ]

Description: Problem with fixity created by Short Return Walls

In SLABS modles and other software packages such as R/C Building and PT3D, sometimes there are short return walls (see picture blow)

Short Return Wall

These walls will generate end fixity in the model, because the short walls are line support and at both ends there will be some reactions which will create a “force
couple”, and this will produce a significant moment.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 59 of 308

Force Couple Creating a Moment

This fixity will reduce the mid­span deflections significantly. (see picture below)

Deflections WITH Short Return Wall

However, this fixity may not be present in the real structure, especially if the short wall is made of block work. We suggest, unless the wall is made of reinforced
concrete and we are certain that the wall can take the moment, that the short return walls are removed from the model.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 60 of 308

Deflections WITHOUT Short Return Wall

Date Modified: 20/05/2014

Title: How to Improve Accuracy of Slab Reinforcement Design

[ SLABS > Modelling > How to... Improve Accuracy of Slab Reinforcement Design ]

Description: Improve accuracy of slab top reinforcement design at columns

In a case of more complex geometry, when there are steps in the slab around a column, and when larger number of load combinations are used in the design envelop,
the moment diagram may vary considerably over a short distance in the direction perpendicular to the slab steps. In such a case the accuracy of the –ve bending
moments and the steel design have to be reviewed carefully, and in some cases manual improvement of the accuracy might be needed.
In the picture below a typical example of such case is given. The column edge does not coincide with the slab step, so there are two closely spaced “jumps” in the
moment diagram in Y­Y direction, one at the slab step, and one at the column edge.

Slab Step Near Column Edge

The variation of the moment diagram in Y­Y directions is shown in the picture below.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 61 of 308

If a mesh of 1.0m is used (see picture below), there will be just a few nodal points in this area, and the moment diagram may not be very accurate, because the mesh
is very coarse for this configuration. Note that coarse finite elements will not produce “non­accurate” results, but it will only smooth the moment peaks, which will
result in lower bending moments and lower steel rate at this particular location. In other words, a coarse mesh will “trim” the moment results peaks over a small
zone.

Coarse Finite Elements Mesh

As a result of the coarse mesh and the “trimmed” bending moments, in this example the steel design module will produce 2N20 bars extra top steel, in addition to the
basic top grid of 20 @ 200 (1,550 mm2/m). (see picture below)

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 62 of 308

Steel Results with Coarse Finite Element Mesh

Now, we can refine the mesh locally by introducing a few geometry lines segments, 2m long, (see picture below):

Extra Geometry Line Segments

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 63 of 308

Local Mesh Refinement

As a result of the local mesh refinement the peak design moment will be larger, and as a consequence the design will produce 6N20 bars extra top steel, in addition to the basic top
grid of N20 @ 200 (1,550 mm2/m). (see picture below)

Steel Results with Refined Finite Element Mesh

This might seem to be a large difference. However, note that finer­sized elements generally will overemphasize the negative moments at the columns and at the walls
ends, and our opinion is that even the original results of 2N20 extra top steel, produced with coarse mesh was acceptable. For instance, if there are only 2N20 extra
bars, then over 2.0m slab section with t= 280mm, there will be top steel, and the ultimate moment capacity is 340 kNm, which was comparable to the design
moment which in this case included Mxy.

It is important to remember, as a general rule, to use local mesh refinement in the zones where rapid variation of the results over a short distance is observed.

Date Modified: 07/05/2014

Title: How to Edit Geometry

[ SLABS > Modelling > How to... Edit Geometry]

Description: Outlines some helpful tools within SLABS software to assist the user with editing the geometry of a model.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 64 of 308

SLABS software has tools built into the software that allow the user to edit the geometry of the model efficiently and precisely. Below is a brief summary of the tools
available, for more details see the relevant chapters.

Set as Master: During the modelling process there may be a case were the user would like to align a particular element or slab geometry line to a specific location.
The location may be the same as an existing element that is positioned at a specific co­ordinate in X or Y. In that case, the alignment tools require a reference or
master to be set by the user. Once an element has been 'Set as Master' the co­ordinates of the element are temporarily kept in memory and used to align other
elements. See Set As Master .

Copy: To assist the user in defining multiple elements with the same properties, such as a set of identical columns at a set spacing, copy function is particularly useful.
The user can select an existing element (or multiple elements by holding down ‘Shift’) to be copied, then specify the spacing in the X and Y directions and the number
of copies to be created. Alternatively, the user can copy the element using Copy ­ Two points function without having to determine the exact spacing between the
elements. See Copy Elements .

Copy – two points: This function is similar to copy, but it allows the user to visually specify the location of the element to be copied. This is particularly useful when
the spacing between elements is not known. When using this function, the user needs to select the element or elements to be copied, then specify the base point for
copy function and finally the destination point. The user can then enter the number of copies to be created. See Copy Elements .

Move: This function allows the user to shift the position of an existing element by specified distance in both X and Y axes. See Move Elements .

Move – two points: Similar to move, allows the user to shift the position of an existing element, but the user only needs to specify a base point and a destination
point on the screen. See Move Elements .

Mirror Elements: This function creates a copy of an existing element and mirrors it about X or Y axis. This is useful when generating symmetric models with complex
shapes. The user needs to select an existing element (or elements) and specify a line to serve as an axis for the mirror function. See Mirror Elements .

Shift, Rotate or Scale Model: These functions apply to the entire model, rather than separate elements. The functons are especialy useful when the model geometry
has been imported from a CAD drawing or from a BMP file. See Shift, Rotate or Scale Model .

Add/Remove Nodes: In order to generate a floor slab, SLABS software requires a closed polygonal line to be drawn as a slab perimeter. To make editing slab
geometry easier and more efficient, the user can add or remove nodes to the existing polylines. See Add or Remove Nodes .

Create Slab Offset: The user can create an offset by applying 'Create Similar Closed Line' function, available through right­click. This function can be applied to a
closed geometry line to create an offset at a specified distance. This function is useful when creating complex slab geometry, such as folds in the slab. See Create Slab
Offset.

Date Modified: 23/05/2014

Title: Set As Master

[ SLABS > Modelling > How to... > Edit Geometry > Set As Master]

Description: How to align elements within a SLABS model by setting an element as master.

During the modelling process there may be a case were the user would like to align a particular element or slab geometry line to a specific location. The location may
be the same as an existing element that is positioned at a specific co­ordinate in X or Y. In that case, the alignment tools require a reference or master to be set by the
user. Once an element has been 'Set as Master' the co­ordinates of the element are temporarily kept in memory and used to align other elements. The elements can
be aligned in the X or Y axes or perpendicularly.

An example of how to use this function is set out below:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 65 of 308

In the image above, one of the columns is misaligned and has to be adjusted to be in line with the other columns.

It is convenient to select one of the columns as the master. In other cases, walls, geometry lines or nodes can also be selected as master to efficiently
align other elements.

The columns are now aligned in the X axis. Similar steps are to be followed in order to align other elements within a SLABS model, such as walls, nodes,
beams, loads and geometry lines. The elements can also be aligned in the Y axis.

Date Modified: 30/05/2014

Title: Copy Elements

[ SLABS > Modelling > How to... > Edit Geometry > Copy Elements ]

Description: How to copy geometry within a SLABS model.

Within SLABS software, the elements can be copied, either individually or in groups, using two functions: 'Copy' and 'Copy ­ two points', both of which can be accessed
by right­clicking the elements to be copied, or from [ Edit ] menu, or using keyboard shortcuts.

Copy: To assist the user in defining multiple elements with the same properties, such as a set of identical columns at a set spacing, copy function is particularly useful.
The user can select an existing element (or multiple elements by holding down ‘Shift’) to be copied, then specify the spacing in the X and Y directions and the number

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 66 of 308

of copies to be created. Alternatively, the user can copy the element using Copy ­ Two points function without having to determine the exact spacing between the
elements.

[ Ctrl + C ] is the keyboard shortcut for the copy function.

The following example illustrates the copy function:

In the above image, the three columns in the middle have been selected and the user would like to copy them to the midspan on the left. After selecting, right­click on
one of the columns and select 'Copy' from the menu that appears. Next, the user will need to enter the values for DeltaX (ie coordinate shift in the X direction), DeltaY
and the number of copies to be created:

In this example a single copy of the columns is to be created 4m to the left of the existing columns with no shift in the Y, so '­4, 0, 1' has been entered in the field. The
resulting final geometry is shown below:

A new set of columns has now been created at the location specified. See below for the same example using 'Copy ­ two points' function.

Copy – two points: This function is similar to copy, but it allows the user to visually specify the location of the element to be copied. This is particularly useful when
the exact spacing between elements is not known. When using this function, the user needs to select the element or elements to be copied, then specify the base
point for copy function and finally the destination point. The user can then enter the number of copies to be created.

[ Shift + Ctrl + C ] is the keyboard shortcut for the 'Copy ­ two points' function.

The following example illustrates the use of the function:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 67 of 308

In the above image, the three columns in the middle have been selected and the user would like to copy them to the midspan on the left. After selecting, right­click on
one of the columns and select 'Copy ­ two points' from the menu that appears. Then the user will need to select the base point (1 in the image below) and the
destination point (2 in the image). Note that 'Snap to Grid' mode is selected for this example.

After the 2 points have been specified, the user will need to enter the number of copies to be created:

After pressing 'OK', the columns will be copied to their destination:

Date Modified: 30/05/2014

Title: Move Elements

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 68 of 308

[ SLABS > Modelling > How to... > Edit Geometry > Move Elements ]

Description: How to move geometry within a SLABS model.

Within SLABS software, the elements can be moved by using 'Move' or 'Move ­ two points' functions. These functions can be accessed by right­clicking the elements
to be moved, or from [ Edit ] menu, or using keyboard shortcuts.

Move: This function allows the user to shift the position of an existing element by specified distance in both X and Y axes. The shortcut for the function is [ Ctrl ­ M ].
To move the element, the user will have to input the distance in both X and Y axes.

Move – two points: Similar to move, allows the user to shift the position of an existing element, but the user only needs to specify a base point and a destination
point on the screen. The Keyboard shortcut is [ Shift + Ctrl + M ]. The user will need to select by left clicking on the working area a base point for the move as well as
the destination point. Note that the results will depend on the Snapping Mode selected by the user.

Date Modified: 02/06/2014

Title: Mirror Elements

[ SLABS > Modelling > How to... > Edit Geometry > Mirror Elements ]

Description: How to mirror geometry within a SLABS model.

'Mirror Elements' function creates a copy of an existing element and mirrors it about X or Y axis. This is useful when generating symmetric models with complex
shapes. The user needs to select an existing element (or elements) and specify a line to serve as an axis for the mirror function. The function is available through [ Edit
> Mirror Selected Elements ] on the main menu. The user can choose to mirror the selected elements about either a horizontal or a vertical line. Note that the
coordinates of the line need to be known prior to selecting the function.

Date Modified: 02/06/2014

Title: Shift, Rotate or Scale Model

[ SLABS > Modelling > How to... > Edit Geometry > Shift, Rotate or Scale Model ]

Description: How to Shift, Rotate or Scale Model within a SLABS.

SLABS software allows the user to shift, rotate or scale the entire model. These functions are applied to the entire model, rather than separate elements. The functons
are especialy useful when the model geometry has been imported from a CAD drawing or from a BMP file. They can be accessed through [ Edit > Shift­Rotate­Scale
Model ].

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 69 of 308

The following options are available for editing the entire model:

Shift in X - X / Shift in Y - Y : The entire model will be shifted either in X­X or Y­Y by the distance specified by the user.

Auto Shift: The model is shifted so that the bottom left corner is in the positive coordinates. This is done because SLABS software cannot handle negative coordinates
or very large coordinates.

Rotate: The model will be rotated about a specified point by a specified angle. The user needs to enter the X and Y coordinates of the base point and the angle of
rotation in degrees. The model is then rotated anticlockwise around the user defined point.

Scale: The model will be scaled and the elements are resized by a factor entered by the user.

Date Modified: 02/06/2014

Title: Add or Remove Nodes

[ SLABS > Modelling > How to... > Edit Geometry > Add or Remove Nodes]

Description: How to add or remove nodes within a SLABS model.

In order to generate a floor slab, SLABS software requires a closed polygonal line to be drawn as a slab perimeter. To make editing slab geometry easier and more
efficient, the user can add or remove nodes to the existing polylines.

The user can add a node by right­clicking anywhere on the geometry line and selecting 'Insert Node'. Additionally, nodes can be inserted at an intersection with
another existing geometry line ('Insert Intersection Node') or at the midpoint of the selected geometry line ('Insert Mid­node').

The user can remove a node by right­clicking it and selecting 'Remove Node' from the available menu.

Date Modified: 02/06/2014

Title: Create an Offset

[ SLABS > Modelling > How to... > Edit Geometry > Create an Offset]

Description: How to Create an Offset within a SLABS model.

The user can create an offset by applying 'Create Similar Closed Line' function, available through right­click. This function can only be applied to a closed geometry line
to create an offset at a specified distance. This function is useful when creating complex slab geometry, such as folds in the slab.

For example, let's take the following closed geometry line:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 70 of 308

While it is possible to manually create another line at a specified distance, 'Create similar closed line' can be used to reach the same result more efficiently:

The user will need to enter the offset distance in the following dialog box, in this example it was selected to be 1m:

The resulting geometry is shown in the following image:

Date Modified: 02/06/2014

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 71 of 308

STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS - SLABS

- Slab Geometry

- Beam Elements

- Band Beams

- Column Elements

- Pile Elements

- Wall Elements

- Element Types

- Elastic Spring

Title: Slab Geometry

[ SLABS > Structural Elements > Slab Geometry ]

Description: Concept of modelling a floor, including a comparison between 3­4 sided Slab Panels and the Slab Geometry Concept.

The most significant development that has been made to the SLABS software program is the introduction of Slab Geometry Lines in SLABS. In previous versions of
SLABS the floor was made up of individual 3 or 4 sided slab panel elements, and it was up to the user to arrange the individual slab panel elements so that different
areas of the floor can be assigned a particular thickness while also being able to apply the appropriate pressure loads to specific areas.

In previous versions of SLABS the final arrangement of the slab panel elements is the superposition of the different slab thickness and the architecture that will
correspond to different pressure loads for each Load Case. The image below represents a series of simplified CAD drawings of a typical floor within a residential
building that would be used as a basis to generate the floor in SLABS.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 72 of 308

The screen shot below shows the model imported into SLABS. In comparison to older versions of the software,since the Slab Geometry concept in SLABS is not based
on 3­4 sided slab panels, there are no redundant slab edges and the geometry is noticeably simplified. The only requirement the user needs to input into the software
is a minimum of one 'closed' perimeter to generate the slab edge. In this example the outer perimeter is 'closed' allowing the rest of the slab geometry to be entered
exactly as shown in the diagram 'Super Position of Geometry and Loading'.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 73 of 308

The screen below shows the slab zones coloured according to the thickness assigned. It is important to note that the user entered the thickness of each zone AFTER
the mesh has been generated.

The screen below shows the slab zones coloured according to the applied pressure in Load Case 1 (Dead Load). As for the slab zone thickness, it is important to note
that the user entered the pressure load for each zone AFTER the mesh has been generated.

The input of the pressure load for Load Case 2 is the same as for Load Case 1 that is described above. The screen shot below shown the slab zones coloured according
to the pressure load applied to Load Case 2 (Live Load).

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 74 of 308

Date Modified: 19/05/2014

Title: Slab Panel Properties

[ SLABS > Structural Elements > Slab Geometry > Slab Panel Properties ]

Description: Concept of modelling a floor, including a comparison between 3­4 sided Slab Panels and the Slab Geometry Concept.

Each slab panel (zone) has several properties associated with each particular panel. These are displayed in the property table for each slab, as shown in the screen
shot below:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 75 of 308

The following properties can be manually input for each slab panel after meshing :
Thickness, m: Gross slab thickness.
Type:Slab Type can be used to define the direction of the steel bars, if they are not orthogonal. Also, the Type parameter can be used in the “Concrete and
Reinforcement Table” to define a number of design parameters. (See Refined steel approach)
Two/One­Way: By default all slab panels are two­way. However, the user may set some of the slab panels to act one­way, either in the global Y­Y or X­X direction. If
a slab panel is set to be one­way, then during the analysis the stiffness in the secondary direction will be divided by the “One Way Stiffens Factor”, available on the
Material Properties Input panel. A factor of 1:100 will produce zero moment in the secondary direction.
Stiffness Factor: This factor can be used to increase the stiffness of selected slab panels. Usually, the slab panels forming Band Beams have a stiffness factors of 4 to
10. During the analysis, this factor will be used to multiply the slab thickness, which will increase the slab stiffness, and as a result the Band Beams will “attract” larger
internal forces. And, as a consequence, the Band Beam will have more steel. The increased slab thickness is not used in the deflections calculations.
Reo Top / Btm, x­x / y­y: By default, at the end of the slab property table there are four input parameters which can be used to prescribe user defined steel for all
four layers. These four input parameters are available only in the General approach.

However, when the Refined approach is used the steel is defined in the Reinforcement input table, and the four reinforcement input parameters are not available.
(see picture below)

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 76 of 308

Slab Property Table Without User Defined Steel

Date Modified: 19/05/2014

Title: Beam Elements (Line Beam)

[ SLABS > Structural Elements > Beam Elements ]

Description: How to generate, adjust and delete beam elements. Notes regarding the parameters contained in the Property Table for a beam element.

Beam Elements (Line Beams) can be defined either along the slab panel edges or anywhere inside slab panels. The line beams can only have a rectangular cross
section.

Beam Element (Line beam)

A beam element can be created by pressing the Beam drawing tool button, and clicking on two points on the working area. The orthogonal mode tool contained in
the Dynamic Task Bar (DTB) can be used to assist to create beam elements that are parallel (or perpendicular) to the X or Y axes. Beam elements can also be imported
from a CAD file.

A Line Beam Element is connected to the rest of the structure only at the Nodal Points located along its center­line (see picture below). The mesh Nodal Points are
generated when the finite element mesh is created.

Beam Connected to the Slab in 9 Nodal Points

Beam properties may be viewed by selecting a beam. Once a beam is selected, the section properties may be changed in the property table.

Beam Properties Table

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 77 of 308

Beam elements can be deleted by selecting one or more beams and either pressing the 'delete' key or clicking on the delete icon on the Main Task bar.

During the analysis, it is assumed that the slab and the beams work together, forming T sections. In the analytical model the beam element is a one dimensional
element, a line with bending stiffness attached to the 2D plate finite elements of the slab panels. The vertical offset of the beams is considered by calculating the
moment of inertia about an axis located at 0.25D from the top of the beam section (D is the beam section depth, including the slab thickness). It is important to note
that the torsional stiffness of beam elements are only considered if the check box labelled 'Include Beam Torsion' in the Material Input window is selected.

Beam Section

In some cases there will be a small bending moment at the ends of a simply supported beam. Normally, it is expected that at a pinned support the value of the
bending moment should be zero. However, when a beam is connected to a slab a small moment can be generated due to the large difference between the stiffness of
the slab and the beam.

An upturn beam is defined by entering –ve section depth in the beam property table.

In SLABS, only fix­fix beams are available, because they work as an integrated part of the slab. Also, see how to simulate pin­pin beams .

Also see: Band Beams Difference Between Line Beams and Band Beams Beam Stiffness and its Effect on Moment Diagrams

Date Modified: 19/05/2014

Title: Beam I gross ­ SLABS

[ SLABS > Structural Elements > Beam Elements > Beam I gross ]

Description: How Igross of the line beam is calculated

A Line Beam is attached to the slab plate, and it makes an integral part of the slab­beam assembly, forming an imaginary T section. For the purpose of calculating the
intern forces in the slab and in the beams, during the static analysis the gross second moment of area of the beam is used. The Line Beam Igross is calculated at
each Finite Element nodal point in respect to the slab system plane in the following manner:

The slab and the beam geometry is shown in the image below.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 78 of 308

The width of the flange of the imaginary T section is 8t. This larger number is adopted in order to put more emphasise on the slab, and to make the beam offset "s"
larger, which will produce lager values if beam's Igross. Note that the beam Igross will be further increased by the Beam Stiffness Factor . The recommended value
of the Beam Stiffness Factor is 4.

­­­

In SLABS software, during the meshing the slab system plane is sub­divided into Finite Element triangles. Each triangle has three nodes. Each node has three degrees
of freedom: vertical translation, rotation in the direction of the global X­X axes, and rotation in the direction of the global Y­Y axes. The line beams have vertical
offset, and they are subdivided in line segments which coincide with the slab nodal pints. At each beam node there are the same three degrees of freedom as in the
plate. The stiffness of the line beams along the three degrees of freedom is evaluated at each slab nodal point considering the vertical offset, and it is added to the
slab stiffness. Now, the slab and the line beams work together, and they form an integral structural system.

Line Beam Stiffness

Date Modified: 22/05/2014

Title: Band Beams

[ SLABS > Structural Elements > Band Beams ]

Description: How to generate and design Band Beams.

In SLABS software we distinguish two types of beams: Line Beams and Band Beams.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 79 of 308

Band Beam Made of Ticker Slab Panels

Line Beams are “old fashioned”, narrow and deep beams. For instance a Line Beam can have a section of 400mm wide x 600mm deep. In this case we can use the
Beam tool to generate the this type of line beams. Line beams are connected to the rest of the slab at the nodal points located along its center­line. The width of the
beam is ignored in the overall geometry of the slab. The width of the Line Beams is relatively small in comparisons to the slab span, and therefore this approximation
will not influence the results. Traditionally, reinforced concrete beams are constructed to be relatively narrow with greater depth than width. For instance a
traditional beam will be 300mm to 400mm wide and 600mm to 800mm deep. These types of beams should be modelled as beam ‘line’ elements. We recommend
that the maximum width of a ‘line’ beam element is no more than 800mm.

The Band Beams are wide and shallow, for instance a wide beam can be 1,600mm wide x 350mm deep. Sometimes, the Band Beams can be as wide as 2,400mm. In
such case we cannot use Line Beams because we cannot ignore the beam section width. In SLABS software Band Beams are created as ticker slab panels. So, the user
has to define a slab zone for each Band Beam and assign an appropriate slab thickness. During the analysis the Band Beams will be modeled as plate elements, and
they will be analyzed as a slab with increased thickness.

However, user should note that the beams wider than 2000mm may not work as a single section, and also the results of beams wider than 2400mm should be
checked with alternative methods.

Band Beam Modelled as Ticker Slab

Now, after the analysis we would prefer to design the steel in the Band Beams as we would for a beam section. In order to design the steel in the Band Beams we
need to define a Wide Beam element over each Band Beam. A Wide Beam is not a structural element, but it is only a “means” to identify the Band Beams and to
extract the results from the plate elements. The Wide Beams have no thickness, and they can be defined at any time after the analysis, and they will not affect the
structural model in any way.

Wide Beam Over a Band Beam

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 80 of 308

It is important to note that Wide Beam elements are NOT included as a structural element in a SLABS model, but they are only used as a method to extract the results
from the thicker slab panels.

During the analysis, the slab zones making up the Band Beams will be subdivided into plate finite elements and they will be treated as a thick slab. The ticker slab
panels will not attract much larger internal actions, i.e. the bending moments in the Band Beams will be just fractionally larger than the surrounding slab.
Consequently the Band Beams will be lightly reinforced, with a similar amount of reinforcement as in the slab. This contradicts the tradition definition of a beam,
which is treated as a line support and it therefore it will attract much larger internal forces.

In SLABS software there is a Slab Stiffness Factor which will artificially increase the stiffness of the Band Beams (ticker slab panels), and because of this factor the
bending moments will be larger in these slab zones, and therefore there will be a larger amount of reinforcement in the Band Beams. This will bring the Band Beam
results closer to the manual approach, where the Band Beams are designed separately and the entire load from the slab is applied onto the Band Beams. The Stiffness
Factors for the slab panels can be entered independently for each slab zone in the property table, as shown in the screen shot below:

Slab Stiffness Factor

Each Wide Beam in a SLABS model can take on a different value for the Span Sub­division parameter. This parameter defines how many sections the software will
generate between each span when the results are extracted for the Wide Beam. In general, a higher number of sub­divisions will yield ‘smoother’ results along the
Wide Beam.

Once the model is analysed, the Wide Beam results can be extracted by selecting [ Results > Wide Beam Load Case/Combin. <or> Wide Beam Envelope Design ].

Also see: Results > Wide Beam Line Beams Difference Between Line Beams and Band Beams

==================

SLABS software offers three alternate methods to define Wide Beams:

Wide Beams Method 1:

Generating Wide Beams by specifying 2 points. The width of the Wide Beam is manually entered by the user.

Once the second point has been defined by the user, the software will display the Wide Beam with a default wide set to 1m. The user can then select the Wide Beam
and change the width in the property table. (See figure below)

Wide Beam: Manual Define - Two Points

Wide Beams Method 2:

Generating Wide Beams by specifying 3 points. The width of the Wide Beam is defined by the second click and the length of the Wide Beam is defined by the third
click. (See figure below)

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 81 of 308

Wide Beam: Manual Define - Three Points

Wide Beams Method 3:

Generate a Wide Beam using the slab panels preselected by the use: "4-Node Slab Panels" Editing Rule Only

In this example the ‘Cumulative Selection’ mode is selected and then the slab panels are selected by clicking on each panel with the left mouse button. While the slab
panels are selected, the Wide Beam is created by clicking on the ‘Wide Beam’ icon located in the Tool Box. The Wide Beam is then displayed as a hatched element as
shown in the screen shot below;

Generate a Wide Beam using the slab panels preselected by the user - "4 Node Slab Panels" Editing Rule Only

Also See: Beam Results: Wide Beams Line Beams Difference Between Line Beams and Band Beams

Date Modified: 19/05/2014

Title: Column Elements

[ SLABS > Structural Elements > Column Elements ]

Description: How to generate, adjust and delete column elements. Notes regarding the parameters contained in the Property Table for a column element.

Columns elements provide vertical supports to the slab. The top end of the column is attached to the slab at one point, located at the centroid of the column cross
section. A column will restrain any vertical movement of the slab at that point.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 82 of 308

Column Connected to Slab in One Point (center point)

Column sections that have a circular or rectangular/square section are referred to as 'simple sections'. These types of columns can be created either by importing
from a CAD file or manually by selecting the column drawing tool, entering the appropriate section size in the Property Input table and clicking on the working area.

In SLABS users can only generate column sections that are 'complex' by importing the section information from CAD. Examples of complex sections are shown below:

The properties of an existing column can be modified by selecting the column and changed by values in the property table.

When a column is created, the current column properties are assigned to the column. For rectangular columns the dimension A is the dimension parallel to the local
x­x axes and dimension B is along the local y­y axes. Column bending moment results are given in the local axes.

The fixity of the columns can be assigned as:

! Fix top and btm

! Fix top ­ pin btm
! Pin top ­ fix btm
! Pin top and btm

The top end of the column is attached to the slab, and the bottom end is attached to the structure below. This setting is can be applied to each column individually. A
new addition to SLABS is the option to set a partial fixity as a percentage for each column element independently.

If the fixity condition is set to a pinned there will be no bending moment results for these columns. The length of the columns can be entered in the property table,
and must be identical for all the columns in the model.

A SLABS model considers only the stiffness of columns below the slabs. If the stiffness of the column above the slabs is to be considered, then the column height
should be entered as 50% of the actual height. For example if there are columns below and above the slab, and the column height is 3.2m, then the column height
should be entered as 1.6m.

The geometry of the columns that are entered as 'above' the slab is only used to in the punching shear (from above) calculations.

Column Property Table

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 83 of 308

The column elements can be placed either on the slab edge or anywhere inside the slab perimeter. The user has to check the placement of the columns carefully,
since the software only considers actions to go through the centroid of the column. That means that columns with centroids that lie slightly outside the slab perimeter
will be ignored in the analysis. Column elements can be deleted by selecting one or more columns and either pressing the 'delete' key or clicking on the delete icon on
the Main Task bar.

The self weight of the columns above the slab are not automatically included in the reaction calculations and can be included in the reaction calculations by generating point loads at
the locations of the columns. The user needs to select the columns above that are to have point loads generated at their location and while the column elements are selected
the Point Load icon in the tool box is pressed. The software will then present an input window so the magnitude is entered in the Load Case that is shown on the Main Task bar. This
function is useful when the reactions are to be transferred to the floor below.

If the self weight of the supporting column elements is to be included in the reactions, the check box labelled 'Include Self Weight of Walls and Columns BELOW in
Reactions' need to be checked. This check box is located on the The Load Case Label input table that is available by selecting [ Input > Load Labels and Factors > Basic
Load Case Labels ] from the Main Menu.

Date Modified: 20/05/2014

Title: Pile Elements in SLABS

[ SLABS > Structural Elements > Pile Elements ]

Description: How to generate, adjust and delete piles elements in SLABS.

SLABS software can be used to model two types of piles:

! Point Bearing Piles

! Friction Piles

SLABS models with Point Bearing Piles

When the bedrock or a strong soil layer is within a reasonable depth from the ground surface, the piles are typically extended to the rock surface. These types of piles
are the most common in practice, and in SLABS software they are modelled as ordinary circular columns. In order to generate slab­on­ground slab supported by Point
Bearing Piles the SLABS model is generated in the same manner as for a suspended slabs.
In the Material Properties input table the model is set not to be in contact with soil. For Point Bearing Piles the influence of the soil negligible, and therefore the
model is treated as suspended slab supported by columns.
Note that there the settlements at the location of the Point Bearing Piles will be zero, since he slabs is treated as suspended slab supported by columns.

SLABS models with Friction Piles

When Friction Piles are incorporated in a model, the 'Slab on Ground' check box contained within the Soil Properties input table under [ Input > Soil Properties ] is
switched on. Some appropriate soil properties should also be entered here, see Slab on Ground .Then in the Material Properties Input Table [ Input > Material
Settings ], the check box labelled 'Columns as Piles' must be switched On, as shown in the screen shot below;

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 84 of 308

Once the above properties and setting have been entered, the piles are introduced into the model in the same manner as for columns when modelling a suspended
slab, but they will act as friction Piles. A Friction Pile in the analysis is approximated with an elastic spring and is defined in the Pile Types Table, by defining two
values: 'Load at Y' and 'Settlement at Y'. The spring constant used in the analysis (representing a Friction Pile) is calculated as:

k = ( Load_Y ) / ( Settlement_Y )
Note: The 'Load at U' and 'Settlement at U' are not used in the software.

The pile diameter is only used for the purposes of plotting, and it is not used in the analysis.
The final step is to assign some properties for different type of piles (columns). Each pile type corresponds to the Pile Property type in the table as shown in the screen
shot below;

After the model is meshed and the analysis has been performed, the behaviour will model the slab as partially supported by the soil and partially supported by the
Friction Piles. SLABS will provide soil pressure results and piles reaction forces ­ Note that there will be some settlement values at the location of the Friction Piles.
It is recommended to under­value the stiffness properties of the soil as this will distribute a larger portion of the applied load to the Friction Piles.

See also: R/C Building; Structural Elements; Pile Elements

Date Modified: 20/05/2014

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 85 of 308

Title: Wall Elements

[ SLABS > Structural Elements > Wall Elements ]

Description: How to generate, adjust and delete wall elements. Notes regarding the parameters contained in the Property Table for a wall element.

A slab can be supported in the vertical direction by walls, columns and beams. The walls restrain any vertical movement of the slab along their length, and the
supporting conditions can be defined either as pinned, partially fixed or fully fixed.

A Wall Element is connected to the rest of the structure only at the Nodal Points located along its center­line (see picture below) The mesh Nodal Points are generate
when the finite elements mesh is created.

Wall Connected to the Slab in 6 Nodal Points

Wall elements can only be defined below the slab level, and we recommend that the fixity of all walls is defined as pinned as it can be very hard to practically achieve
a fully fixed connection between a slab and a wall. These options along with other parameters such as the location in X/Y, if the wall is above or below the
slab, height and the thickness can be modified in the Property Table as shown below;

Wall Property Table

Walls can be generated manually by selecting the Wall drawing tool in the tool box followed by clicking on two points within the working area. The status of the
snapping mode will determine how the coordinates of the wall are generated. The orthogonal mode tool contained in the Dynamic Task Bar (DTB) can be used to
assist to create wall elements that are parallel (or perpendicular) to the X or Y axes and can be enabled by pressing 'o' on the keyboard.

When importing walls from a CAD file, the user needs to select a minimum of 2 parallel lines and SLABS will then use the position of the two lines to determine the
location of the wall in the model and also automatically calculate and assign the thickness.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 86 of 308

The location of a wall can be along the slab panel edge or anywhere inside slab panels.

Wall elements can be deleted by selecting one or more walls and either pressing the 'delete' key or clicking on the delete icon on the Main Task bar.

It is important to note that the walls are connected to other structural elements along their centre­lines. When the finite element mesh is generated, the software will
automatically generate additional nodes along each wall where a slab panel or a beam is connected in order to provide continuous connection.

The self weight of the walls above the slab is not automatically included in the reaction calculations and can be included in the reaction calculations by generating line
loads along the walls. The user needs to select the walls above that are to have line loads generated at their location and while the wall elements are selected the Line
Load icon in the tool box is pressed. The software will then present an input window so the magnitude is entered in the Load Case that is shown on the Main Task
bar. This function is useful when the reactions are to be transferred to the floor below.

If the self weight of the supporting wall elements is to be included in the reactions, the check box labelled 'Include Self Weight of Walls and Columns BELOW in
Reactions' need to be checked. This check box is located on the The Load Case Label input table that is available by selecting [ Input > Load Labels and Factors > Basic
Load Case Labels ] from the Main Menu. (For more detail, see Self Weight of the Walls Below)

Also see: Short Return Walls

Date Modified: 20/05/2014

Title: Element Types

[ SLABS > Structural Elements > Element Types ]

Description: How to set different material properties and parameters for different elements within the same model

In SLABS software the "Element Type" is used to define the angle of rotation the reinforcing bars for different slabs, and to assign different concrete grade and
covers for different slab zones.

Note that while other elements have a 'type' input option in the Property Table, it is not used anywhere within the current version.

Slab type properties can be accessed and edited through Material Properties Input Table [ Input > Material Properties ].

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 87 of 308

See also:

Slab Reinforcement: Rotating Reinforcing Bars

Material Properties ­ AS 3600

Date Modified: 20/05/2014

Title: Elastic Spring

[ SLABS > Structural Elements > Elastic Springs ]

Description: Special Supporting Element

In SLABS software the user can define a special supporting element, an elastic spring. The "Spring" tool is available by pressing the "Column" button, while holding
"Shift" on the keyboard.

The spring properties are defined by its elastic constant k. The springs can be used in combination the other supporting elements, such as columns and walls.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 88 of 308

Date Modified: 17/09/2011

LOADING
- Load Cases

- Load Combinations

- Pattern Loading

LOAD CASES
- General

- Applying Loads

- Checking Loading

- Deleting Loads

Title: Load Cases ­ General

[ SLABS > Loading > Load cases ]

Description: Overview of the Load Case input table, notes about pattern loads

The Load Case Label input table is displayed by selecting [ Input > Load Labels and Factors > Basic Load Case Labels ] from the Main Menu.

In the table shown below we can choose the Load Case numbers that will represent a certain type of load ­ Permanent (Dead Load) or Imposed (Live Load). The user
can assign different kinds of Load Case Nature to each basic load case. In the example table below, only a dead load and a live load have been defined. Several other
categories could be assigned, such as wind and earthquake loads. If a pattern Imposed Load is to be applied to a model, the user needs to label the Basic Load Cases
accordingly, for example Load Case numbers 2 and 3 can be ‘Live Load 1, Live Load 2’.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 89 of 308

Once the Load Case numbers and labels have been entered, the user can apply Pressure, Line, Point and Moment Loads in any Load Case.

The self weight of the slab and the beams is automatically included in the Load Case shown in the drop down option on the Load Case Labels input table. Note that
the magnitude of the self weight is not shown anywhere on the screen, but it is considered automatically in the load calculations.

If the self weight of the supporting column and wall elements are to be included in the reactions, the check box labelled 'Include Self Weight of Walls and Columns
BELOW in Reactions' needs to be checked. ( >>> more )

The self weight of the column and walls elements above the slab are NOT automatically included in the reaction calculations and users need to apply the appropriate
line or points loads to the model in order to represent the columns and walls above the slab.

Date Modified: 20/05/2014

APPLYING LOADS

­ Pressure

­ Line Loads

­ Point Loads

­ Moments Loads

­ Temperature

Title: Applying Loads ­ Pressure Loads

[ SLABS > Loading > Applying Loads > Pressure Load ]

Description: How to apply Pressure Loads to slab zones

Uniformly Distributed Pressure Loads can be applied to slab zones only, and each zone can take on one pressure load value for each Load Case. The model must be
meshed before any pressure loads can be applied as the slab zones are formed during the meshing process.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 90 of 308

The simplest method of applying a pressure load to a model is to select the pressure load icon from the tool box, enter a magnitude in the property table and then
click on a slab zone using the left mouse button. If the pressure load is uniform on all slab zones for a particular load case, then selecting the icon labelled 'Apply
Pressure on all slabs' on the DTB will apply a pressure load to all slab zones when the user presses the left mouse button anywhere within the model.

To delete a pressure load from a slab zone, the user can either enter a magnitude of ‘0’ (zero) followed by clicking on the slab zone by using the left mouse button.
Selecting [ Edit > Delete All Load <or> Delete Load Case ] from the main menu will remove all applied pressure loads on all slab zones (for the displayed Load Case).

Note: When a new slab zone is generated by the software (this will occur if the user modifies the geometry of the floor) the pressure load applied to the new mesh
zones is 0 (zero) by default for all Load Cases. It is highly recommended that the user carefully examines the load after any editing of the floor geometry.

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Applying Loads ­ Line Loads

[ SLABS > Loading > Applying Loads > Line Load ]

Description: How to apply Line Loads to a model

Line loads are used to model walls above the slab. A line load can be defined anyway inside slab panels or along an edge.

A line load can be created manually by selecting the Line Load icon from the Tool box, entering a magnitude into the Property Table followed by clicking on two points
anywhere on the slab zones using the left mouse button. The status of the snap setting (Grid, Corner or Edge) will determine how the Line Load is located within the
model.

Note that unlike Pressure Loads, when a slab zone is removed or modified (at the time of meshing), the Point Loads, Line Loads and the Moment Loads on that
particular zone will not be deleted.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 91 of 308

The orthogonal mode tool contained in the Dynamic Task Bar (DTB) can be used to assist in creating line load that are parallel (or perpendicular) to the X or Y axes.

When generating models from a CAD file, the user can import Line Loads by selecting the parallel lines that represent the walls above the slab and then pressing the
Line Load icon in the Tool Box. The software will present the user with an input window so the magnitude can be specified.

Once a line load is defined, its magnitude can be edited by selecting the Line Load within the Working Area and then modifying the value in the property table.

Care should be taken when importing floors into SLABS from the R/C Building software as the walls above in an R/C Building model will be modelled as Line Loads in
SLABS (in each respective Load Case).

Any Line Loads that lie outside the slab perimeter will snap to the nearest slab edge automatically, and can therefore greatly influence results. Care should be taken
when importing floors into SLABS from the R/C BUILDING software, and detailed checks should be performed for each load case. Line loads outside the floor
perimeter must be deleted either manually (in each load case), or automatically by selecting [ Edit > Delete Elements Outside Slab ] from the Main Menu.

Date Modified: 21/05/2014

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 92 of 308

Title: Applying Loads ­ Point Loads

[ SLABS > Loading > Applying Loads > Point Load ]

Description: How to apply Point Loads to a model

Point Loads are used to represent loading applied to the slab by columns that are located above the slab and can defined anywhere inside the floor (except voids) or
along an edge.

A Point Load can be manually created by selecting the Point Load icon from the Tool box, entering a magnitude into the Property Table followed by clicking on one
point anywhere on a slab zone using the left mouse button. The status of the snap setting (Grid, Corner or Edge) will determine how the Point Load is located within
the model. Once a Point Load is defined, its magnitude can be edited by selecting the Point Load within the Working Area and then modifying the value in the
property table. Unlike Pressure Loads, when a slab zone is removed or modified (at time of meshing), the Point Loads, Line Loads and the Moment Loads on that
particular zone will not be deleted.

If a model contains columns above the slab, point loads can be applied to the centroid of each column above by selecting the columns and then clicking on the Point
Load icon in the Tool Box. The software will then present the user with an input window so the magnitude can be entered (for the relative Load Case).

SLABS will perform Punching Shear calculations for all columns above the slab that have an accompanying Point Load in a single or multiple Load Case.

Care should be taken when importing floors into SLABS from the R/C Building software as the columns above in an R/C Building model will be modelled as Point Loads
in SLABS (in each respective Load Case).

Any point loads that lie outside the slab perimeter will snap to the nearest slab edge automatically, and can therefore greatly influence results. Care should be taken
when importing floors into SLABS from the R/C Building software, and detailed checks should be performed for each load case. Point loads outside the floor perimeter
must be deleted either manually (in each load case), or automatically by selecting [ Edit > Delete Elements Outside Slab ] from the Main Menu.

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Applying Loads ­ Moment Loads

[ SLABS > Loading > Load Cases > Applying Loads > Moment Load ]

Description: How to apply Moment Loads to a model

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 93 of 308

Moment Loads are used to represent moment actions applied on the slab anywhere inside the floor (except voids) or along the edges. A Moment Load in the global X
or Y direction can be applied by pressing the "Moment Load" button from the Tool Box, then entering a magnitude and direction of the moment into the Property
Table, followed by clicking on one point anywhere on a slab zone using the left mouse button. The status of the snap setting (Grid, Corner or Edge) will determine how
the Moment Load is located within the model. Once a Moment Load is defined, its magnitude can be edited by selecting the Moment Load within the Working Area
and then modifying the value in the property table. Unlike Pressure Loads, when a slab zone is removed or modified (at time of meshing), the Point Loads, Line Loads
and the Moment Loads on that particular zone will not be deleted.

Moment Load Property table

If a model contains columns above the slab, Moment loads can be applied in either the global X and/or Y directions to the centroid of each column above by selecting
the columns and then clicking on the Moment Load icon in the Tool Box. The software will then present the user with an input window so the magnitude can be
entered (for the relative Load Case).

SLABS will perform Punching Shear calculations for all columns above the slab that have an accompanying Point Load in a single or multiple Load Case. Moment Loads
that are applied to columns above the slab will also be included in the calculations.

Care should be taken when importing floors into SLABS from the R/C BUILDING software as the columns above in an R/C Building model may be modelled with
applied Moment Loads in SLABS (in each respective Load Case).

Any Moment Loads that lie outside the slab perimeter will snap to the nearest slab edge automatically, and can therefore greatly influence results. Care should be
taken when importing floors into SLABS from the R/C BUILDING software, and detailed checks should be performed for each load case. Moment loads outside the
floor perimeter must be deleted either manually (in each load case), or automatically by selecting [ Edit > Delete Elements Outside Slab ] from the Main Menu.

Moment Load Direction and Sign Convention

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 94 of 308

=================

Moment Load Sign Convention Example:

Moment Load - Floor Top View in SLABS software

Moment Load - 3D View

Date Modified: 29/05/2014

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 95 of 308

Title: Applying Loads ­ Temperature

[ SLABS > Loading > Applying Loads > Temperature ]

Description: How to apply temperature effects to a model

Whenever the expansion or contraction that would normally result due to the heating or cooling of a body is prevented, temperature (thermal) stresses are
developed. In concrete structures this can be a common phenomenon when there is considerable difference between the temperatures inside and outside of a
building. SLABS calculates the bending moments occurred on the slabs due to thermal stresses.

Parameters affecting the temperature stresses are the elastic modulus of the concrete (E), Poisson’s ratio (!), coefficient of thermal expansion for concrete (") and the
temperature difference. Coefficient of thermal expansion for concrete (") is assumed to be constant for the temperature range involved and in SLABS is taken as
12x10­6 1/°C. Temperatures on the top and bottom surfaces of the slabs can be entered in the temperature gradient form available on the Main Menu under [ Input
> Temperature Gradient ] menu for each load case, as shown in the sample screen shot below.

The internal forces produced by the temperature effects can be included in the design of the reinforcement or deflection results by including the particular Load Case
(with appropriate load factors) to the relevant Load Combinations.

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

CHECKING LOADING - SLABS

­ Load Summary Report

­ Colour Slab By Applied Pressure

Title: Load Summary Report

[ SLABS > Loading > Checkng Loads ]

Description: How to check the applied vertical loads using the Load Summary Report

On the main menu under [Reports > Load Summary] the software will produce a report that contains a summary of the loading, including Self Weight.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 96 of 308

The number shown as the 'Total Load' for each load case is the total unfactored load (including self weight) divided by the total area for each floor in the model
(essentially average kPa). This is a simple way of checking if there have been any mistakes made in the vertical loading. For a typical residential apartment building
values between 8 and 12 are expected when all the 'Total Load' values are added for all Basic Load Cases. Transfer levels and floors with swimming pools, planter
boxes or storage areas would produce higher averages.

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Colour Slab by Applied Pressure

[ SLABS > Loading > Checkng Loads ]

Description: How to check the pressure load on the slab by colouring the slab zones by the applied pressure

An efficient method of checking the pressure loading is to colour the slab panels by the applied pressure in each load case. SLABS will colour the slab panels when the
pressure icon is selected in the Tool Box and the ‘Colour by Pressure’ icon is pressed in the Dynamic Task Bar (DTB). A sample screen shot below shows the applied
pressure load in the Load Case 2 (Live Load);

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 97 of 308

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Deleting loads

[ SLABS > Loading > Deleting Loads ]

Description: How to delete loads, including all loads in a specific Load Case

To delete an applied pressure load from a specific slab zone (for a particular Load Case), the user can either enter a magnitude of ‘0’ (zero) followed by clicking on the
slab zone by using the left mouse button. Line and Point Loads can be deleted by displaying the type of load (by pressing the Point or Line line icon in the Tool box)
following by selecting the loads and either pressing the 'delete' key on the keyboard or the delete icon on the Main Menu will remove the load.

The applied loads can be deleted from a model by using the tools available under Main Menu > Edit. The screen shots below show the options available that allows
the user to delete a particular type of load or all the load applied to a Load Case or all Load Cases.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 98 of 308

Reaction loads that are imported from another SLABS model can be deleted by selecting [ Edit > Delete All Tagged Reaction Loads ] from the Main Menu.

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

LOAD COMBINATIONS - SLABS

- Strength & Serviceability

- Deflections

Title: Load Combinations ­ Strength & Serviceability ­ SLABS

[ SLABS > Loading > Loading > Load Combinations > Strength & Serviceability ]

Description: Overview on how to enter and set the Load Combinations for Strength & Service criteria

Load Combinations are entered in the Load Combination Label and Factors input table that is available under [ Input > Load Labels and Factors > Load Combination
Factors ] from the Main Menu.

Each Load Combination is made up by combining and applying factors to any of the ten Basic Load Cases.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 99 of 308

A maximum of 40 Load Combinations can be created by defining a Load Combination label and entering the appropriate load factors in the cells of the table, as
shown in the sample screen shot below. The maximum number of Load Cases can be selected on the "Settigns > System Settings" input panel: 10, 20, 30 or 40. The
default load Case/Combinations number is 10.

Below is a screen shot of an example Load Combinations table which can be used in SLABS software.

Load Factors Example Input Table

The first row in the table above is a Strength Load Combination that is made up by combining Load Case 1 and Load Case 2 in the following equation:

Load Comb. No. 1 = 1.2*LC1 + 1.50*LC2

Where:

LC1 ­ Basic Load Case No 1

LC2 ­ Basic Load Case No 2

NOTE: Please consult the relevant design codes and design standards for the list of Load Combinations and Load Factors

The second Load Combination in the table above represents the Load Combination used to predict long term deflections using the Kcs method.

Load Combinations 3 and 4 in the table above represent Service Loads based on the short and long term factors.

Material Properties Input Panel > Load Factors Table

The Load Combination for Ms: Service Load Combination is used in the calculation of Ief, which will influence the deflection results. The values of 100% dead load and
70% live load should be used.

The Load Combination for Ms,1: Service Load Combination for Ms,1 is used in the crack control calculations and the definition of Critical Tensile Zone. The factors of
100% Dead Load and 100% Live Load should be used for this combination.

The load combination numbers for the Service loads, Ms and Ms,1 (load combinations 3 and 4 above) must be defined before matching the service load combination
numbers in the Material Properties window.

The service load combination parameters should be pre­defined by the user in the Load Combination Factor window before selecting the Load Combination number
for the service loads in the Material Properties window.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 100 of 308

In order for the software to design the reinforcement required, the user must select one or more Load Combinations that will be combined into a global design
envelope that will be used to determine the amount of steel required in the slab.

The user can override the default Load Combination labels and factors by clicking on the [ Save ] button once the custom input has been made.

Any changes made to the labels or factors within this window are saved with each data file (and then recovered automatically when the file is re­opened).

The [Read] button is used to load the default load factors.

The Moment Envelope results may or may not include the twisting moment Mxy. This is selected by the user on the “Material Properties Input Panel”. The user may
choose to include Mxy in the steel design, which will include the twisting moment Mxy in the Moment Envelope results.

See Also: Results & Reports ­ Deflections ­ Kcs Method and : Load Combinations ­ Deflections

Date Modified: 08/05/2012

DEFLECTIONS - SLABS

­ Incremental

­ Long­Term

Title: Load Combinations ­ Deflections: Incremental

[ SLABS > Loading > Load Combinations > Deflections ]

Description: Overview on how to enter and use Load Combinations for Incremental Deflections

When using the Kcs Method to evaluate Incremental Deflections, the user needs to enter appropriate Load Combination factors into the Load Combination Label and
Factors input table in order to represent the ratio of compression to tensile reinforcement that will be specified in the slab. The factors are derived from Clause 8.5.4
Equation (b) in AS3600 ­ 2009: Concrete Structures.

The deflections that represent a ratio of 50% between the tensile to compression reinforcement (ie: half the amount of reinforcement in the compression face of the
slab compared to the tensile face) will produce the Load Combination factors;

1.4LC1 + 1.26LC2

The deflections that represent a ratio of 100% between the tensile to compression reinforcement (ie: the same amount of reinforcement in the compression face of
the slab compared to the tensile face) will produce the Load Combination factors;

0.8LC1 + 1.02LC2

Where:

LC1 is the Permanent Load Case (Self weight including SDL)

LC2 is the Imposed Load Case (Live Load)

When the deflections by either of these two Load Combinations are displayed in SLABS, the ratio between the span/deflection needs to be compared to the allowable
limits specified in Table 2.3.2 in AS3600 ­ 2009: Concrete Structures.

Evaluating Incremental deflections by the Age-adjusted Effective Modulus Method (AEMM) and the Eurocode 2 approach (EC2) requires the user to perform an
analysis so that the deflection results can be obtained for the instant deflections ­ due to the Self Weight of the slab only (no Super Imposed Dead Load applied) and
the Long Term deflections separetly. The incremental deflections will then be obtained by taking the difference of the Long Term deflections from the Instant
deflections, as shown in the equation below;

! Incremental = ! Long Term ­ ! Instant

A sample screen shot of the Load Case factors is shown below were Load Case 1 represents the Self Weight only, Load Case 2 contains the Super Imposed Dead Load
and Load Case 3 represents the Live Load;

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 101 of 308

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Load Combinations ­ Deflections: Long­Term

[ SLABS > Loading > Load Combinations > Deflections ]

Description: Overview on how to enter and use Load Combinations for Long­Term Deflections

SLABS is the first version of the software that includes methods to calculate long term deflections by methods other than the Kcs approach. The new methods
referred to as the 'Advanced Methods' include Age­adjusted Effective Modulus Method (AEMM) and Eurocode 2 (EC2).

The two new methods do not use the 'increased load factors' approach that Kcs is based on in order to capture the effects of long term effects such as creep and
shrinkage. The AEMM and EC2 methods use a Service Load Combination that represents the load on the floor, and the long term effects are calculated directly using
the required input parameters shown in the Long Term Deflections input window, available from [ Input > Long Term Deflections ] from the Main Menu.

Further references about the detailed approach of the advanced methods can be found in Chapter: Results & Reports: Deflections ­ Advanced Methods: AEMM &
EC2 .

The Load Combinations for the long term deflections need to be entered before a model is analysed and the user can choose to enter the Combinations that are
required for different Kcs reinforcement ratios and also Service Load Combinations for the 2 advanced methods.

The sample screen shot below shows that Load Combinations 2 and 4 would be used to check long term deflections based on 50% and 100% compression to tensile
reinforcement ratios by the Kcs Method. Load Combination 7 (representing a Service Load Combination) is used for the advanced methods.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 102 of 308

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Load Combinations: Pattern Loading

[ SLABS > Loading > Load Combinations > Pattern Loading ]

Description: How to setup Load Combinations for Pattern loads

In order to apply a pattern load to a model, the user needs to first determine how different parts of the floor will be loaded and how the load will be split and applied
to the model between different load cases.

It is important to note that the global design envelope used to determine the required reinforcing steel needs to be made up of each load combination derived for the
pattern loading. The example screen shot below shows 3 strength load combinations for a car park where the live load is split into Load Case 2 and 3.

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 103 of 308

MATERIAL PROPERTIES & INPUT PARAMETERS - SLABS

­ Model and Solver Settings

­ Material Properties ­ AS 3600

­ Material Properties ­ BS 8110

­ Material Properties ­ CSA A23.3

­ Element Types

Title: Material Properies & Input Parameters

[ SLABS > Structural Elements > Material Properties & Input Parameters > General ]

Description: Material Properties & Input Parameters

In SLABS the Material properties can be defined in accordance to several different standards and codes. The settings can be changed via [ Settings > Model and
Solvers ]. The following dialog box is then available for the user to select the code used in the design:

After that, the appropriate Material Properties have to be entered in the Material Properties Input Table available via [ Input > Material Properties ]. Parameters and
settings available for each of the codes are discussed in detail in the following chapters of this manual:

­ Material Properties ­ AS 3600

­ Material Properties ­ BS 8110

­ Material Properties ­ CSA A23.3

­ Element Types

For Area Method Settings see: Area Method, Wall Subdivision

Date Modified: 05/02/2015

Title: Material Properties & Input Parameters ­ Material Properties

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 104 of 308

[ SLABS > Material Properties & Input Parameters > AS 3600 ]

Description: Description of the parameters and settings contained in the Material Input Window ­ AS 3600, Edition 2001 and 2009

Besides the model geometry and loading, SLABS software needs a set of input parameters to define the material properties, in order to solve the model.

The user may adjust the material properties according to the preferred design approach, however the AS3600 design code specifies the minimum requirements and
the design engineer may choose to implement a more conservative approach by increasing or reducing the values of some design parameters.

We recommend that the each slab design starts with a set of more conservative input parameters and if the solution meets the design criteria then the engineer may
adopt this design as a more conservative solution. The engineer may gradually reduce some of the parameters to arrive to more economical solution, but still be
within the acceptable design criteria. If a model is solved for the first time and does not satisfy the minimum design criteria, then the engineer needs to gradually
modify some of the design parameters in order to arrive to an acceptable solution. If the solution does not meet the design criteria with all input parameters set to
the maximum or minimum values, then the slab geometry must be revised by increasing slab and beam thicknesses, and/or introducing additional supporting
elements.

A number of material input parameters must be entered in order to perform the analysis and design the reinforcement. Explanations of the parameters and factors
contained within the Material Properties window (shown below) are as follows:

Concrete Properties

Concrete Strength : Characteristic concrete strength as defined in AS 3600 ­ 2009. The user may choose from several values of characteristic concrete strength that are
found in the Australian Standards. Note that while 80 MPa and 100 MPa concrete is found in the code, it has been purposefully not included in the software.

Modulus of Elasticity: Automatically calculated using concrete strength and density from the formulas given in AS3600 ­ 2009, Clause 3.1.2 (a), or entered by the user.

Poisson's Ratio: the default value is given as 0.2 as per AS3600 ­ 2009 Clause 3.1.5, but can be manually changed by the user.

Concrete Density: the software takes the concrete density to be 2.5 t/m^3, which is slightly higher than the value specified by AS3600 ­ 2009 Clause 3.1.3 (which is 2.4
t/m^3). The reason for that adjustment is the presence of steel reinforcement. Again, the value of concrete density can be manually adjusted by the user.

Crack Control: Crack control depends on weather exposure, Clause 8.6.1 (for beams) and 9.4.1 (for slabs), AS 3600 ­ 2009. There are two options: ‘Fully Enclosed’ and
‘Exposed’. Note this is not related to shrinkage crack control.

Crack Reinforcement Shrinkage and Temperature: the default values for primary and secondary direction taken from AS3600 Section 9.4.3 assuming a Moderate
degree of crack control. This value can be manually entered by the user.

Slab M Redistribution: The user may choose to reduce the negative moments and increase the positive moments in the slab. Reduction of the negative moments
for for 5% to 10% is recommended. If this option is selected the software will reduce all negative moments over the supports by the selected value, and increase the
mid­span positive moments accordingly. Generally this will result in a safer design, as it will produce slightly larger mid­span moments and hence more bottom steel
will be used. See also: Moment Redistribution

For slab­on­ground design the Moment Redistribution should be set to 'Reverse', since the moment diagram is reversed.

---

Slab Reinforcement Properties

Steel Yield Stress: Steel grade for the slab, normally 500 MPa.

Steel Bar Diameter: Reinforcing bar diameter used in the slab. Important for the crack control criteria. Properties are in accordance with AS3600 ­ 2009, Clause 3.2.1.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 105 of 308

Concrete Cover + One Bar: This parameter is the “effective cover” used to calculate the effective depth of slab sections used in steel design. The gross slab depth (D)
less the “effective cover” gives the effective section depth (d) used in the steel design. The effective depth used in the reinforcement design for each slab zone is
calculated by subtracting this value from the slab thickness.

Because of this approach there is no need to define in the software which direction is primary and secondary. The design of all steel will be performed with an
effective cover defined as “clear concrete cover + one bar diameter”. This value has to be entered in the Material Input Panel. So, for 20mm cover and 12mm bars,
we have to enter 32mm.
Now, the steel design in the primary direction will be a bit conservative, because there is 1/2 Bar Diameter error in the effective section depth, and in the secondary
direction the design will be a bit non­conservative.
However, for the construction drawings we still have to mark "lay first", the bottom still in the primary direction. And, for the top steel we have to mark the primary
steel as "lay second". The primary and secondary directions are determined visually by the user.

Compression Reinforcement: This parameter is used in the calculation of Ief, but not in the design of the reinforcing steel. All sections are designed for strength as
singly reinforced, regardless of this parameter. Note that the amount of compression steel will affect the Kcs factor and consequently the load factors for long term
deflections.

Bottom Basic Reinforcement: User defined minimum amount of steel used in the bottom of the slab (applicable to all slab panels).

Top Basic Reinforcement: User defined minimum amount of steel used in the top of the slab (applicable to all slab panels).

Design Shrinkage Strain: as defined in clause 6.1.7, AS 3600 ­ 2001. As per AS3600 ­ 2009, this value is quite conservative, and the user may choose to enter a smaller
value. Refer to section 3.1.7 in AS3600 ­ 2009. Design shrinkage strain is used in the calculation of Mcr, clause 8.5.3.1. The slab Design Shrinkage Strain is also used for
wide beams.

Min. Strength: The amount of steel can be calculated by two alternative methods: Muo > 1.2 Mcr (clause 8.1.4.1), or according to clause 9.1.1. The user may switch off
the evaluation of the minimum reinforcement and the program will not comply with clause 8.1.4.1 or 9.1.1. In this case the user has to manually evaluate the
minimum steel requirements in the slab.

Include Mxy in Design: According to the Elastic Theory of Plates, at each point on a plate there are three moments: Mx, My, Mxy. These three moments make the
design moment field in a slab. In SLABS software the twisting moment Mxy is evaluated and it can be included in the design of the slab reinforcement. The user can
include the Mxy moment by checking the box labeled ‘Include Mxy in Design’.

Strictly speaking, Mxy should be included in the design of the steel because it is one of the internal actions in a plate. However, AS 3600 does not mention Mxy
explicitly, because almost the entire code is based on the “equivalent frame concept”, where the plate twisting moment Mxy is not present. The twisting moment
Mxy is routinely ignored in the design practice.

In our opinion, in most cases the twisting moment Mxy will not make any difference in the final steel design. In many cases the twisting moment Mxy is a secondary
effect and might be ignored. However, each design has to be examined and considered individually. The twisting moment Mxy should be considered for over­loaded
thin slabs, where the thickness is less than 120mm. Also, slabs with iregular loadings may have significant magnitude of Mxy. Ultimately, it is up to software user to
decide whether Mxy is included in the design of the reinforcement. See also Mxy In Reinforcement Design .

---

Beam Reinforcement Properties

Steel Yield Stress: Steel grade for the beam reinforcement, normally 500 MPa.

Bar Diameter: Reinforcing bar diameter used in beams. Important for the crack control criteria.

Effective Cover: Used in the beam design, typically 0.1*D.

Compression Reinforcement: This parameter is used in the calculation of Ief, but not in the design of the reinforcing steel. All sections are designed for strength as
singly reinforced, regardless of this parameter. Note that the amount of compression steel will affect the Kcs factor and consequently the load factors for long term
deflections.

Include Beam Torsion: The user may include or exclude beam torsion by checking this box On or Off. When beam torsion is included in the analysis, the user should
perform a spot check to confirm that a particular beam has sufficient capacity to resist the torsional moment. The check may be performed using Inducta’s BEAM
software.

Beam Stiffness Factor: The Beam stiffness factor is used only in calculating the bending moments. A factor greater than 1 will make the beams artificially stiffer and
consequently the beams will attract more reinforcement. The deflections are calculated using the actual beam Ief, ignoring the beam Stiffness Factor, however this
factor indirectly may influence the deflections. We recommend a factor of 4 in order to arrive to a similar solution as manual calculations where the beams are
treated as supports for the slab and all the loading from the slab is applied on the beams.

>>> Also see: Beam Stiffness and its Effect on Moment Diagrams

Design Shrinkage Strain: As defined in clause 6.1.7, AS 3600 ­ 2001. Used in calculating Mcr, clause 8.5.3.1. Note that when wide beams are modelled as slab panels,
during the deflection analysis they are treated as slabs, and the slabs Design Shrinkage Strain is used. A value of 0.000850 is very conservative.

---

Service Load

Load Combination for Ms: The Service load combination for Ms is used in calculating Ief, which will influence the deflection results. The values of 100% dead load and
70% live load should are typically adopted. This parameter has a significant influence on the final deflection results.

Load Combination for Ms,1: The Service load combination for Ms,1 is used in the crack control calculations, and definition of Critical Tensile Zone. The values of 100%
dead load and 100% live load should be used. The service load combination factors should be pre­defined by the user in the Load Combination Factor window before
selecting the load combination number for the service loads in the Material Properties window.

---

Other Parameters

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 106 of 308

Ieff Max: This parameter is used to limit the max value of slab section's Ieff as a fraction of Igross. The parameter is not defined in AS3600, and if the code is to be
followed strictly, the value may be set to 1.0. In the British Code, the value of 0.7 was traditionally used and its purpose was to consider cracks due to shrinkage and
uneven support settlements, as well as some other secondary effects. Before the introduction of design shrinkage strain in AS3600 ­ 2001, this factorwas used to
compensate for influence of shrinkage effects on the final deflection results. In AS3600, the shrinkage strain was included in the Mcr and this factor became
redundant, however it can still be used as a more conservative approach in evaluating deflections. Note that this factor is not the same as 0.6 factor defined in AS3600
­ 2009 Clae 8.5.3.1 (c) Ieff,max=0.6I. The 0.6 factor is automatically included in the software.

Effective Moment of Inertia: In almost all cases the user should select the first option, I ef = I cr + ( I – I cr ) ( M cr / M s )4 = I e,max (‘Branson’s formula’) in order to
evaluate the effective moment of inertia. An un­cracked option where Ief = Igross may be selected when we want to examine the theoretical deflection of the un­
cracked concrete. The deflections in all load combinations are calculated using Ief and this parameter has a major influence on the final deflection results. Additional
options include Ief calculation by simplified approach as per AS3600 ­ 2009 Clause 8.5.3.1 and Eurocode2 design.

In SLABS there have been 2 additional methods of evaluating the long­term deflections, using the EC2 approach and AEMM (Age­adjusted Effective Modulus Method).
Even if the user does not choose to use the EC2 approach, the method of calculating Ieff can be taken from EC2 and the long­term deflections evaluated by Kcs factors
(this essentially replaces Branson's formula in the overall approach).

Use Igross For Beams: When Igross for beams is selected, the program will assume Ief = Igross for all beams when the deflections are calculated. This setting is used
when beam elements in the model are to represent steel beams in reality.

One Way Stiffness Factor: This value is used when some of the slab panels are set to ‘work’ as one­way elements. If some special one­way flooring systems are used
then the slab panels need to be set to ‘work’ only in the primary direction, while the stiffness of the secondary direction will be reduced by the selected value. If no
slab panel is set to be one­way this parameter has no effect.

Slabs on Ground: See Slab­on­Ground .

---

Beam Shear: This set of parameters is used in the shear design of the beams.

Punching Shear Design: This input table allows the user to specify the strength and size of the reinforcement that is to be used in the Punching Shear Design.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 107 of 308

Usually, the entire floor has the same material properties. However, the user may assign different material properties to different slab panel types. The material
properties, associated to the slab panel type are entered in the Slab Concrete and Reinforcement Table.

Date Modified: 22/05/2014

Title: Material Properties & Input Parameters ­ Material Properties

[ SLABS > Material Properties ]

Description: Description of the parameters and settings contained in the Material Input Window ­ BS 8110

Explanations of the parameters and factors contained within the Material Properties window for BS 8110 ­ 1997 (shown below) are as follows:

Concrete Properties

Concrete Strength: Characteristic concrete strength as defined in BS 8110 ­ 1997

Modulus of Elasticity: Automatically calculated using concrete strength BS 8110, Clause 2.5.2 (Figure 2.1), or entered by the user.

Poisson's Ratio: Normally 0.2 (BS 8110, Clause 2.4.2.4)

Concrete Density: Normally 2.5 t/m3

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 108 of 308

Slab M Redistribution: The user can select to reduce the negative moments in the slab and increase the positive moments. A factor of 10% is recommended (BS 8110,
Clause 3.2.2.2), and if this option is selected the software will reduce all negative moments over the supports by the selected value, and increase the mid­span
positive moments accordingly. Generally this will result in a safer solution as it will produce slightly larger mid­span moments and hence more bottom steel at mid­
span. See also: Moment Redistribution

Slab Reinforcement Properties

Steel Yield Stress: Steel grade for the slab, normally 250 or 460 MPa.

Bar Diameter: Reinforcing bar diameter used in the slab.

Concrete Cover + One Bar: This parameter is used to calculate the effective depth of slab sections when subtracted from the slab thickness. The effective depth of the
slab sections used in reinforcement design is calculated by subtracting this value from the slab thickness. The total value entered includes one bar diameter so the
sequence in which the reinforcement is laid becomes irrelevant.

Compression Reinforcement: This parameter is used in the calculation of Ief of the slab sections, but it is not used in the strength design. Note that the amount of
compression steel will affect the Ief, and consequently the load factors for long term deflections. The software will attempt to designed all slab sections for strength
as singly reinforced, regardless of this parameter. But, it will adopt double reinforced sections if section factor K > 0.156 (BS 8110, Clause 3.4.4.4)

Beam Reinforcement Properties

Steel Yield Stress: Steel grade for the beam reinforcement, normally 250 or 460 MPa.

Bar Diameter: Reinforcing bar diameter used in beams.

Effective Cover: Used in the beam design, typically 0.1*D

Compression Reinforcement: This parameter is used in the calculation of Ief, but not in the design of the reinforcing steel. Note that the amount of compression steel
will affect the Ief and consequently the load factors for long term deflections. The software will attempt to designed all beam sections for strength as singly
reinforced, regardless of this parameter. But, it will adopt double reinforced sections if section factor K > 0.156 (BS 8110, Clause 3.4.4.4)

Include Beam Torsion: The user may include or exclude beam torsion by checking this box On or Off. When beam torsion is included in the analysis, the user should
perform a spot check to confirm that a particular beam has sufficient capacity to resist the torsional moment. Note SLABS software does not desig beams in
torsions. The torsion beam design may be performed using INDUCTA’s BEAM software.

Beam Stiffness Factor: The Beam stiffness factor is used only in calculating the bending moments. A factor greater than 1 will make the beams artificially stiffer and
consequently the beams will attract larger bending moments and more reinforcement. The deflections are calculated using the actual beam Ief, ignoring the beam
Stiffness Factor. However this factor indirectly may influence the deflections. We recommend a factor of 4 in order to arrive to a similar solution as manual
calculations, where the beams are treated as supports for the slab and all the loading from the slab is applied on the beams.

Service Load

Load Combination for Ma: The Service load combination for Ma is used in calculating Ief, which will influence the deflection results. The values of 100% dead load and
70% live load should are typically adopted. This parameter has a significant influence on the deflection results.

Other Parameters

Ief Max: This parameter is used to limit the max value of Ief as a percentage of Igross. A value of 0.7 is recommended, and it will produce more conservative
deflection results.

Effective Moment of Inertia: In almost all cases the user should select the ‘Branson’s formula’ option, in order to evaluate the effective moment of inertia. An un­
cracked option where Ief = Igross may be selected when we want to examine the theoretical deflection of the un­cracked concrete. The deflections in all load
combinations are calculated using Ief and this parameter has a major influence on the final deflection results.

Use Igross Beams: When Igross for beams is selected, the program will assume Ief = Igross for all beams when the deflections are calculated. This setting is used when
beam elements in the model represent steel beams.

One Way Stiffness Factor: This value is used when some of the slab panels are set to ‘work’ as one­way elements. If some special one­way flooring systems are used,
then the slab panels need to be set to ‘work’ only in the primary direction, while the stiffness of the secondary direction will be reduced by the selected value. If no
slab panel is set to be one­way this parameter has no effect.

Slabs on Ground: See Slab­on­Ground.

Beam Shear: This set of parameters is used in the shear design of the beams.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 109 of 308

Date Modified: 15/10/2010

Title: Material Properties & Input Parameters ­ Material Properties

[ SLABS > Material Properties ]

Description: Description of the parameters and settings contained in the Material Input Window ­ CSA A23.3 (Revision 2001)

Explanations of the parameters and factors contained within the Material Properties window for CSA A23.3 ­ 1994 (shown below) are as follows:

Concrete Properties

Concrete Strength: Characteristic concrete strength as defined in CSA A23.3 ­ 1994

Modulus of Elasticity: Automatically calculated using concrete strength CSA A23.3, Clause 8.6.4, assuming normal density concrete. Alternatively, the modulus of
elasticity can be entered by the uer. or entered by the user.

Poisson's Ratio: Normally 0.2

Concrete Density: Normally 2.5 t/m3

Slab M Redistribution: The user can select to reduce the negative moments in the slab and increase the positive moments. For instance, if moment redistribution is set
to 10%, all negative moments at all supports, will be reduced for 10%, and all positive moment will be increased accordingly. The user must check, whether the slab
sections at the supports possess sufficient ductility to take the additional rotation, in order to redistribute the moments. See also: Moment Redistribution

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 110 of 308

Slab Reinforcement Properties

Steel Yield Stress: Steel grade for the slab, normally 500 MPa

Bar Diameter: Reinforcing bar diameter used in the slab. Important for the crack control criteria.

Concrete Cover + One Bar: This parameter is used to calculate the effective depth of slab sections when subtracted from the slab thickness. The effective depth of the
slab zones used in reinforcement design is calculated by subtracting this value from the slab thickness. The total value entered includes one bar diameter so the
sequence in which the reinforcement is laid becomes irrelevant.

Compression Reinforcement: This parameter is used in the calculation of Ief, but not in the design of the reinforcing steel. All sections are designed for strength as
singly reinforced, regardless of this parameter. Note that the amount of compression steel will affect the Ief and consequently the load factors for long term
deflections.

Beam Reinforcement Properties

Steel Yield Stress: Steel grade for the beam reinforcement, normally 500 MPa.

Bar Diameter: Reinforcing bar diameter used in beams.

Effective Cover: Used in the beam design, typically 0.1*D.

Compression Reinforcement: This parameter is used in the calculation of Ief, but not in the design of the reinforcing steel. All sections are designed for strength as
singly reinforced, regardless of this parameter. Note that the amount of compression steel will affect the Ief and consequently the load factors for long term
deflections.

Include Beam Torsion: The user may include or exclude beam torsion by checking this box On or Off. When beam torsion is included in the analysis, the user should
perform a spot check to confirm that a particular beam has sufficient capacity to resist the torsional moment. The check may be performed using Inducta’s BEAM
software.

Beam Stiffness Factor: The Beam stiffness factor is used only in calculating the bending moments. A factor greater than 1 will make the beams artificially stiffer and
consequently the beams will attract more reinforcement. The deflections are calculated using the actual beam Ief, ignoring the beam Stiffness Factor, however this
factor indirectly may influence the deflections. We recommend a factor of 4 in order to arrive to a similar solution as manual calculations where the beams are
treated as supports for the slab and all the loading from the slab is applied on the beams.

Service Load

Load Combination for Ma: The Service load combination for Ma is used in calculating Ief, which will influence the deflection results. The values of 100% dead load and
70% live load should are typically adopted. This parameter has a significant influence on the final deflection results.

Other Parameters

Ief Max: This parameter is used to limit the max value of Ief as a percentage of Igross. A value of 0.7 is typical in most concrete software design programs and will
produce more conservative deflection results.

Effective Moment of Inertia: In almost all cases the user should select the first option, ‘Branson’s formula’ in order to evaluate the effective moment of inertia. An un­
cracked option where Ief = Igross may be selected when we want to examine the theoretical deflection of the un­cracked concrete. The deflections in all load
combinations are calculated using Ief and this parameter has a major influence on the final deflection results.

Use Igross Beams: When Igross for beams is selected, the program will assume Ief = Igross for all beams when the deflections are calculated. This setting is used when
beam elements in the model are to represent steel beams in reality.

One Way Stiffness Factor: This value is used when some of the slab panels are set to ‘work’ as one­way elements. If some special one­way flooring systems are used
then the slab panels need to be set to ‘work’ only in the primary direction, while the stiffness of the secondary direction will be reduced by the selected value. If no
slab panel is set to be one­way this parameter has no effect.

Slabs on Ground: See Slab­on­Ground.

Beam Shear: This set of parameters is used in the shear design of the beams.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 111 of 308

Date Modified: 15/10/2010

DESIGN CODES - SLABS

AS 3600­2009

BS 8110­1997

CSA A23.3­1994

Title: Design Codes

[ SLABS > Design Codes ]

Description: Design Codes supported by SLABS

SLABS software includes the following design codes:

! AS 3600 ­ 2001
! AS 3600 ­2009
! CSA A23.3 ­ 1994 (Revision 2001)
! BS 8110 ­ 1997

The options for Design Codes are available under [ Settings> Model and Solvers ] from the Main Menu, as shown in the following window:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 112 of 308

Note: ACI 318 is not included in the current version of SLABS.

Date Modified: 02/07/2010

Title: AS 3600­2009 ­ Concrete Structures

[ SLABS > Design Codes ]

Description: Changes made in the AS3600­2009 design code (modifications made to AS3600­2001)

The changes made in AS 3600­2009 Concrete Structures design code are summarised in this chapter. The modifications are referenced to the AS 3600­2001 design code and also
linked to existing chapters in the user manual (where applicable).

Changes made to Strength Design for Slabs (Bending):

! Different Capacity Reduction Factors are introduced for L and N steel classes in AS3600­2009, Table 2.2.2. Class L is allowed to be used for slabs (mesh), but we do not
recommend this class as it will produce brittle failure. We strongly recommend steel class L to be limited to construction of domestic housing only.

! Concrete stress­stain curve, the maximum stress is changed from 0.85*f’c to 0.90*f’c (clause 3.1.4). This does not affect the rectangular stress block (clause 8.1.3) used in
the design for bending.

! Slabs minimum steel for bending formula changes, clause 9.1.1 (More...)

! Beams only use steel Class N. This change is automatically incorporated in SLABS and the user does not need to set the parameter for the steel class.

! The definition for Slab and Beam shrinkage strain has been changed to 'Final Design Shrinkage Strain'. The values are also modified as given in Table 3.1.7.2 and the major
influence is on the calculation of Ieff (8.5.3.1, maximum shrinkage­induced tensile stress !cs).

! Modulus of elasticity changed for concrete strength greater than 40 MPa (clause 3.1.2). ( More...)

! Coefficient Kuo (brittle failure limit) changed from 0.4 to 0.36 (clause 8.1.5). This change is 'hard­wired' in SLABS and the user can not set the parameter manually.

! Rectangular stress blocks for bending have been changed (clause 8.1.3).

! Creep and shrinkage coefficients and calculations have been changed (clause 3.1.7 and clause 3.1.8) . These parameters are entered into the Long Term Deflections input
window by the user.

Shear (beams)

! Limits have been introduced for the parameters fcv and ß1, used in calculating Vuc (as outlined in clause 8.2.7.1)

! The minimum Shear Reinforcement requirements have been changed, as outlined in clause 8.2.8. This change is 'hard­wired' in the software.

! The requirement to reduce the spacing by 80% at the supports has been removed as previously stated in AS 3600­2001, 8.2.12.4 (c)

! Beam torsion design has been changed (clause 8.1.3). Note: SLABS Software does NOT design for beam torsion.

! Crack control requirements for bending have been changed (clause: 8.6 and 9.4). This change is 'hard­wired' in the software. NOTE: When minimum steel for crack control is
displayed by SLABS, the software does not check minimum steel requirements for crack control due to shrinkage and temperature, clause 9.4.3. Also, clause 9.4.4 and clause
9.4.5 are not included in SLABS.

Note: SLABS does not consider design requirements for fire in anyway.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 113 of 308

Date Modified: 15/10/2010

Title: BS 8110­1997 ­ Concrete Structures

[ SLABS > Design Codes ]

Description: Desgin module of SLABS according to BS 8110

Design module of SLABS software for BS 8110 takes into account the following chapters:

! Material Properties: BS 8110 : Part 1: 1997, Clause 2

! Flexural and Shear Design of Beams: BS 8110 : Part 1: 1997, Clause 3.4
! Flexural and Shear Design of Slabs: BS 8110 : Part 1: 1997, Clauses 3.5, 3.6 , 3.7 and 3.12
! Serviceability (Deflections): BS 8110 : Part 1: 1997, Clause 3.4.6 (beams) and 3.5.7 (slabs), BS 8110 ­ 2: 1985, Clauses 3 and 7

Note: Punching shear check and crack control check is not inlcuded in the current version of SLABS software for BS 8110. SLABS does not consider design requirements for fire in
anyway. Alternative methods ( AEMM and EC2) for deflection calculations is not available for BS 8110.

See also: Design Codes ­ General, Material Properties BS 8110

Date Modified: 15/10/2010

Title: CSA A23.3­1994 ­ Concrete Structures

[ SLABS > Design Codes ]

Description: Desgin module of SLABS according to CSA A23.3

Design module of SLABS software for CSA A23.3 ­ 1994 (Revision 2001) takes into account the following chapters:

! Material Properties: Clauses 8.5, 8.6 and 10.1

! Flexural Design for Slabs and Beams: Clause 10
! Shear Design for Slabs and Beams: Clause 11
! Serviceability (Deflections): Clause 9.8

Note: Punching shear check and crack control check is not inlcuded in the current version of SLABS software for CSA A23.3. SLABS does not consider design requirements for fire in
anyway. Alternative methods ( AEMM and EC2) for deflection calculations is not available for CSA A23.3.

See also: Design Codes ­ General, Material Properties CSA A23.3

Date Modified: 15/10/2010

SOLVING MODELS ­ SLABS

­ Theory ­ Finite Element Method

­ Generating the Finite Element Mesh

­ Errors and Warnings

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 114 of 308

Title: The Finite Element Method

[ SLABS > Solving Models > The Finite Element Method ]

Description: General notes about the analytical procedures performed when solving a model

The complete analysis is performed by several analytical procedures or computational models. A linear elastic Finite Element method is employed for calculating the
deflections and the bending moments. A very accurate triangular plate element, known as discrete Kirchhoff element, is used. The triangular shape of the elements
allows a reliable generation of the finite element mesh. Also, an additional element is available in order to take into account the shear deformations: Mindlin/Reissner
element is used to calculate the shear in slab, when 'Thick Plate' option is selected. (see also Slab Shear )

Note that Kirchhoff element neglects transverse shear deformation and the nodal shear values calculated when Kirchhoff element (Thin Plate option) is used are
derived from moment results and they are indicative only. In order to include the shear deformation in the element, Thick Plate option should be selected. In that
case, Mindlin/Reissner element is used.

The Finite Element Method will introduce some additional stiffness at the supports, which will result in higher negative moments at the walls and columns. The effect
is local and it will not influence the results at other locations. The ‘Smooth Moment’ switch (located may be used to reduce these moments. This option will
implement numerical smoothing of the slab moment results. This will reduce the sharp negative moments at walls and columns while the positive moments at mid­
spans will not be affected (as they are relatively flat). Another method is to use the Moment Redistribution option to reduce the negative moment. A factor of 10% is
recommended for most cases.

After the analysis, all the results should be reviewed critically, and any suspicious results should be examined carefully.

If the model is altered in any way (by editing slab panels, wall geometry, or modifying the load) the old results are not applicable, and a new analysis should be
performed.

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Generating the Finite Element Mesh

[ SLABS > Solving Models > Meshing ]

Description: General notes about the algorithm developed and implemented to generate the Finite Element Mesh

Usage Instructions
In order to run the model and to input slab properties the finite element mesh must be generated by selecting [Solve > Mesh] from the main taskbar or pressing [F5]
on the keyboard.
The mesh window opens where the user can select the mesh sub­division (mesh size), check overlapping elements and locally refined the mesh above columns and
walls.
Unlike other finite element software packages INDUCTA software automatically generates the mesh without the need for the user to manually specify sub­divisions
along the structural elements. If the principles of the meshing procedure in INDUCTA software are understood and applied the software will automatically generate
mesh without meshing errors .
See Meshing Principles for more information on the generation of the finite element mesh.

SLABS: Solve > Mesh

Mesh Type

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 115 of 308

In the current version of SLABS (v4), R/C Building and PT3D a new meshing algorithm has been developed: FE Mesh 2009. As of 2013 the old version of the mesh has
been phased out and FE Mesh 2009 is the only option that is available. Models that have been created using the Geometry Lines (Polylines) method (post 2009) will
only be able to be meshed with this option. Older models created with the 4 node slab panels method (pre 2009) will be automatically converted to the Geometry
Lines (Polylines) method and the FE Mesh 2009 will be used.

Mesh Sub­Division
This refers to the size of the finite element that will be generated by the software. The size in m refers to the length of one face of the triangle that the software
creates. If for example a 1m mesh is used structural elements can still be modelled less than 1m apart the software will just try to make the dimension of one side of
the triangle 1m.
The smaller the number, the finer the mesh, the larger the number of nodes and more accurate are the results. The model will also take longer to run. The larger the
number, the coarser the mesh, the lower the number of nodes and the less accurate the results will be. The model will however run faster.
The default mesh size of 1m is suitable for most cases but it is up to the user to choose a suitable size based on the size and complexity of their model and the desired
accuracy of the results.

Left to Right: 0.5m, 1m, 2m Mesh Sub­Division for the same slab

Check Overlapped Elements

This option checks if two finite elements were generated on top of each other which will cause an error in the results. Overlapped elements are a rare occurrence in
the current version of the software (post 2009) as the algorithm to automatically generate the mesh has been improved. This should be switched on as a last resort
if meshing errors are still occurring. Overlapped elements should not occur if the principles of meshing and the modelling tips to prevent meshing errors have been
followed.

Local Refinement for Column and Wall

This creates finer mesh locally at the location of the wall and columns. Referring to the screenshots below if this option is not selected the peak bending moment is
“smoothed” over the top of the columns as the results are calculated at each finite element node. One solution would be using a smaller mesh however this will
greatly increase the run time and that level of accuracy may not be needed at the mid­span of the slab. Switching on local refinement of the mesh generates finer
mesh were the higher accuracy of the results are needed and reduces the smoothing effect of the peak moment. Note, it will also increase the time taken to mash
and analyse the structure.
Referring to the example below 1m mesh is used. The top picture has no refinement of the mesh, the bottom does. In both examples the true peak value is lost as the
results at the node directly above the columns are average and equal to approximately zero. However, when local refinement of the mesh is used less of the peak is
lost.

Beam Moment Results: Ex ­ 1m Mesh Size

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 116 of 308

1m Mesh Size with Local Refinement of Mesh

Beam Moment Results: Ex ­ 1m Mesh Size with Local Refinement of Mesh

Local Refinement of the mesh adds another layer of complexity to the meshing so the user may see many more meshing errors occur. In order to eliminate them the
user must simplify the model to the point where the software can generate the finer mesh without any issues. In particular the following must be done:
­ Walls and columns above/below above must line up directly on top of each other.
­ The number of line elements (beam, geometry lines) located around the wall and column must be reduced or eliminated by having them on the same line as
the wall/column.

Locally Refined Mesh

Left: Column, Geometry Line and Beam Line all on Different Y Plane ­ Mesh Errors Too Complex
Right: Geometry Line and Beam Line Plane Matched on the Y Plane ­ Simple Layout No Mesh Errors

­ If the model is on the diagonal nodes may need to be manually added to the surrounding geometry lines to force the program to mesh to that location.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 117 of 308

Locally Refined Mesh

Left: Column on Angle with Band Beam Running Perpendicular
Middle: Meshing Error Occurs when Locally Refined Mesh is Used
Right: Node Manually Added (Blue Dot) in Geometry Line to Force Meshing to that Point
Note, some cases may arise that are too complicated for the software to generate the refined mesh to automatically without creating close­node errors. In this case
the refinement of the mesh should be switched off. If the user wants more results at a particular location they can manually force the software to create more results
my drawing geometry lines with additional nodes around that area.

Date Modified: 06/08/2014

Title: Errors and Warnings

[ SLABS > Solving Models > Errors and Warnings ]

Description: Definitions and solutions to the errors reported by the software when the Finite Element Mesh is generated, or when the model is solved ­ SLABS

Errors During Meshing:

­ ERROR: Cannot mesh.  No closed polylines.

This message is reported when there are no closed slab geometry lines contained within the model. SLABS / R/C Building / PT3D requires at least 1 closed geometry
line in order to generate the finite element mesh (typically the perimeter of the floor), however models can contain more than 1 closed slab geometry line. When a
geometry line is selected the software will display either 'closed' or 'open' in the Information Window.

­ ERROR: Close Nodes Errors: 6     distance < 5.000000000000000E­02

When the Finite Element mesh is generated an internal comparison is also made between the distance of adjacent nodes in the model and a tolerance set the by the
software. The tolerence depends on the mesh size selected by the user and the different combinations are shown below;

! Mesh Size: > 1m = 0.05m Tolerence for Close node check

! Mesh Size: 0.75m = 0.03m Tolerence for Close node check
! Mesh Size: 0.5m = 0.02m Tolerence for Close node check
! Mesh Size: 0.25m = 0.01m Tolerence for Close node check

If there are any close node errors detected in any part of a SLABS model, the locations are shown with red dots on screen when the mesh is displayed. This is done
automatically by the software at the end of the meshing algorithm.

Below, an example is shown for how to fix close node errors. The geometry line does nto run along the wall centreline so. To fix this the geometry line is
selected, then a node is added by right­clicking and slecting "add node." With "snap to corner" on the new node is drag­and­dropped to the end of the wall.

Example for how to fix Close Node Errors

­ Fatal mesh errors! Check imported geometry!                                   
   ERROR: (x,y) = ( 22.20    ,  16.48    )

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 118 of 308

This warning is reported when there is a general failure during any part of the meshing. The typical source of the problem is the imported geomtery and when this
type of error is reported, the model should be sent to INDUCTA for a detailed examination.

­ ERROR: Area [%]52.535 (x,y) = (­21.74, ­19.58) polyline   2

Once the mesh is generated and the software creates the Slab Zones, a comparison is made between the area of each Slab Geometry Line that makes up a perimeter
of a Slab Zone, and the total area of the finite element triangles within the corresponding Slab Zone. This check will identify if there are any finite element triangles
missing, or if the mesh was not generated correctly in any part of the model. The user should investigate any zones and polylines identified by the software if
this warning is presented in the meshing report.

Errors During Analysis:

­ WARNING:  Columns above are ignored.     WARNING:  Walls above are ignored in the analysis.

The two warnings above are presented at the beginning of an analysis when a SLABS model contains columns and/or walls above the slab. The message is to confirm
with the user that the stiffness and self weight of all column and wall elements above the slab are ignored during the analysis. If the self weight of these elements is to
be included then the appropriate point and line loads should be applied to the location of the column and wall elements that are above the slab.

­ ERROR:  All wall and column must have identical height.

If all the columns contained within a model do not have the same value for the height parameter (located in the Property Table for the column elements) then this
message is displayed and the model cannot be analysed until the height is the same for all columns elements.

­ ERROR:  No vertical supports: walls and columns.

When a floor is to be modelled as a suspended slab there must be vertical elements supporting the slab ­ columns and/or walls. This message is presented when there
are no supporting elements and the slab zones are not set to 'Soil Contact ­ Yes' in the slab zone property table.

­ ERROR:  Slab­on­ground, but no slab panel in contact with soil.

When modelling a RAFT slab or a slab­on­ground, there must be at least one slab zone in the model that has the 'Soil Contact' parameter in the property table set to
'Yes'.

­ WARNING: Over­Reinforced Slab Sections.

See Chapter: Results & Reports ­ Slab Reinforcement ­ Over­reinforced Sections

­ ERROR: Beam No: 1 is over­reinforced. Increase the depth of the beam and analyse again.

This error is presented when a particular Beam element in a model does not have adequate depth in­order for the required amount of reinforcement to be designed
based on the design moment M*. (this may be due to the ' Beam stiffness factor' being set too high resulting in design moments that cannot be taken by the beam
dimensions).

­ ERROR: Steel Design general error.

There is most likely meshing errors in the model; they need to be fixed before the analysis.

­    ERROR: SLABS/PT3D nodes > 1m from RCB mesh
           RCB Moment Field Not Included in Design

Moment Field Results are present and the perimeter of the slab has been moved > 1m out from the imported floor from R/C Building making the results inaccurate. The analysis
will stop and not continue. To continue the slab edge should be moved back to within 1m of the R/C Building model or the floor re­exported in R/C Building.

­ Warning node: XX outside RCB finite element

Moment Field Results are present and the perimeter of the slab has been moved to no more than 1m out from the imported floor from R/C Building making the results inaccurate.
The analysis will continue.

­ Warning: # of SLABS/PT3D beams > or < # of imported RCB beams 

Moment Field Results are present and the number of beams do not match SLABS/PT3D and R/C Building meaning that beams were added or deleted. The analysis will continue
but the moment field results will be inaccurate.

­ Width and/or Depth does not match SLABS/PT3D  Beam: X RCB Beam: X

Moment Field Results are present and the width and/or depth of the beam has been changed in SLABS/PT3D so it is different to the corresponding beam in RCB. The
analysis will continue with the moment field results being applied to the beam but the moment field results will be inaccurate as the beams are different sizes
between the two programs.

­ No Matching RCB Beam coords found for SLABS/PT3D  Beam No: X

Moment Field Results are present and a matching RCB beam cannot be found for the SLABS/PT3D beam. The beam length has either been modified or a new beam added. This
beam will not have moment field results applied to it and the analysis will continue but the moment field results will be inaccurate.

­ Warning: NO SLABS/PT3D beams ­ X imported RCB beams

Moment Field Results are present and beams were present in the R/C Building file at export but ALL beams were deleted in SLABS/PT3D. The analysis will continue
but the moment field results will be inaccurate as there are no beams in SLABS/PT3D.

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 119 of 308

RESULTS & REPORTS ­ SLABS
- Extracting Results - General

- Coloured Lines / Flooded Colours

- Deflections

- Integration

- Slab Moments and Shear

- Slab Reinforcement

- Beam Results

- Crack Control (Slab & Beams)

- Reactions

- Punching Shear

- Frequency & Mode Shape

- Forced Vibrations

Title: Results & Reports: Extracting Results – General

[ SLABS > Results & Reports ]

Description: General notes about the type of results available and how to extract detailed on screen results

Once the analysis has been successfully completed, the available results (for different Load Cases and Load Combinations) are as follows:

! Deflections: instantaneous and long term (slab and beams)

! Internal Forces (slab, beam, columns and walls)
! Bending Moments (slab, beams, wide beams and columns)
! Shear (slab and beams)
! Torsion (beams)
! Punching shear check and design (columns above and below, and short walls)
! Reactions on columns and walls by static analysis and area method
! Reinforcement (slab and beams, and wide beams)
! Mode shapes and natural periods of vibrations
! Soil pressure (for slab­on­grade)
! Piles reactions (for slab­on­grade with piles)
! Slab reinforcement details (reinforcing bars mark­up)

The very first step the user should take is to check if there are any obvious modelling or input errors by critically examining the deflections and reactions. Checking
these types of results will highlight any obvious errors such as missing supporting elements, or major errors in the loading applied.

If there are no obvious modelling or input errors, the user can then take a detailed look at each of the above results in order to evaluate if the solution meets the
design criteria. Typically the first step is to examine the long term and incremental deflections as the deflection criteria will generally determine if the then the
solution is acceptable. Once the deflections are within acceptable limits, the other results can be reviewed and compared to other design criteria set for the project.

Graphical on­screen results are displayed by selecting the appropriate option from the Main Menu under the [ Results ] tab. The user can extract on­screen results at
any node using the left mouse button, and obtain the maximum value within a rectangular area by drawing a box using the left mouse button, as shown in the screen
shot below.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 120 of 308

The software will then present the maximum value within the selected box as shown in the following screen shot:

Date Modified: 17/06/2014

Title: Results: Coloured Lines / Flooded Colours

[ SLABS > Results & Reports ]

Description: Overview of the options available for on screen results that are presented as contours

In SLABS we have improved the display of the results that are presented on screen as contour lines. The user now has the option to display the results either as
coloured lines or as flooded colours using the option presented in the Dynamic Task Bar (DTB).

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 121 of 308

Note: the position of the legend is fixed to the top left corner for the Working Area. When displaying the results as flooded lines, the range is automatically set by the
software and cannot be modified by the user. In contrast, when displaying the results as lines, the range can be refined and then reset as needed (see the image
above).

Date Modified: 17/06/2014

DEFLECTIONS - SLABS
- General

- Kcs Method

- Ieff by Branson's Formula

- Ieff by Eurocode 2 (EC2)

- Advanced Methods: AEMM & EC2

- CSA A23.3 Method

- FAQ

Title: Results & Reports: Deflections ­ General

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 122 of 308

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Deflections ]

Description: General notes about how to extract deflection results, including limits based on span/deflection ratio

SLABS software can be used to evaluate short­term (instant), incremental and total long­term deflections by several alternative methods using cracked section
properties of the beams and the slab. The effective moment of inertia (Ieff) of the cracked sections of the slab is evaluated at each nodal point in two orthogonal
directions independently, following the orientation of the reinforcing bars entered by the user.

The instant (short­term deflections) are evaluated using the cracked section properties. This approach will provide a very good prediction of the instant deflections.
As the long­tem deflections are effected by creep and shrinkage they are therefore much more complicated to predict. SLABS evaluates the long­term by three
alternative methods:

kcs ( increased load factors, AS3600 )

Age­adjusted Effective Modulus Method (AEMM)

Eurocode 2 approach (EC2)

The general procedure can be summarized in four steps:

1. Calculate the bending moments

2. Design the steel, Ast

3. Calculate Ief

4. Calculate Deflections, using Ief

In the first step, the software will calculate the bending moments using the gross moment of inertia, ( Igross = b*D3/12 ). In the second step, the software will design
the steel in the slab and in the beams. The effective moment of inertia (Ief) in both orthogonal directions is then evaluated at all nodal points in the slab and in the
beams. Ief can be calculated by three alternative methods: the Branson's formula (AS 3600 clause 8.5.3.1, c), the simplified approach using p = (Ast + Apt)/bd, or by
the Eurocode 2 formula (this procedure is fully automatic and a model only needs to be analysed once).

When the kcs method is used, the deflection results are available for all Basic Load Cases and all Load Combinations. The values of the load factors determines what
type of deflection that are considered.

When using the kcs method it is important to note that the software does not distinguish between the long term, short term or incremental deflections
automatically. It is up to the user to define several load combinations, which will represent long­term, short­term or incremental deflections based on the ratio
between the compressive and tensile reinforcement. For instance, if we use 50% compression reinforcement, the load factors for long term deflections are: 2.4*G +
1.26*Q.

The user may choose to assign Load Combination No 6 for the long­term deflections. If the dead load is applied in Basic Load Case No 1 and Live Load is in Basic Load
Case No 2, then the load factors for Load Combination No 6 are: 2.4*L.Case1 + 1.26*L.Case2. The user will then review the deflections in Load Combination No 6, and
compare them with the maximum allowable deflections prescribed in the design code (AS 3600, clause 2.4.2). This applies only for kcs method.

When deflection by advanced methods are included in an analysis, the software will automatically use the Service Load Combination (Ms), which was selected in the
'Material Properties' input panel. The service Load Combination (Ms) should be made up of appropriate load factors, such as 1.0*G+0.7*Q. Deflections by advanced
methods are available only when either AEMM or EC2 or both are selected on the 'Long Term Deflections' input panel. The deflections by advanced methods are
evaluated only for one service Load Combination.

It is important to remember that the beams and the slab make an integral system and they 'work together' forming an integral slab­beam floor system. Therefore
there are no separate results for beam deflections and the deflection for the slab as well as for beams are available under the 'Deflection' results.

SLABS software does not automatically check if any deflection results are within the allowable limits. It is up to the user to display the appropriate deflection results
and ensure they comply with the design criteria.

When the deflections results are displayed, the user can extract the span/deflection ratio by selecting the Distance tool from the Dynamic Task Bar (DTB) and clicking

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 123 of 308

on two points on the screen defining the span.

Note: Alternative methods (AEMM and EC2) for deflection calculations are only available for AS 3600.

Also see: Short Return Walls

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Results & Reports: Deflections ­ Kcs Method

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Deflections ]

Description: Detailed description of the Kcs Method

The Australian Concrete Design Code AS 3600, allows the use of a simplified method for deflection calculations based on the kcs factor. This method is widely used
and yields reliable results for almost any practical design job.
SLABS software can evaluate the total long­term and incremental deflections using the kcs approach as defined in AS 3600. In brief, this procedure considers the long
term effects such as concrete creep and shrinkage by factoring the applied load, which will result to increased deflections. For instance when long term deflections
are evaluated, the factor for the dead load is between 1.8 to 3.0, depending on the ratio between the compression to tension reinforcement.

When the ratio of 50% compression to tensile reinforcing steel is used, the load factor for the dead load is 2.4. This method is widely accepted and has been proven
over many decades to provide reliable results in practice. The kcs method has been employed successfully in SLABS software for more than 10 years and has been
used in thousands of designs.

The results for short term and long term deflections are given under different Load Combinations as defined by the user. The role of the compression reinforcement is
included in the Kcs factor, which will be used to evaluate the appropriate load factors, which in turn will be used to generate the deflections.

Note: Please review the Input Data chapter for a detailed explanation of all input variables used in the evaluation of Ief.

Long term deflections are calculated using the following equation;

!tot = !s + kcs * !s.sus

kcs = [2-1.2(Asc / Ast)] > 0.8

where:
!tot - total long term deflections
!s - short term deflections from load: G + "s*Q
!s.sus - long term deflections from load: G + "l*Q
G - Dead Load
Q - Live Load
"s - short term service load factor, in this example equal to 0.7
"l - long term service load factor, in this example equal to 0.4
Asc / Ast = 0.5 ratio between compressive and tensile reinforcement, equal to 0.5

The example screen shot below shows the Load Combination factors for Long Term and Incremental deflections for two alternate reinforcement ratios;

Load Combinations 4 and 5 represent the Long Term and Incremental load factors for a ratio of 50% between the tensile and compression reinforcement.

Load Combinations 6 and 7 represent the Long Term and Incremental load factors for a ratio of 100% between the tensile and compression reinforcement.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 124 of 308

The equations below show how Load Combination 4 is derived from the AS3600 design code for a ratio of 50% compression to tensile reinforcement;

kcs = [2-1.2*0.5] = 1.4

Load for !tot:

(G + "s *Q) + kcs (G + "l *Q)
G + "s *Q + kcs*G + kcs*"l *Q
(1 + kcs)G + ("s + kcs*"l)Q
G(1 + 1.4) + Q(0.7+ 1.4*0.4)
2.4G + 1.26Q

The same equations above can be used to re­calculate the load factors for different reinforcement ratios by simply evaluating a new kcs value, for example the same
reinforcement ratio (100%) will produce the following factors;
kcs = [2-1.2*1.0] = 0.8

Load for !tot:

(G + "s *Q) + kcs (G + "l *Q)
G + "s *Q + kcs*G + kcs*"l *Q
(1 + kcs)G + ("s + kcs*"l)Q
G(1 + 0.8) + Q(0.7+ 0.8*0.4)
1.8G + 1.02Q

The above factors should not be used directly for a Raft slab or slab­on­grade. When considering a slab­on­grade an estimate of the load factors for long term
deflections has to be made considering the influence of the soil.

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Results & Reports: Deflections ­ Ieff by Branson's Formula

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Deflections ]

Description: Detailed overview of calculating Ieff by Branson's Formula

SLABS can evaluate the effective moment of inertia (Ieff) by two widely accepted methods;

Branson’s formula

Eurocode 2 approach (EC2)

SLABS uses Branson’s formula in the form:

I ef = I cr + ( I – I cr ) ( M cr / M s )4 = I e,max

The last term in Branson's formula as presented in AS 3600, clause 8.5.3.1 (c) is to the power 3, while the software uses power 4. The power 3 is used when Ief is

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 125 of 308

evaluated only at the mid­span, while in SLABS Ief is evaluated in a number of points along the span, and therefore power 4 has to be used.

In the Ief calculations, the values of the service moment Ms and tension reinforcement (Ast) are taken from the first step in the overall analysis (See Results &
Reports: Deflections ­ General). In step 4, only the deflections are recalculated using Ief for the slab and the beams.

SLABS software will automatically take 60% of Ief for lightly reinforced sections as outlined in AS 3600, 8.5.3.1:

I e,max = I when Ast / bd = 0.005

I e,max = 0.6 I when Ast / bd < 0.005

SLABS allows the user to enter an additional reduction factor 'Ief Max' in the Material Properties window. Traditionally this factor is set to 0.7, which means that for
all sections only 70% of the effective moment of inertia is used. This factor is not defined in AS 3600, but is an additional design parameter the user may employ to
undervalue the section properties, and to ensure more conservative deflection results are obtained.

Note: The simplified approach for evaluation of Ief, using p = (Ast + Apt)/bd is too simplistic and although it is available in the software, we do not recommend this
approach to be used. When the user selects the option 'Ief = Igross', the deflections will be evaluated using untracked (gross) sections, assuming the concrete will not
develop any cracks. This option can be used only as an theoretical exercise.

Branson’s formula was derived to correlate very well with heavily reinforced and fully cracked sections. However, for lightly reinforced sections that have just cracked
or about to crack, the Branson’s formula may provide un­reliable results. In most typical designs today, the concrete sections work in this region with very small or
no cracks being developed. For this reason we have introduced a better alternative for evaluating Ief ­ the Eurocode 2 (EC2) approach.

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Results & Reports: Deflections ­ Ieff by Eurocode 2 (EC2)

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Deflections ]

Description: Detailed overview of calculating Ieff by EC2 in SLABS

SLABS software can evaluate the effective moment of inertia (Ieff) by two widely accepted methods:

Branson’s formula

Eurocode 2 approach (EC2)

Branson’s formula was derived to correlate very well with heavily reinforced and fully cracked sections. However, for lightly reinforced sections that have just cracked
or about to crack, the Branson’s formula may provide un­reliable results. In most typical designs today, the concrete sections work in this region with very small or
no cracks being developed. For this reason we have introduced a better alternative for evaluating Ief ­ the Eurocode 2 (EC2) approach.

Eurocode 2 (EC2), Clause 7: k = # k cr + ( 1 – # ) k uncr

k – mean curvature

k cr – curvature of the cracked section

k uncr – curvature of the un­cracked section

# – distribution coefficient considering the degree of cracking

Although the EC2 approach is not adopted in AS 3600, our opinion in that it will provide a more reliable evaluation of the effective moment of inertia. We
recommend that the user calculates the deflections using Branson’s formula, and if the deflections are approaching the allowable limit, the EC2 approach should be
used to confirm the results (using the same Kcs factors as for Branson's Formula).

The drop down box in the Material Input window allows the user the switch between the options available for evaluating the Effective Moment of Inertia as shown in
the screen shot below;

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 126 of 308

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Results & Reports: Deflections ­ Advanced Methods: AEMM & EC2

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Deflections ]

Description: Detailed overview of calculating Long Term and Incremental deflections by advanced methods: Age­adjusted Effective Modulus Method (AEMM) and by
the Eurocode 2 (EC2)

SLABS offers two advanced methods for calculating long­term deflections:

1. Age­adjusted Effective Modulus Method (AEMM)

Reference: Calculation of Long­Term Deflection, Professor R.I. Gilbert, CIA Seminar – Control of Long­Term Deflection – Brisbane, 23rd April 2008

2. Eurocode 2 approach (EC2)

The approach and technical documentation regarding the EC2 method can be found in the following design guide:

Webster, R., Brooker, O., How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 ­ 8. Deflection Calculations, published by The Concrete Centre.

The input window for the Long­Term Deflection parameters is available from the Main Menu under [ Input > Long Term Deflections ]. As shown in the sample screen
shot below, the check boxes next to each method need to selected by the user in order for the deflections by the AEMM and/or the EC2 methods to be included. The
service load that is to be used in the calculations is highlighted below, and is set by the user in the 'Material Properties' input panel (in this example Load Combination
3).

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 127 of 308

If the user chooses to analyze a model incorporating all 3 methods, the model will only need to be solved once with necessary calculations automatically performed
by the software. The sample screen shot below shows the available deflection results the user can display (assuming both AEMM and EC2 options were selected).

Obtaining Incremental deflections using the AEMM and EC2 method requires the user to calculate the long term deflections as described above and also the
deflections that result from the Self Weight of the slab only. The incremental deflections will then be obtained by taking the difference of the Long Term deflections
from the Instant deflections, as shown in the equation below; (See also Chapter: Load Combinations ­ Deflections: Incremental)

! Incremental = ! Long Term ­ ! Instant

The following screen shot shows a suspended slab with the long term deflection calculated as 21.7mm;

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 128 of 308

For the same model the deflection resulting from the self weight of the flab only is calculated as 6.6mm;

Now that the require deflection 2 values are known, the final paramater that is required is the span length at the location of the values obtained in the previous 2
screen shots. Using the distance tool available in the DTB, the distance between the 2 columns is displayed below;

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 129 of 308

The Incremental deflection is therefore; 21.7 ­ 6.6 = 15.1 mm

The span/deflection ratio can then be calculated as; 7247 / 15.1 = 480

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Results & Reports: Deflections ­ CSA A23.3 ­ SLABS

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Deflections ]

Description: Deflections by CSA A23.3

In slab design, the deflections may be controlled by the minimum slab thickness, as prescribed in CSA A23.3, clause 9.8.2.1 and table 9­1. If the minimum thickness
approach is adopted, there is no need to evaluate any deflections. In this case SLABS software will be use only for strength design, i.e. to determine the steel in the
slabs and in the beams.

The alternative approach is to assume some slabs thickness, and then using SLABS software, to calculate the short and long­term deflection, and to compare the
deflection results with the permissible deflections, (CSA A23.3, table 9­2). If the calculated deflections are larger than the permissible deflections, then the slab
thickness has to be increased, and another analysis should be performed. After, several runs the most adequate slab thickness would be found, which will satisfy the
serviceability design criteria (calculated deflections < permissible deflections).

The long­term deflections are evaluated according CSA A23.3, clause 9.8.2.5.

The deflections are evaluated by a static analysis of the structural system of the slab. Three sets of data govern the deflections:

1. E, Modulus of Elasticity (CSA A23.3, clause 8.6.2.3)

2. Ief, effective moment of inertia. (CSA A23.3, clause 9.8.2.3). The value of Ief is determined by Mc (cracking moment), and Ma (service moment). Mc is
determined by the amount of steel, which is calculated by the software during the strength design stage. We recommend that Ma is caused by load
combination 1.0D+0.7L (100% Deal Load + 70% Live Load). Although, in most structures the long term Live Load is in order of 20% to 30%, it is likely that
at some stage the Live Load will go up to 70% or more.

3. Loading. Short­term deflections can be evaluated by Load Combinations such as: 1.0D+0.3L, or 1.0D+0.7L. This will provide a good estimate of
immediate deflections. The long­term deflections, which include the effects of shrinkage and creep, are considered by increased load factors, such as
3.0D+1.5L, i.e. the long­term effects are simulated by increase in load factors. The value of the increase in load factros is determined in accordance with
CSA A23.3, clause 9.8.2.5. The value of the increase in load factors depend on the compression steel "' and the period of time considered.

Here, the load factors for total long­term deflections are derived, which fully comply with CSA A23.3, clause 9.8.2.5.

!tot = !s + # * !s.sus

where:

!tot - total long-term deflections due to shrinkage and creep

!s - short-term (initial) deflections caused by short-term service load: D + $s*L

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 130 of 308

$s - short term service load factor, normally equal to 0.7

# * !s.sus ­ additional long term deflections due to shrinkage and creep, ACI 318­99, clause 9.5.2.5

# = S / ( 1 + 50"' ) CSA A23.3, clause 9.8.2.5

"' ­ compression reinforcement

S ­ time factor, CSA A23.3, clause 9.8.2.5

!s.sus ­ immediate (short­term) deflections cause by sustained (long­term) load: G + $l*Q

$l ­ long term service load factor, normally equal to 0.4

D ­ Dead Load

L ­ Live Load

The short term service load factor%$s = 0.7, indicates that up to 70% of the live load will be applied for a short period of time. This load will not contribute to the long­
term deflections due to shrinkage and creep. For heavily loaded structures it can be taken as $s = 1.0.

The long term service load factor%$l = 0.4, indicates that only 40% of the live load will be applied for a longer period of time. This portion of the live load plus 100% of
the dead load will cause additional deflections due to creep and shrinkage. For residential building it can be taken as $l = 0.2, for storage%$l = 0.6.

The Load Factors for the long­term Load Combination, which will be used to evaluation the total long­term deflections (!tot) can be calculated as:

(D + $s*L) + # (D + $l*L)

D + $s*L + #*D + # *$l*L

(1 + # )D + ($s + #*$l)L

These load factors will be different for different designs. Before each job, the load factors for the long­term Load Combination must be evaluated manually, as
described above. A numerical example is provided in the Tutorial chapter.

Note, that the deflections are give for the slab­beam assemblage, and the deflection contour lines apply to the beams as well.

­­­

Load combination factors example for !tot (total long­term deflections):

(D + $s*L) + # (D + $l*L)

D + $s*L + #*D + # *$l*L

(1 + # )D + ($s + #*$l)L

(1 + 2)D + (0.7+ 2*0.4)L

3.0D + 1.5L

These factors are only for total long­term deflections for a period of 5 year or more, and no compression reinforcement ("' = 0). If there is some compression
reinforcement, the load factors will be different.

The Load Factors should be entered in the [Load Combination Factor] input panel. It can be opened from the [Input] option on the main menu.

In the above table, the Dead Load is given in the Basic Load Cases No 1 (LC1) and Live Load is given in the Basic Load Case No 2 (LC2).

The above load factors should not be used directly for a Raft slab or slab­on­grade for evaluation of long term deflections. When considering a slab­on­grade an
estimate of the load factors for long term deflections has to be made considering the influence of the soil.

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Frequently Asked Questions - FAQ

- How Reliable are the Deflection Results

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 131 of 308

Title: Results & Reports ­ Deflections ­ FAQ: How Reliable are the Deflection Results

Description: General comments and suggestions when evaluating deflections results

The theoretical evaluation of the long term deflections (regardless of the method) may be very unreliable in practice as there are many factors that can influence the
final results. In some cases these factors may be impossible to control and quantify (such as weather conditions, construction tolerance, material consistency and
development in new construction products).

Controlled laboratory experiments may have correlated closely to more advanced theories, but the fact remains that the deflection prediction of concrete structures
is very unreliable, which diminishes the practical value of the more accurate theories. This is especially applicable for a simplified beam approach, which requires
subjective judgment and may provide misleading results. The 2D plate theory (used in SLABS) is a much more superior analytical tool and provides a much more
accurate prediction of the instantaneous deflections. Considering the unreliability of long term concrete behaviour, it is suggested that users consider the deflection
results for all methods available in SLABS to determine if the design is within acceptable deflection limits.

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Results & Reports ­ Deflections ­ FAQ: Why Increased Deflections with Increased Thickness

Description: Why the deflections have been increased eventhough I increased the thickness of the slab?

AS3600 Clause 8.5.3.1 reduces the the effective stiffness of the beams and slabs by 60% when they are lightly reinforced.

If the reinforcement ratio with the original slab thickness is larger than 0.5% and the reinforcement ratio with the increased slab thickness is less than 0.5%, the
effective stiffness used in the deflection calculations would be different and larger deflections may occur with increased slab thickness. Please see the following two
cases.

Case 1:
Slab thickness, D=125mm
Effective cover: 36mm
Effective depth, d=89mm
0.5% steel: 445 mm2/m clause 8.5.3.1 (c),
Actual steel: 452 mm2/m
452 > 445
Therefore, the 0.6 reduction factor is not used.

Deflection: 13.5mm

Case 2:
Slab thickness, D=130mm
Effective cover: 36mm
Effective depth, d=94mm
0.5% steel: 470 mm2/m clause 8.5.3.1 (c),
actual steel: 435 mm2/m
435 < 470
This is lightly reinforced slab. Therefore, the 0.6 reduction factor, which will reduce Ieff and increase the deflections, is used.

Deflection: 16.1mm

INTEGRATION - SLABS
- Clicking on Two Points

- User Defined Integration Distance

- Moment Line

- Clear Current Integration Results

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 132 of 308

Title: Integration: Clicking on Two Points

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Integration ]

Description: Detailed notes on extracting results by integrating between two points, including detailed examples

Some of the major improvements that were included in SLABS4 and SLABS are the new tools available to extract results from a model.

The integration tools in SLABS3.x allowed the user to only extract results by clicking between two points. This approach was limited as the user would typically use the
‘snap to grid’ snapping mode in order to specify the minimum two points that would become the co­ordinates for the integration distance or width. As most models
contained elements that had more than 1 decimal place in the co­ordinates of the geometry, there would often be a small off­set between the exact position of an
element and the position of the integration points.

The other major issue with the integration tools in SLABS3.x was specifying two points that contained the same points in one direction in order to produce a straight
line in either the X­X or Y­Y co­ordinates. In SLABS4 and SLABS we have introduced the ‘Orthogonal Mode’ that will automatically assign the position of the first mouse
click as the co­ordinates of the second point in X­X or Y­Y. (the second point would be set as X or Y depending on the direction, see example below).

The Integration tools are automatically displayed when the results selected by the user can be integrated, such as Moment, Moment Envelope and Reinforcement
results. The example below outlines how to use the ‘integrate between two points’ tool, while also incorporating the ‘Orthogonal Mode’ option in the DTB. The
general model geometry is shown in the screen shot below;

For this example the Reinforcement results, Y­Y top will be used as the results to be integrated. The first step is to show the Reinforcement results in Y­Y by selecting
[ Results > Reinforcement Y­Y ] from the Main Menu. The ‘Top’ option from the DTB is then selected, resulting in the following reinforcement contours;

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 133 of 308

Once the results are on displayed on the screen the ‘Integrate between two points’ button in the DTB is pressed and then the left mouse button is used to define the
two points shown in the screen shot below.

Note that the Orthogonal Mode and the Snapping mode are set as shown in the following screen shot;

The total required top reinforcement in the Y­Y direction is shown in the following screen shot (Note: the total shown below is a total area of steel over a distance of

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 134 of 308

2.4m, therefore the rate is 984mm2/m);

See: Large Slab Moments at Wall Ends

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Integration: User defined integration distance

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Integration ]

Description: Detailed notes on extracting results by a user defined distance, including detailed examples

Extracting results using the integration tools in previous versions of slabs was cumbersome due to the limited scope and options associated to the integration feature.
In SLABS4 and SLABS the integration tools have been greatly improved to include an option to allow the user to integrate results by selecting an element (such as
supporting column) that will become the centre of the integration width followed by specifying a distance that will be the total integration distance.

This feature is very useful for extracting results when models contain drop panels or band beams that are supported by columns.

The example below is a model that will be used to illustrate the general procedure of extracting reinforcement results using the integration tool that allows the user
to specify the integration width.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 135 of 308

The Reinforcement Y­Y Top results are displayed by selecting [ Results > Reinforcement Y­Y ] from the Main Menu followed by selecting the ‘Top’ option from the
DTB, as shown in the screen shot below;

Once the results are displayed on the screen the next step is to select the ‘Integrate by clicking one point and specifying a distance’ icon as shown in the sample
screen shot below;

Before selecting the column, the user needs to ensure that the snapping mode is set ‘Snap to Corner’. The next step is to click on the column using the left mouse

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 136 of 308

button, and shown in the following screen shot;

Once the column is selected, the software will prompt the user to enter the total integration width (with the column becoming the centre of the width) into the text
input box.

It is important to note that the software will automatically recognise the direction of the results and then integrate perpendicular to that direction. The final results
for this example are shown in the screen shot below;

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 137 of 308

See: Large Slab Moments at Wall Ends

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Integration: Moment Line

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Integration ]

Description: Extracting moment results through a specific location, including detailed examples

The Moment Line tool is part of the new Integration options introduced in SLABS4 and SLABS. Like the other integration features, the Moment Line icon is only
displayed in the DTB when the results displayed by the user can be integrated.

Results extracted using the Moment Line are shown in the same direction as the moment results selected by the user, were as the other integration results are
perpendicular to the results displayed. The following sample model is used to illustrate this concept.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 138 of 308

The model is analysed and the Moments My are displayed for Load Combination 1. The next step is to click on the Moment Line icon in the DTB followed by selecting
a column using the left mouse button as shown in the following screen shot (Note: the central area of the model is chosen for the example);

The results in the screen shot above show a maximum positive moment of 26.8 kNm/m and a maximum negative moment of ­57.5kNm/m. It is important to
understand that these values are the peak results and for this reason the Moment Line tool should only be used to understand how the slab is behaving rather than
using the results for the design of the reinforcement in the slab.

The screen shot below is a close up of the column showing the maximum negative moment along the Moment Line and also the integrated moment perpendicular to
the Moment My results.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 139 of 308

See: Large Slab Moments at Wall Ends

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Integration: Clear current Integration Results

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Integration ]

Description: How to clear the integration results that are currently displayed on screen

The Clear Integration tool will simply remove any on screen integration results that have been generated by the user. This feature is intended to improve the
efficiency of reviewing the moment and reinforcement results as the user does not need to re select the results if they choose to only clear the current on screen
integration output.

This tool is displayed along with the other integration icons in the DTB when the type of results selected by the user can be integrated.

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

SLAB MOMENTS - SLABS

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 140 of 308

- Slab Moments - General

- Slab Shear

- Moment Redistribution (Relaxation)

- Large Slab Moments at Wall Ends

- Moments due to Temperature

- Slab Moments in SLABS and R/C BUILDING

Title: Slab Moments ­ General

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Moments and Shear ]

Description: Detailed notes about extracting moment results including examples

The complete set of slab bending moments is made up by the following results;

! Moments in X­X direction (for each load case and load combination)
! Moments in Y­Y direction (for each load case and load combination)
! Twisting Moment Mxy (for each load case and load combination)
! Moment Envelope in X­X direction (with or without Mxy)
! Moment Envelope in Y­Y direction (with or without Mxy)

( Note: X­X and Y­Y indicatre the direction of the moment )

The Moment Envelope results may or may not include the twisting moment Mxy. This is selected by the user on the “Material Properties Input Panel”. The user may
choose to include Mxy in the steel design, which will include the twisting moment Mxy in the Moment Envelope results.

Like the deflection results, all the moment results are displayed on screen based on the Load Case or Load Combination that was chosen by the user prior to selecting
the results from the [ Results ] tab on the Main Menu.

Specific results can be extracted at each node using the left mouse button while the moment results are displayed on the screen, as shown below;

The results at the nodes above (‘­53.4’ and ‘25.9’ etc) have units of kNm per unit length (kNm/m’) or per 1.0m width. Note that the slab Mx moment is in the direction
of the global X­X axis (horizontal on the screen), i.e. the slab Mx moment is about Y­Y axis.

In order to extract the total negative moment in the slab (over the column) shown in the screen shot above, the user needs to integrate over a distance perpendicular
to the direction of the moment (in this example the integration points will be vertical on the screen). The tools used to perform the integration are automatically

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 141 of 308

displayed in the Dynamic Tool Bar (DTB) when required, ie: when the type of results displayed can be integrated.

In order to extract the total negative moment over the supporting column, the steps involved are;

! Ensure the correct moment results and Load Case or Load Combination are selected
! Click on the ‘Integrate by clicking on one point and specifying a distance’ icon in the DTB
! Set the snapping mode to ‘Snap to Corner’
! Click on the centre of the column and enter a distance or integration width (note: SLABS will automatically integrate perpendicular to the results displayed)
! The software will then display the total sign of the moment (+/­) and the total integration width

The Moment Envelope results are based on the Load Combinations defined by the user in the Load Combination Factors table, as shown in the screen shot below;

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 142 of 308

The Moment Envelope (in X­X or Y­Y) results are available from [ Results > Moment Envelope ] from the main menu. The envelope results are split into top and
bottom moments, and the outer most contour line indicates the point of contraflexture. The switch between the top and bottom moment results is located above the
DTB, as shown in the screen shot below;

It is important to note that the Load Case or Load Combination settings that are displayed on the Task Bar are not relevant when Moment Envelope results are
displayed.

The integration tools and integration procedures for Moment Envelope results are the same as the Moment X­X and Moment Y­Y results.

Date Modified: 29/11/2012

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 143 of 308

Title: Slab Shear

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Moments and Shear > Slab Shear ]

Description: Detailed notes about slab shear results

It is possible to display shear results in the slab for different load cases and combinations. Note this is not Punching Shear around columns, but it is so­called "beam
shear", the actual shear in any section of the slab. Usually, the “beam shear" is not critical in a slab, and it does not need to be checked. However, in some special
cases it may be critical, and it has to be considered. If there is a potential of shear failure in a slab, it is an indication of a not­adequate design, which will required
modification of the layout. Usually, the problem should be fixed by introducing some beam elements in the critical zones.

Shear in slab can be calculated in two ways in SLABS software.

1. Indicative Method: Deriving from Moment Results

The “beam shear” in the slab is evaluated as the first derivative of the bending moment diagram. Therefore, it is necessary to display the bending moment
results either in X­X or Y­Y direction. Also, this indicates that “beam shear” in the slab should be considered in each direction separately, X­X and Y­Y.

In order to display slab shear results by the indicative method, first of all slab moment results has to be shown. Once the slab moment contours are shown, we
can select [ Results > Slab Shear > Indicative (derived from moemnts) ], and the software will display the slab shear magnitudes on the screen for the selected
load case or combination (see picture below). The slab shear results are given in the same direction as the moment results. If slab shear is of a concern then
both orthogonal directions should be checked separately.

Slab Shear Results (Indicative) (Beam Shear)

Slab shear obtained by this method is a derived value, which is evaluated numerically as a first derivative of the moment diagram. Therefore, the slab shear
results are not very precise, and they have to be examined critically. Also, the slab shear may not be evaluated very precisely when there are closely spaced
concentrated loads and supports, and when the finite element mesh is course. The zones with potential slab shear failures has to be identified by visual
inspection of the slab and load configuration.

2. Thick Plate Theory using Mindlin/Reissner Element

In order to take into account the shear deformation of the slab a new element is introduced into SLABS software. Mindlin/Reissner Element is used when 'Thick
Plate' option is selected from [Model and Solver Settings]: The shear results can be displayed as contour lines after the analysis
when [ Results > Slab Shear > Thick Plate Theory > Sx or Sy ].

In SLABS sofware, Mindlin/Reissner Element is used only to calculate the shear forces in the slab. Also, it is recommended to use this option for the cases where
the shear deformation is known to be significant. In general, the contribution of shear becomes significant when the slab thickness is greater than
approximately 1/5 to 1/10 of the slab bending span.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 144 of 308

Slab Shear Results (by Thick Plate Theory)

In both methods, when slab shear values are shown, the software will automatically check the potential of shear failure. This is only an indication of the paternal
failure. On the result screen these zones will be indicated in red color. If this is the case, the user must introduce Wide Beams, in order to examine and design these
zones more precisely. In the calculation of shear capacity of the slabs, the total design reinforcement is used. This includes the reinforcement defined through Ast
Zones as well.

Date Modified: 22/11/2013

Title: Slab Moments: Moment Redistribution (Relaxation)

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Moments and Shear > Moment Redistribution ]

Description: General notes about moment redistribution (relaxation) and how this factor affects the results in SLABS

The linear elastic analysis employed in SLABS software over­estimates the negative moments at the supporting column and wall elements. To overcome this problem,
SLABS provides an efficient means to "relax" the moment diagram, i.e. to "relax" the negative moment diagram, and to redistribute the actions to the areas with
positive moments. The level of Relaxation can be selected on the input panel under [Input > Material Properties] on the Main Menu.

Moment Redistribution Factor for Flat Slabs

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 145 of 308

The user may choose from several levels of Relaxation: 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25% and 30%. A different relaxation factor will result in different moment diagrams and
different reinforcement. A factor of 5% to 10% is recommended for most flat slabs, with or without drop panels. However, for slabs with dominant band beams and
slabs with one­way action, the factor should be 5% or even 0%. (see the example below)

The Relaxation does not apply to the Bending Moments in Line Beam elements, and does not affect the Deflection and the Reaction results. However, the relaxation
is included in the Band Beams modeled as slab panels.

The moment diagram relaxation is performed automatically during the analysis. All negative bending moments at all supporting points, such as walls and columns are
reduced by 5% to 30%, as specified by the user. The moment diagrams at all other zones, such as slabs mid­spans, are adjusted to accommodate the reduction of the
negative moments. Since the method is based on an approximate numerical algorithm, some small inaccuracies may occur. Generally speaking, smooth contour lines
will indicate a successful implementation of the moment relaxation algorithm.

It is highly recommended that a careful examination of the bending moment results is carried out after the analysis is completed, comparing the 'relaxed' bending
moments results with the ‘non relaxed’ results.

­­­­­­­

For slab­on­ground the Moment Redistribution should be set to 'Reverse', since the moment diagram is reversed.

­­­­­­­

The basic concept of Moment Redistribution (Relaxation) can be explained on a simple example. In the example below we will shows the difference in the bending
moment results in X­X for a 2 span slab. The model is shown below:

The screen shot below represents the moment results with 0% Moment Relaxation;

The screen shot below represents the moment results with 10% Moment Relaxation:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 146 of 308

The screen shot below represents the moment results with 30% Moment Relaxation:

In the above example we can see that the negative moment is reduced for 10% and 30%, and the positive moment increased as well.

Moment relaxation algorithm works very well for the flat slabs and slabs with drop panels. For flat slabs we can use larger values for the Moment Relaxation Factor.

However, when the slab geometry is more complex, and especially when a system of dominant band beams in different directions are used (see picture below), the
moment relaxation may produce unusual moment diagrams. The problem is that the moment relaxation works at the same time in both orthogonal directions, and if
there is a larger negative moment perpendicular to a band beam, the beam diagram may be altered in unpredicable manner. In the case of slab with dominant
beams, it is highly recommended to compare and critically examine the “relaxed” and “non­relaxed” moment diagrams, and if the moment diagram do not follow the
expected patter, the moment relaxation may not be used. In this situation the factor should be reduced to 5% or even 0%. (see the example below)

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 147 of 308

Slab with Dominant Beams

------

Let us consider an example of a slab with dominant beams in Y­Y direction (see picture below). Note that the slab works primarily in the X­X direction, and we expect
almost zero mid­san slab moments in the Y­Y direction.

The non­relaxed moment diagram in X­X direction show a mid­span slab moment of 20 kNm (see picture below). This is expected, since the slab works primarily in X­X
direction, and some mid­span positive moment is expected.

The 10% relaxed moment shows increased X­X mid­span slab moment to 40 kNm, which is almost double. In this model the negative moment over the columns is
significant, about 200 kNm, and therefore the 10% relaxation of the negative monet is about 20kN, which in this case will increase the positive mid­span slab moment
for 20 kNm. This can be considered acceptable, since the mid­span moment in the slab is increased in the primary direction. (see picture below)

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 148 of 308

Now, let us look at the slab moment diagram in the Y­Y direction (see picture below). Note that the non­relaxed mid­span slab moment in the Y­Y direction as almost
zero. This is expected, because this is the secondary slab direction, and we are not expecting any moment in this direction. Note that because of the slab and beam
configuration the slab is working primarily on X­X direction.

But, if we look at the relaxed mid­span slab moment in Y­Y direction, we can observe that the value is 25 kNm. (see pasture below) This is significant moment for the
secondary direction, where we expect almost zero moment. This is happening because even in Y­Y direction we still have significant negative moment at the columns,
which will “drag” the positive mid­span slab moment. These results although unusual, they are still acceptable since they will only require some extra steel in the
secondary slab direction, where the steel is not required, but it is on the safe side. Also, this steel in the secondary slab direction may be needed anyway to
prevent shrinkage cracks (AS 3600, clause 9.4.3.4). However, the user may choose to ignore the increased moments in the secondary direction, if we are certain that
the slab works primarily in one direction.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 149 of 308

Date Modified: 09/12/2011

Title: Large Slab Moments at Wall Ends

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Moments and Shear > Large Slab Moments at Wall Ends ]

Description: How to treat larger moments in the slab at wall ends

SLABS software is based on finite elements, and it will identify the zones with moment concentration, which will require larger amount of steel, such as
the wall ends.
Sometimes there are very larger negative moments in the slab at the wall ends. In the picture below an example of a larger moment in X-X direction
at a short wall end is shown.

Large Moment at Wall End

This slab moment concentration is normal for Finite Element analysis. However, the larger moments are present only in some isolated points, and
generally they can be ignored. In the picture below we can see that the larger moment is present only at one point at the wall end.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 150 of 308

Moments in X-X Direction at Nodal Points

Now, if you show the top reinforcement in X-X, we can see that the steel is very larger only at one point at the wall ends. This is a real effect, but it can
be ignored. In reality, there will be some stress concentration at the wall ends, and a small crack may open, and the moment will be redistributed. We
do not need to design the steel for this moments, but we may want put a few extra top bars at the wall ends. Even if we use bars size 12 @ 230 around
the wall it will not be a problem, and the overall structural safety will not be compromised.

Reinforcement at Wall End

A better approach will be to integrate over a line of 1 to 2m, 100mm away from the wall end (see picture below). In this case we will get steel rate of 910
mm2 / 1m', which is equivalent to 12 @ 120. So if we use 12 @ 230, as shown in the picture above, and if we put 3 or 4 extra top bars, we will arrive to
the same steel rate of about 910 mm2 / 1m'.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 151 of 308

Reinforcement Integration Results at Wall End

Usually, we can integrate over a length equal to x8 to x12 of the slab thickness.
The comparisons of the integrated results with the manual calculations may not be relevant since the manual calculations are based on an imaginary
beam strip, which can be very misleading, and it will "mask" the high moments zones.

Date Modified: 29/10/2012

Title: Slab Moments: Moment due to Temperature

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Moments and Shear ]

Description: General notes about the moments developed in a model due to a differential temperature in SLABS

A new inclusion in SLABS is the option to model the affects of temperature on a floor. The input required is the temperature of the top surface and the soffit of the
slab ­ see Chapter: Loading ­ Load Cases ­ Applying Loads; Temperature

Once all the parameters are entered and the model is analysed, the moments in the slab are extracted using the same approach for all other vertical loads. The user
needs to ensure that the Load Case where the temperature actions are applied is selected on the Main Menu prior to displaying the results.

The temperature actions can be combined with other Load Cases to form Load Combinations and then considered in the Envelope that is used for the design of the
reinforcement in the slab.

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Slab Moments: Moments in SLABS and R/C BUILDING

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Moments and Shear ]

Description: Differences in Moments in SLABS and R/C BUILDING

The slab moment results in R/C BUILDING and SLABS can be different because, the model settings can be different and also the consideration of the structure in two
software is different, because the purpose of usage of two software is different. R/C BUILDING is for the vertical and horizantal load analysis of the structure, whereas

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 152 of 308

SLABS is for the vertical analysis and design of the slabs.

! In R/C BUILDING the gross moment of inertia (Igross) is used, whereas in SLABS effective moment of inertia (Ief) is used. In order to compare the results
the effecitve moment of inertia can be set to 'Igross' in SLABS software
! The default modulus of elasticity in two software are different, so one needs to make sure that the modulus of elasticities in two software are the same
before comparing the results.
! In SLABS default setting for slab moment redistribution is 'ON', whereas in R/C BUILDING there is no slab moment redistribution. In SLABS software, the
moment redistribution can be set to 'None', in order to compare the results. In R/C BUILDING, stiffness reductions factors are applied by default, those
can be chaged from [Models and Solver Settings]
! R/C BUILDING considers the whole building, whereas in SLABS only one level is considered. InSLABS, only the walls and columns below which support the
slab are considered. User can export the reactions and moments from the columns and walls above from R/C BUILDING to SLABS software, but this is not
complete. Because, even though the reactions are included in SLABS design in this way, not the stiffness of those elements.
! R/C BUILDING is for vertical and horizontal analysis of the whole building, whereas SLABS is for vertical loads only. In some buildings even under vertical
load, the horizontal moment can be very considerable. In order to simulate the one level modelling of SLABS in a one level building in R/C BUILDING and
eliminate the lateral movement, the ground level setting in R/C BUILDING can be set to 'Roof'.
! In SLABS, axial stiffness of columns and walls are made infinitely large,which is not the case in R/C BUILDING. Consequently, in R/C BUILDING different
axial shortening of columns and walls can effect the bending moment results in the slab.
! In R/C BUILDING, the stiffness reduction factors of structural elements are set to a value less than 1 in order to take into account of the cracking in
concrete. These can be set to 1 for comparison reasons.

As an example a one storey building is modeled in SLABS and R/C BUILDING and the slab moments are compared.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 153 of 308

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 154 of 308

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 155 of 308

SLAB REINFORCEMENT - SLABS

­ Concept

­ General Approach

­ Refined Approach

­ Viewing the Results

­ Recommended Design and Detailing Procedure

­ User Defined Reinforcement

­ General Approach

­ Refined Approach

­ Extra Steel

­ Ast Zones

­ Check User Defined Reinforcement

­ Rectangular Section Steel Design

­ Minimum Reinforcement

­ Crack Control

­ General Approach

­ Refined Approach

­ Over­reinforced Sections

­ Reinforcement on an Angle

­ Centrally Reinforced Slab

­ Mxy in Reinforcement Design

­ Reinforcement Quantity Report

Title: Slab Reinforcement: Concept

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement > Concept]

Description: Outlines the concept of reinforcement design in SLABS and describes the calculation procedures and assumptions.

When the slab is analysed [Solve > Analyse and Design] the software calculates the longitudinal reinforcement required to satisfy strength and
serviceability limit states (crack control for flexure, shrinkage and temperature) for each direction at each finite element node. If a finite element node is located in­
between two slab depths the smaller slab depth is used.

Note, slab shear is not checked in this step. It can be checked in [Results > Punching Shear] .

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 156 of 308

Slab Finite Element Mesh and Nodes

Design Approach
Two design approaches can be adopted for reinforcement design:
1. General Approach : only a single bar size, cover, exposure and degree of crack control are defined for the entire slab. This is intended to be used for preliminary design
and inital checks to determine the general reinforcement requirements.
2. Refined Approach : Once the general reinforcement requirements are determined the reinforcement layout can be refined. Different bar size, bar laying sequence, cover,
exposure and degree of crack control can be defined by slab type. This is intended to be used for the detailed design of the slab in preparation for drafting. Combining this
with the Ast zones the user can completely design and detail the reinforcement and the software can display any areas that are missing reinforcement and show how
conservative the design is.

For the step­by­step recommended reinforcement design and detailing approach please refer to the following video .

Calculation Procedure Within SLABS

Envelope
The load combinations that will be used for the envelope design as specified in [Input > Load Labels and Factors > Load Combination Factors].

Load Combinations to be used in Envelope Design

Average Effective Depth

SLABS currently uses the average effective depth (dav) for both directions for all calculations. If the General Approach is used the “Cover + One Bar” value in the
material properties is used for the calculation of dav. If the Refined Approach is used the “Cover for Design” value is used from the Slab Concrete and Reinforcement
Table is used. For more information on this table see User Defined Reinforcement .
As the average effective depth is used the reinforcement in the primary direction will be slightly larger than required and the reinforcement in the secondary direction
will be slightly smaller. In both cases the error in the calculation of d will be half a bar diameter. The effect of this error is insignificant considering that the adopted
reinforcement will always exceed the required theoretical amount.

General dav = D - "Cover + One Bar"

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 157 of 308

Refined dav = D - "Cover for Design"

Calculations

1. The tensile steel that is required to resist the envelope design moment in the X and Y is determined (AS 3600­2009 Clause 8.1). For more info see Rectangular Section Steel
Design . If twisting moment (Mxy) is switched on in material properties it is also design for.

2. The minimum steel requirements are checked and the tensile steel increased if needed. (AS 3600­2009, Clause. 8.1.6.1 for beams and one­way slabs, and Clause 9.1.1 for
two­way slabs). By default, minimum steel is calculated, but in [Input > Material Properties] there is a switch to remove this criteria. Switching off minimum steel is available
for informative purposes only. For design this should always be on so the section does not exhibit brittle behaviour.

3. Crack control for flexure is checked and the tensile steel is increased if needed. (AS 3600­2009, Clause. 8.6 for beams and 9.4 for slabs). The software will take the bar size
defined by the user, and if the crack due to flexure criteria is not satisfied, the software will reduce the bars spacing, which in turn will increase the steel rate. By default, this
requirement is always on, and there is no switch in the software to turn this off. However, by entering bar size of 1mm, the user may by­pass this criteria.

4. Crack control for shrinkage and temperature effects will be checked and, if needed, the tensile and compression steel in the slab will be increased to satisfy this criteria (AS
3600­2009, Clause 9.4.3). For more info on where the reinforcement is placed see Crack control . By default the software assumes a fully enclosed, restrained slab with a
moderate degree of crack control with the primary and secondary direction calculated automatically. The user can eliminate this criteria by entering zero values for crack
control due to shrinkage and temperature. For more info see Crack Control .

5. And finally, the software will check the user prescribed minimum steel, and if needed the top or bottom steel rates will be increase, as request by the user. So, the software
will never use less steel than prescribed by the user. See User Defined Reinforcement .

Date Modified: 30/03/2014

Title: Slab Reinforcement: General Approach

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement > Concept > General Approach]

Description: Overview of the General Approach to reinforcement design in SLABS.

The general approach is intended to be used for initial analysis to determine the general reinforcement requirements throughout the slab. Only a single bar size, cover
and degree of crack control can be specified for the entire slab. The screenshot below shows the default values in SLABS. No User Defined Reinforcement has been
input and the software will calculate the required reinforcement. By default the slab is assumed to be fully enclosed with a moderate degree of crack control with the
primary and secondary direction being determined automatically. For more info see Crack Control. The General Approach is to be used for initial runs to determine
general reinforcement requirements. Once they have been determined it is recommended the Refined Approach be used for preparation of the slab for drafting and
to check is any reinforcement is missing.
In the screenshot below the “Compression Reinforcement” percentage drop down box is not used in strength calculations as a single reinforced section is assumed as
the contribution of compressive reinforcement in slabs is minimal. It is used for deflection calculations in particular the calculation of the effective second moment of
area, Ief. In the case User Defined Reinforcement is input it will take the largest value.

User Input in SLABS: General Approach

1. The general design parameters are set in [Input > Material properties].

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 158 of 308

General Approach: Reinforcement Design Parameters

Date Modified: 30/03/2014

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Slab Reinforcement: Refined Approach

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement > Concept > Refined Approach ]

Description: Overview of the Refined Approach to reinforcement design in SLABS.

Once the general reinforcement requirements are determined the reinforcement layout can be refined. Different bar size, bar laying sequence, cover, exposure and
degree of crack control can be defined by slab type or by slab thickness. This is intended to be used for the detailed design of the slab in preparation for drafting.
Combining this with Ast zones the user can completely design and detail the reinforcement including adding individual bars e.g. above columns and penetrations. The
software can then check if the input steel is sufficient and highlight areas where steel is missing. With all of this information input the software will produce a much
more accurate steel rate.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 159 of 308

User Input in SLABS: Refined Approach

1. The refined design parameters are set in [Input > Material Properties]. The user has input a user defined basic reinforcement grid by slab type and set the parameters for
crack control for shrinakge and temperature effects. See User Defined Reinforcement for information about user defined steel and see Crack Control for information about
crack control for shrinkage and temperature.

Refined Approach: Reinforcement Design Parameters

Concrete and Reinforcement Table

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 160 of 308

Crack Control for Srinkage and Temperatue Effects Table

Date Modified: 30/03/2014

Title: Slab Reinforcement: Viewing the Results

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement > Viewing the Results]

Description: Describes how to view the reinforcement results and the various viewing options and tools that are available to extract the total reinforcement.

1. After a successful analysis the results are first displayed by selecting [Results > Reinforcement X­X or Reinforcement Y­Y].

Display the Results

2. Reinforcement top or bottom, X or Y can be alternated using the toggle buttons. By default the reinforcement is in the global X and Y direction. This can be changed by slab
type using [Input > Reinforcing Bar Direction] . The toggle buttons that are available is dependant on if there is User Defined Reinforcement present.

No User Defined Reinforcement

User Defined Reinforcement Has Been Input

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 161 of 308

3. The reinforcement in mm 2/ m can be displayed on screen by left­clicking within the slab. The steel rate is displayed per finite element node.

a. The steel rate can be displayed as rate, bar spacing or rate + bar spacing as shown in the screenshot below.

Reinforcement Displayed in mm 2/m

b. The maximum value withing an area can be displayed by left click, dragging and selecting a range.

Displaying Maximum Reinforcement in Selected Range

c. The steel rate can be integrated over a user defined width or by manually clicking two points to get the total steel area.

Integrating to Get Total Steel

4. If User Defined Reinforcement has been input there are several display options.

a. Theoretical: only displays the steel rate as required by the code.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 162 of 308

b. Design: If the “1(2)” checkbox is checked both the design result and an informative number are displayed on screen as outlined in screenshot below. If it is
unchecked only the design value is shown.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 163 of 308

c. Extra: Only the extra steel is shown. The extra steel can be designed using Ast zones .

5. Ast zones can also be used as an integration tool to display total steel within an area. They are drawn as geometry lines. The values they display will depend on if User Defined
Reinforcement has been input. For more detail info see Ast zone .

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 164 of 308

Ast Zones: No User Defined Reinforcement - Required Steel Will Be Calculated In Ast Zone

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 165 of 308

Ast Zone: When User Defined Reinforcement is Present Only the Extras Will Be Calculted By the Ast Zone.

User Defined Reinforcement = 429 mm2/m X­X Btm

Date Modified: 30/03/2014

Title: Slab Reinforcement: Recommended Design and Detailing Procedure

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement > Recommended Design and Detailing Procedure ]

Description: Describes the recommended procedure for design and detailing of reinforcement using SLABS

SLABS has several different ways to view and input the reinforcement. Using the following features the user can completely design and detail the reinforcement in SLABS and
have the software check if any steel is missing or if they have put in a lot of extra steel. The following section briefly outlines the recommended procedure for reinforcement
design and detailing using SLABS. It is also demonstrated in the following video .
1. After the structural framing is determined perform the initial reinforcement design using the General Approach . From this analysis the reinforcement
requirements for the various sections of the slab can be determined.
2. Start defining slab types based on the different reinforcement that will be put into the slab. For example external area will need to be different slab types as
their cover will be different. Areas requiring a greater magnitude of reinforcement should also be set as different slab types.
3. Next, the reinforcement will be specified using the Refined Approach . The various reinforcement rates are input by slab type as outlined in the User Defined
Reinforcement and the model is re­analysed. The results are reviewed to determine if the input steel is sufficient in the majority of the slab as per the Extra
Steel .
4. The extra steel is designed using Ast Zones and the bar spacing can be refined to correspond to the spacing that will be used inUser Defined Reinforcement
grid .
5. Individual bars can be drawn with the Ast single bar feature for example above columns, around penetrations
6. Using Check User Defined Reinforcement feature the user can check if the steel they have input is sufficient and any extra steel can be added if needed.
7. The Reinforcement Quantity can be displayed and multiplied by 10­20% to account for laps, hooks and cogs.

Date Modified: 30/03/2014

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 166 of 308

Title: Slab Reinforcement: User Defined Reinforcement

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement > User Defined Reinforcement]

Description: Overview of how to input user defined reinforcement.

During the initial runs, when there is no User Defined Reinforcement the software will design to the theoretical minimum of AS 3600­2009 or other selected design
code. As the structural framing and slab thicknesses are finalised and the user has an idea of the reinforcement rate that is required in the various parts of the slab the
user can start defining the reinforcement. It can then be determined if the input steel is adequate and where extra steel is needed. Any extra steel can then be
designed using the Ast zones .

The User Defined Reinforcement is a user defined minimum amount of steel that SLABS will consider in design. The software will never use a smaller amount than
prescribed by the user in the basic grid. However if this prescribed amount is not adequate to resist the applied load or to control cracking the software will adopt the
required larger steel rate.

Typically, the reinforcement requirement for the majority of the slab should be what is input into the User Defined Reinforcement and any zones of extra
reinforcement can be designed locally using the Ast zones. This is more economical than applying the peak reinforcement rate that only occurs in a small area on the
entire area of slab. This is illustrated in an example in the Extra Steel Section.

The User Defined Reinforcement is defined in different ways depending on what reinforcement design approach has been adopted:

! General Approach

o Global

o By Slab Thickness

o By Individual slab zone

! Refined Approach

o By Slab Type (recommended)

Date Modified: 27/03/2014

Title: Slab Reinforcement: User Defined Reinforcement: General Approach

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement > User Defined Reinforcement > General Approach]

Description: Outlines how to input user defined reinforcement using the General Approach to reinforcement design in SLABS.

General Approach:

" Global
" By Slab Thickness
" By Individual slab zone

General Approach: Global User Defined Reinforcement

The value for the user defined reinforcement shown in the picture below will be applied over the entire floor, in both orthogonal directions. This is the quickest way
to apply user defined reinforcement, but does not allow any variation of the reinforcement over different slab zones.
In the screenshot below as both the “Compressive Reinforcement” and “Bottom Basic Reinforcement” and “Top Basic Reinforcement” have values input the software
will use the larger of the two. In this case 50% compressive reinforcement will govern. 377 mm2/m x 0.5 = 188.5 mm2/m > 180 mm2/m. This will then be used for
subsequent calculations of Ieff.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 167 of 308

General Approach: Global User Defined Reinforcement

General Approach: By Slab Thickness

The user defined reinforcement can be defined by slab thickness range. Varying covers cannot be defined.

In this case as the “Compressive Reinforcement” dropdown box is not active the software will automatically calculate the ratio of compressive steel to tensile
steel based on the user input values in the “Basic Grid Reinforcement” table for subsequent deflection calculations.

General Approach: User Defined ReinforcementBy Slab Thickness

General Approach: By Individual Slab Zone

Reinforcement rates can additionally be defined per individual slab zone. The slab zone is selected and the reinforcement rate input in the properties windows. In the
case that global user defined reinforcement or user defined reinforcement by slab thickness has been defined the software will take the largest value of the two. This
feature lets the user quickly increase the steel rate in an individual zone without having to go back into the material properties. This feature is disabled when
reinforcement by slab type (Refined Approach ) is used.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 168 of 308

General Approach: User Defined Reinforcement By Slab Zone

Date Modified: 30/03/2014

PAN>

The Incremental deflection is therefore; 21.7 ­ 6.6 = 15.1 mm

The span/deflection ratio can then be calculated as; 7247 / 15.1 = 480

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Slab Reinforcement: User Defined Reinforcement: Refined Approach

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement > User Defined Reinforcement > Refined Approach]

Description: Outlines how to input user defined reinforcement using the Refined Approach to reinforcement design in SLABS.

Refined Approach

" By Slab Type (recommended)

Refined Approach: Basic Reinforcement Grid By Slab Type

Defining the basic reinforcement grid by slab type is the most comprehensive option. The user can vary steel rate, bar size, bar laying sequence, cover, exposure,
concrete and degree of crack control per slab type.

The detailed table will be used only when the “Slab Concrete Reinforcement” checkbox is checked. In this case the concrete strength which was used globally before
will be used for the columns and walls only and the slab concrete the properties entered in the detailed table will be adopted.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 169 of 308

Refined Approach: Basic Reinforcement Grid By Slab Type

In the following table, two slab concrete and reinforcement properties are defined, one for each slab type used in the model (see below). The slab type is defined by
selecting the slab zone after meshing and changing the "Type" number in the property window. As can be seen in the screenshot all paramters can be edited per slab
type. The cover for design that will be used in the calcualtion of dav is automatically calculated based on the bar size.

Detailed Slab Concrete and Steel Table

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 170 of 308

Slab Types Used in the Model

After the analysis, the user can see which basic grid is used for which slab area (for each layer: X­X or Y­Y, bottom or top) by using the buttons shown in the picture
below.

And reinforcement results will include the basic grid per slab type information as shown below. See Concept > Refined Approachon how to interpret the
reinforcement results.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 171 of 308

Date Modified: 30/03/2014

Title: Slab Reinforcement: Extra Steel

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement > Extra Steel ]

Description: Outlines the Extra Steel concept.

After the User Defined Reinforcement is input and the model re­analysed the user can check if any extra steel is required. The recommended procedure to
determine extra steel is demonstrated on the following simple model. For a demonstration on a more complex model please see the demonstration videos.

Example:

The results shown below are after the initial analysis is completed. As there is only one slab zone in this example it does not matter if the General Approach or
the Refined Approach is used. Looking at the reinforcement in the X­X direction, bottom, it is evident that a steel rate of 440 mm2/m or N12­250 will be adequate for
the majority of the slab.

Steel Result, X­X Bottom ­ Without Basic Grid

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 172 of 308

Next, the User Defined Reinforcement is input. In this case a basic reinforcement grid of 440 mm2/m (N12 ­ 250) was input in the “Slab Concrete and Reinforcement
Table" so it is easier for the builder to lay out on site.

Basic Grid, X­X Bottom

Re­anlysing the model and displaying the reinforcement and examine the “Design” results it is evident that the input steel rate of 440 mm2/m is adequate for most of
the slab in the X­X bottom. Blue meaning that the input steel is equal to or greater than the theoretical required steel. Red meaning that the input steel isn’t
sufficient. If “Theoretical” is selected the steel contour plot will look the same as the first screenshot.

Design reinforcement results with User Defined Reinforcement of 440 mm2/m

Finally, when “Design” and “Extra” are checked the extra amount of steel can be viewed. This can then be designed by placing extra bars locally in these areas using
Ast zones .

Zones with "Extra" Steel

Rather than applying a reinforcement rate of 521 mm2/m over the entire slab zone the more economical approach of specifying User Defined Reinforcement that had
a steel rate that was representative of the majority of the slab was chosen. The required extra steel will then be locally detailed using Ast zones as shown below. The
software calculates the required theoretical steel and the user can rationalise the bar size and spacing to match the spacing of the basic grid so the builder can easily
lay the extra's in­between the basic grid on site. The user defined total steel must always be equal to or greater than the program calculated theoretical.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 173 of 308

Theoretical Extra Steel Required

User Defined Extra Steel

See: Improve Accuracy of Slab Reinforcement

Date Modified: 31/03/2014

Title: Slab Reinforcement: Ast Zones

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement > Ast Zones]

Description: Detailed notes about using Ast zones for reinforcement detailing.

At any location within the slab the user can draw a polygon called an Ast Zone to extract reinforcement information. If User Defined Reinforcement is input the
Ast zone will show extra steel. If it is not it will calcualte the steel required in that area. The Ast Zones are not structural elements, and they do not interfere with the
structure. They can be considered as a tool to rationalise and automate the reinforcement detailing. Ast Zones are especially efficient when used in combination with
the User Defined Reinforcement to determine the required Extra steel.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 174 of 308

Ast Zone Tool

They are defined as closed polylines, in the same manner as the Geometry Lines, by clicking on the screen, using the appropriate Snapping Modes [F2]. SLABS
however does not mesh to Ast zones. When an Ast Zone is created, at that moment it will be placed in one of the four reinforcement results layers that is active: X­X
Top, X­X Bottom, Y­Y Top, Y­Y Bottom. So, each Ast Zone is related only to one of four reinforcement results layers.
Ast Zones are similar like Wide Beams, they are used to extract the steel results. A Band Beam is the physical structural elements made of concrete, while the Wide
Beam is just a geometrical entity used to extract beam steel results. Similarly, the slab is a physical structural element, while Ast Zones are just data entities used to
summarise the steel results.

Ast Zone and Wide Beams

The basic function of the Ast Zone is to consider the steel rates from all nodes in the areas covered by the Ast Zone, and to evaluate a uniform bar spacing. The
software will automatically identify the maximum steel rate in each Ast Zone and it will integrate at that point across the entire width of the Ast Zone, and it will come
up with a bar spacing which is sufficient to cover the steel rate in all nodes at that zone. Now, instead of having different steel rates at each nodal point, there is
a uniform bar spacing over this area.
Note, the bar development length is currently not added to the ends of the bars in the Ast zone automatically. However, the required amount of steel at the ends of
the Ast zone is greater than what is needed as it has been designed for the peak value so the reduced capacity along the bars development length has less of an
impact.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 175 of 308

Ast Zones: No User Defined Reinforcement ­ Required Steel Will Be Calculated In Ast Zone

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 176 of 308

Ast Zone: When User Defined Reinforcement is Present Only the Extras Will Be Calculted By the Ast Zone.

It is recommended that the user examines the bar spacing in each Ast Zone. SLABS will calculate what is required to resist the load but will not rationalise the bar
spacing, for example, to match the spacing of the basic reinforcement grid. The user can modify the bar spacing if needed. The software will prevent the user from
entering a total amount of steel that is less 90% than what is required. So, the user may enter 10% less steel then automatically calculated by the software.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 177 of 308

User Defined Bar Spacing and Bar Size

The bar labels that are displayed on screen for the Ast are bar size and spacing by default as shown in the screenshot above. The user has the option of changing the
labelling per Ast zone to show the total number of bars as per the screenshot below.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 178 of 308

Ast Zone Labeling

Ast - Individual Bars

There is another option to introduce individual bars at any location in the slab (see picture below). Individual bars properties, such as bar diameter, and number of
bars are not automatically determined by the software and are user defined only. The user may enter any values in the single bars property table. The individual bars
are included in the User Defined Reinforcement Check .

Ast Individual Bars

Example of Ast Zones Usage

In the picture below the User Defined Reinforcement in the X­X bottom is shown. We can observe that all slab panels shown on the screen have the same steel rate
of 440 mm2/m .

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 179 of 308

When the Design steel is shown, a few areas will shown like isolated clouds. In these zones some extra steel, above the user defined basic grid of 440 mm2/m , is
needed. At this stage it is important to note the locations of theses “clouds”, and to create some Ast Zones which will cover the clouds. At this stage it is not
important how much more extra steel is needed in these “clouds”.

After the Ast Zones are created, we can shows the design Steel with the “Extra” option selected, and the software will automatically identify the amount of extra steel
in each zone. The bar size and spacing can be modified from the program calculated values provided it is equal to or greater than program calculated value.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 180 of 308

Labelling of Ast Zones can be chaged to show the total number of bars in the zone.

See: Improve Accuracy of Slab Reinforcement Usage Notes

Date Modified: 29/03/2014

Title: Slab Reinforcement: Ast Zones Usage

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement > Ast Zones > Usage Notes]

Description: Notes on Ast Zones Usage

The best usage of the Ast Zones is when some Basic Grid is defined over a larger areas of the floor, and when only a few isolated zones need some extra steel. These
zones with some extra steel will appear as isolate "clouds" on the reinforcement results screen. So, for the selected direction, either X­X of Y­Y, and for the top or
bottom steel, the extra steel "clouds" will indicate where the extra bars are needed, and where the Ast Zones have to be defined by the user. (see picture below)

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 181 of 308

Extra Bars are Needed in the Extra Steel "Clouds"

Now, the user has to define the Ast Zones over each extra steel "cloud". Usually, the Ast Zones are if rectangular shape. Since the extra steel "clouds" indicate exactly
where the steel is needed, the Ast Zones have to extend on both sides in the direction of the bars in order to accommodate for the anchorage length. Note that the
Extra Steel "clouds" do not consider the anchorage length automatically. (see picture below)

It is a good practice to define one Ast Zone for each Extra Steel "Cloud". If several clouds are inside one Ast Zone, the steel spacing might not be based on the largest
steel requirement. In such case, a careful visual examination of the Ast Zones bar spacing is highly recommended.

In the picture below a good example of the right amount of extra steel areas, and well defined Ast Zones, is shown. The steel is in the X­X direction, horizontal on the
screen.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 182 of 308

Date Modified: 02/06/2014

Title: Slab Reinforcement: Check User Defined Reinforcement

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement > Check User Defined Reinforcement]

Description: How to Check User Defined Reinforcement to see how efficient the design is and if there are areas that are missing reinforcement .

SLABS offers features that allow the user to check how efficient their design is and if there are areas that do not have enough steel. These featuers only work if Ast
zones are present. If Ast zones are not present SLABS increases the reinforcement to what is needed to satisfy the requirements of AS 3600 and these checks wouldn't
be necessary.

[Tools > Check User Defined Reinforcement (Ast Zones) > Below]: Displays an areas that do not have enough reinforcement.
As outlined in the Concept and Viewing the Results sections SLABS will take the maximum of the User Defined Reinforcement and the theoretical minimum to the
concrete code to be used in all future calculations. Also when drawing Ast Zones and manually changing the values the software prevents the user from inputting
values less than what is required by the code. Therefore in most cases the [Tools > Check User Defined Reinforcement (Ast Zones) > Below] will not show any nodes
that have a reinforcement rate below the required amount as through the entire design and detailing process the user has been prevented from inputting an amount
less than required. If they have input less than required amount the larger calculated amount is used.
However, the feature becomes much more useful in the case that the structure is changed. As outlined in the example below the user input steel is defined as well as
Ast Zones, a column is removed and the user decides to keep the steel they have input. This check can now be used to see where the steel amount is not sufficient.
This is outlined in the example below.
[Tools > Check User Defined Reinforcement (Ast Zones) > Above]: Checks how efficient the design is and shows areas that do not have enough reinforcement.
This features is used to determine how efficient the design is. It will also show areas that do not have adequate steel. The user can see on screen how much more
steel has been input than needed per finite element node.
Ast zones must be present as if there are none the software will increase the steel to the max of the user defined steel and the theoretical minimum to AS 3600.
Therefore if there are no Ast zones SLABS will put in the requried reinforcement what is needed for the slab to work. In order to perofrm the "Above check" there
must be some extra user defined steel that is input by the way of the Ast zone.
Note, in both of these cases as the results are per finite element node there may be spikes in the results that will show as not having enough reinforcement. If it is just
one or two nodes for example above a column they can be ignored as this forces will spread around the surrounding concrete. It is only an issues when there is a
cluster of them together.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 183 of 308

Check User Defined Reinforcement (Ast Zones) > Above

Example:
[Tools > Check User Defined Reinforcement (Ast Zones) > Below]
Ast Zones automatically caculate the bar spacing and size in that area, but those numbers can be changed by user with the condition that user defined reinforcement
is not less than the required one (within a small tolerance for rounding off purposes). SLABS software has also a checking tool which calculates the total user defined
reinforcement at each node and reports if it is less than required. This tool can be used after AstBoxes are defined and once reinforcement results are shown.

The slab reinforcements and the Ast Zones defined by user are shown below. Ast Zone reinforcement is shown as bar spacing and bar size at the property table and
the bar spacing is automatically calculated. By default, the user defined Ast Zone bar spacing and bar size are the same and updated each time Ast Zone

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 184 of 308

reinforcement is updated. However, once the user changes the user defined values then those new values are recorded and they are not changed anymore unless
specifically changed by the user.

In this example, Ast Zone 1 requires bars spacing of 440 mm and let's assume the user changed it to 400mm. Once the user changes the bar spacing and bar size, then
those user defined values are recorded by the software. Note that when typing the user defined bar spacing and size, the software automatically checks if the user
defined reinforcement (calculated based on user defined bar spacing and size) in the Ast Box is less than the required one and doesn't allow if this is less than the
required.

Ast Zone 2 requires bars spacing of 510 mm and let's assume the user changed it to 500mm.

Even though the software doesn't allow to type a bar spacing and size which will give a reinforcement area less than required, there is one case where the user

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 185 of 308

defined reinforcement can be less than the required. Now, for some reason, let's assume the user removed one of the columns and meshed and run the analysis
again.

As mentioned before, the user defined Ast Box reinforcement is remembered once it has been changed by the user and it will not be updated automatically after the
analysis is repeated. However, during the analysis, the user defined reinforcement will be compared to total required steel and a warning message will be shown if it
is less than the required. User may choose to use the software calculated reinforcement as user defined reinforcement by clicking 'Yes', or continue to use his
prefered steel even it is less than the required.

In this example, let's assume the user continues to use his prefered steel by clicking 'No' button. We can see in the following two pictures that the user defined Ast
Box reinforcements are less than the required ones.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 186 of 308

In order to make sure that user is aware of all areas where the user defined steel is less than the required one, an extra tool is introduced to review the user defined
reinforcement. It can be used from [Tools > Check User Defined Reinforcement (Ast Zones)] after displaying the reinforcement results. The check is done
per reinforcement layer (X­X or Y­Y and bottom or top).

All nodes where the user defined reinforcement less than the required are shown with small dots. Ast Boxes which contain those nodes are highlighted with red and a
list of those AstZones is given in the right hand side messagebox.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 187 of 308

It can be seen that those warning nodes are consistant with the reinforcement results which are printed in red.

Now let's assume the user updated the bar spacing of Ast Box 2 from 500mm to 200mm.

Th following two pictures show that for Ast Box 2, user defined reinforcement is not less than the requried one anymore and the check can be updated accordingly.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 188 of 308

[Tools > Check User Defined Reinforcement (Ast Zones) > Above]

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 189 of 308

The areas where the steel is above the requried steel are shown with squares and all areas where the steel is below the requried steel are shown with orange dots.

White squares: Ast_required <= Ast_user_defined < 1.1 * Ast_required

Light Blue squares : 1.1 * Ast_required <= Ast_user_defined < 1.5 * Ast_required
Blue squares : 1.5 * Ast_required <= Ast_user_defined < 2 * Ast_required
Dark Blue squares: Ast_user_defined > 2 * Ast_required

Orange dots: Ast_user_defined < Ast_required

Date Modified: 30/03/2014

Title: Slab Reinforcement: Rectangular Section Steel Design

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement > Rectangular Section Steel Design ]

Description: Basic Theory for Rectangular Section Reinforcement Design.

AS 3600

The reinforcement design procedure assumes an under­reinforced section, and is based on the following expression:

where:

M ­ design (factored) bending moment (M*)

! ­ strength capacity reduction factor,

equals to 0.8, AS 3600­2001 (note: brittle sections are not designed in SLABS)

may take values from to 0.6 to 0.8, depending on Kuo and steel class, AS 3600­2009

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 190 of 308

b ­ section width, equal to 1 m for the slab

d ­ effective section depth for the x and y directions

As ­ reinforcement cross section

fsy ­ steel strength

f'c ­ concrete strength

Note: The above expression is reproduced from the textbook:

Reinforced Concrete by R.F. Warner, B.V. Rangan and A.S. Hall, Third Edition, Longman Cheshire, 1989, (equation 4.24)

=================================================================================

BS 8110

The reinforcement design procedure assumes an under­reinforced section, i.e no double reinforcement is allowed. The design is based on BS 8110, clause 3.4.4.4.

The design safety factors for the materials are:

1.50 ­ concrete

1.15 ­ steel

Crack check not performed. The software will check the minimum reinforcement, at each nodal point (BS 8110, Table 3.25)

=================================================================================

CSA A23.3

where:

Mu ­ ultimate bending moment

"!s ­ strength reduction factor, equal to 0.85 (CSA A23.3, Clause 8.4.3)

"!c ­ strength reduction factor, equal to 0.6 (CSA A23.3, Clause 8.4.2)

b ­ section width, equal to 1 m for the slab

d ­ effective section depth for the x and y directions

As ­ reinforcement cross section

fy ­ steel strength

fc' ­ concrete strength

See: Basic Grid , Large Slab Moments at Wall Ends

Date Modified: 28/02/2014

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 191 of 308

Title: Slab Reinforcement: Minimum Reinforcement

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement > Minimum Reinforcement ]

Description: Notes regarding the minimum reinforcement requirements for slabs in SLABS.

The minimum reinforcement for strength in the slab and in the beams (top and bottom) is evaluated automatically. Minimum reinforcement in the slab can be
calculated according three alternative methods:

AS 3600-2001

Muo > 1.2 Mcr (AS 3600 ­ 2001, clause 8.1.4.1)

Ast/bd > 0.0025 (AS 3600 ­ 2001, clause 9.1.1)

Ast/bd > 0.0020 (AS 3600 ­ 2001, clause 9.1.1)

AS 3600-2009

Muo > 1.2 Mcr (AS 3600 ­ 2009, clause 8.1.6.1)

0.24 (D/d)2 f'ctf / fsy (AS 3600 ­ 2009, clause 9.1.1)

0.19 (D/d)2 f'ctf / fsy (AS 3600 ­ 2009, clause 9.1.1)

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 192 of 308

BS 8110

Minimum reinforcement in the beams for BS 8110 are calculated according:

Muo > Mcr (BS 8110 ­ 2: 1985, Section 3.6)

CSA A23.3

Minimum reinforcement in the beams for BS 8110 are calculated according:

Muo > 1.2 Mcr (CSA A23.3, Section 7.8.1)

For the slabs, all the calculations of the minimum reinforcement are based on the effective section depth.

Date Modified: 15/10/2010

Title: Slab Reinforcement: Crack Control

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement ]

Description: Notes regarding crack control in SLABS.

For AS 3600­2009 only, SLABS follows the deemed to comply approach for crack control due to flexure, shrinkage and temperature effects.
Cracks develops wherever the tensile stress in the concrete exceeds its tensile capacity. The following phenomenon produce the following types of cracks:
­axial tensile force: direct tension cracks
­restrained shrinkage and temperature effects: direct tension cracks
­bending: flexural cracks
Direct tension crack penetrate completely through the member and are parallel and flexure cracks occur on the tensile face of the concrete. Flexural cracks are widest
at the tensile face and their width reduces to zero at the neutral axis.

Crack control for flexure in reinforced slabs

AS 3600­2009 Clause 9.4.1 controls cracking due to flexure by limiting the tensile stress in the reinforcement crossing a crack to Tables 9.4.1 (A) and (B). It also
ensures that the reinforcement is adequately distributed through the tensile zone by setting limits on the bar spacing.
AS 3600­2009 does not follow deterministic approaches of determining crack widths as these approaches do not consider the increase of crack width over time due to
shrinkage effects.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 193 of 308

Crack control for shrinkage and temperature effects

Shrinkage and temperature effects causes compression in the concrete section which generate an equal and opposite tensile force within the reinforcement.
Restraints from connections to other parts of the structure (walls / columns) provide additional restraint. The tensile force is often great enough to generate time­
dependant cracking.
AS 3600­2009 states that bending effects, degree of restraint against in plane movements and the exposure classification should be considered when determine
reinforcement required for crack control due to shrinkage and temperature effects.

Crack control in SLABS

SLABS will determine if the calculated amount of steel is adequate to for crack control of shrinkage and temperature effects. In the case it is not is will add the
required additional steel in such a way as to make the steel in the top of the slab equal to the steel in the bottom. For example is the mid­span of a slab needs 370
mm2/m bottom and 0 mm2/m top for strength and it needs an extra 100 mm2/m for crack control the 100 mm2/m will be placed in the top of the slab as to balance the
reinforcement.
The following screenshots shows when crack control for flexure governs the steel design and when crack control for shrinkage and temperature effects governs. In the
case that there are both a green and a blue circle on the same fintie element node crack control for shrinkage and temperature governs as this check is performed
last.

Reinforcement for Crack Control

Date Modified: 28/03/2014RIGHT: 0px">

fc' ­ concrete strength

See: Basic Grid , Large Slab Moments at Wall Ends

Date Modified: 28/02/2014

Title: Slab Reinforcement: Crack Control: General Approach

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement > Crack Control > General Approach ]

Description: Crack control using the General Approach.

General Approach
The general procedure applies the same exposure and crack control requirements to the entire extent of the slab. The user must calculate the reinforcement
percentage required for crack control manually and put it in the “Primary” and “Secondary” fields. It is useful for initial analysis but for detailed design the Refined
Approach should be used.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 194 of 308

General Approach: Crack Control

By default a fully enclosed slab requiring a moderate degree of crack control is assumed:

Primary = 0.75 x 3.5 bD x 10­3

Secondary = 3.5 bD x10­3

If the structure is to be a two way flat plate both directions can be considered to be primary and have the same reinforcement percentage1. By putting 2.63 in both
the “Primary” and “Secondary” field both directions are taken as primary.

General Approach: Both Directions Primary

In the case that “Primary” and “Secondary” are different the software will automatically determine what direction is the primary and secondary direction node by
node. If the moment in X is less than or equal to 50% the moment in Y then the Y direction is taken as the primary direction and the X is taken as the secondary. In the
case that the moments of the X direction is > 50 % of the Y direction both directions are taken as primary and only the “Primary” values is used. As this is done node
by node the case may arise when, within the same span, some points in a given direction are “Primary” and others are “Secondary.” This is another reason why the
Refined Approach is recommended for detailed design.

Date Modified: 30/03/2014

Title: Slab Reinforcement: Crack Control: Refined Approach

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement > Crack Control > Refined Approach ]

Description: Crack control using the Refined Approach.

Refined Approach
The refined approach allows the user to specify different exposure and degree of crack control per slab type. This is done by checking the “Slab Concrete and
Reinforcement Table” checkbox.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 195 of 308

Refined Approach: Crack Control

In the “Slab Concrete and Reinforcement" the exposure for crack control is specified. This value is then used in the “Crack Control for Shrinkage and Temperature
Effects” table. The user has the option if varying the restraint (100% being fully restrained and 0% being unrestrained), exposure class, crack control with the
percentage of reinforcement required in the primary direction and secondary direction calculated automatically. The user also has the option of specifying which
direction is primary. If “X” is selected X is the primary direction and Y is the secondary and vice versa for when “Y” is selected. If “in X and Y” is selected both directions
are primary and only the “Reo Primary” value is used.

Refined Approach: Set Exposure by Slab Type

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 196 of 308

Refined Approach: Set Parameters Crack Control for Skrinkage and Temperature Effects

References

1
: Gilbert, R. I., November 2012. AS 3600 commentary National Seminar Series. Sydney, Concrete Institue of Australia.

Date Modified: 30/03/2014

ace=Calibri>Date Modified: 30/03/2014

Title: Slab Reinforcement: Over­Reinforced Sections

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement > Over Reinforced Sections]

Description: General notes about over­reinforced warnings in SLABS.

The software will try to design the slab and the beam sections as singly reinforced sections, assuming failure occurs in the reinforcement. If the bending moment is
larger and the section depth is not sufficient for a single layer of reinforcement, the software will report a warning: 'Over Reinforced Sections', and it will put red dots
at the critical locations. In this case the section depth has to be increase and model re­analysed.

An example this type of warning is shown in the following screen shots:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 197 of 308

See: Large Slab Moments at Wall Ends

Date Modified: 15/10/2010

Title: Slab Reinforcement: Reinforcement on an Angle

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement > Reinforcement on an Angle ]

Description: How to input the required parameters in order to model slab reinforcement at angles to global X/Y including extracting results in SLABS.

SLABS by default assumes the reinforcement will be laid parallel the global X and Y axes, horizontal and vertical in plane. However, sometimes part of the slab and the
supporting column grid is rotated, and the steel bars have to be laid on angle to the global axes. SLABS has a special input which allow the user to define different
angles of the reinforcing bars for different slab zones.

This feature allows the user to analyse models which has zones with different orientation of the steel bars. During the analysis the software will rotate the moment
field results: Mx, My, Mxy, in the direction of the user defined angle.

The areas where the reinforcement is at an angle to global X and Y need to be specified by the user as a different 'type'. This input is entered once the mesh has been
generated and the slab zones created by the software. When a slab zone is selected the software will display the Property Table and associated parameters indicating
the 'type'. By default the type for all mesh zones is set by the software as 1, and this variable needs to be changed to a different number in order to differentiate the
slab zone from other areas in the model.

In the example screen shot below the type variable for the selected slab zones have been set to 2.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 198 of 308

By taking the distance along the band beams that are orientated at an angle the software will indicate that the exact angle of the reinforcement in the selected slab
zones needs to be set to 42 degrees. This input for all type 2 slab zones needs to be entered into the table available under [ Input > Reinforcing Bar Direction ] from
the Main Menu. The following screen shot shows the sign convention built into SLABS when entering an angle as well as the reinforcement angle for all type 2 slab
zones assigned as 42 degrees.

After the model is analysed and the reinforcement results displayed on screen, clicking within any of the 'type 2' slab zones will display the reinforcement

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 199 of 308

(410mm2/m) at that located and at the angle that was entered in the Reinforcing Bar Direction input table. The software will also display a short line as
a visual indication of the reinforcement orientation, as shown in the screen shot below for the X­X direction ­ bottom;

The following screen shot shows the reinforcement results in Y­Y bottom (410mm2/m). As for the opposite direction (in the previous screen shot), the short line is
a visual indication of the angle that the bars are to be laid.

Note: In this example the angle of the reinforcement was not specified. This is because SLABS will automatically rotate the reinforcement results in the band beams
when the wide beam elements are created.

­­­­­

The picture below is another example of a slab with three different zones, were the bars have to be layed in three different directions. In each zone the principal axes
are different and the bars have to be placed on different angle. In this case all slab panles in each zone have to be se to be of the same type, and then a different bar
angle has to be set for each slab type.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 200 of 308

Slab with three different zones for bar directions

Date Modified: 17/04/2013

Title: Slab Reinforcement: Centrally Reinforced Slab

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement > Centrally Reinforced Slab ]

Description: Describes how to apply centrally located reinforcement.

Normally, slabs are reinforced with top and bottom steel. However, slabs on ground can be reinforced centrally. In such a case, the effective cover given in [Input>
Material Properties] window needs to be set equal to the half of the slab thickness. For instance, if the slab thickness is 160mm, in the Material Input Panel, 80mm
needs to be entered in the "Cover+One Bar" box (General Approach) or "Cover for Design" in the “Slab Concrete and Reinforcement" table (Refined Approach). Also,
the compression reinforcement needs to be set to 0% either from the dropdown box in Material Properties > Slabs if the General Approach is used or set as "0" in the
“Slab Concrete and Reinforcement" if the Refeind Approach is used.

Then, the design of the slab should be performed in the usual manner. All reinforcement displayed by the software at both top and bottom, should be placed at the
center of the slab section in both directions.

Date Modified: 17/04/2013

Title: Slab Reinforcement: Mxy in Reinforcement Design

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement > Mxy in Reinforcement Design ]

Description: Description of the procedure to include the twisting moment Mxy in the slab steel design.

Twisting Moment Mxy

According to the Elastic Plate Theory in a 2D flat plate there are three moments: Mx, My, Mxy. These three moments make the design moment field. The moment
Mxy is a twisting moment, which the user may choose to include in the slab steel design. SLABS will use the envelope moment Mx to design the steel in X­X direction,
which might or might not include the twisting moment Mxy. The envelope moment My is used to design the steel in Y­Y direction, which might or might not include
the twisting moment Mxy. The inclusion of Mxy is user selectable on the Material Properties input panels. (more...)

It is important to note again that for the slab steel design the envelope bending moment is used. The envelope moment is the maximum moment from a list of user
selected strength load combinations. The envelope design moment is the maximum value of bending moments (either positive or
negative) automaticaly identified from a list of user selected load combinations. The load combinations included in the moment envelope are selected on the "Load
Combination Factors" input panel on the main menu. (more...)

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 201 of 308

The user may choose to include the twisting slab moment Mxy the steel design. This option is available on the [Material Properties] input panel: “Include Mxy in
Design”

For the positive moments field the following equations are used:

Mx2 = Mx1 + K | Mxy |

My2 = My1 + 1/K | Mxy |

For the negative moments field the following equations are used:

Mx2 = Mx1 ­ K | Mxy |

My2 = My1 ­ 1/K | Mxy |

Where Mx1 and My1 are the initial values of the slab moment, while Mx2 and My2 are moments used in the steel design, which include the twisting moment Mxy.

In SLABS software we assume K=1 for the most efficient arrangement of the steel in X and Y directions.

Reference: Reinforced Concrete Slabs, 2nd Edition, Robert Park & William L. Gamble, page 226.

Also see: Material Properties Input Panel >>> Slab Reinforcement Properties

Date Modified: 30/03/2014

Title: Slab Reinforcement: Reinforcement Quantity Report

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Slab Reinforcement > Reinforcement Quantity Report ]

Description: Reinforcement Quantity Report.

The reinforcement rate can be viewed in the reinforcement quantity report [Reports > Reinforcement Quantity Report]. If the Recommended Design and Detailing
Procedure is followed the slab detailing is essentially complete and the steel rate produced in the reinforcement quantity report will be much more accurate. Note,
slabs does not consider laps, hooks and cogs so the steel rate should be increased by 10 ­ 20% to account for this.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 202 of 308

Date Modified: 28/03/2014

N-TOP: 12pt" align=left>

Twisting Moment Mxy

According to the Elastic Plate Theory in a 2D flat plate there are three moments: Mx, My, Mxy. These three moments make the design moment field. The moment
Mxy is a twisting moment, which the user may choose to include in the slab steel design. SLABS will use the envelope moment Mx to design the steel in X­X direction,
which might or might not include the twisting moment Mxy. The envelope moment My is used to design the steel in Y­Y direction, which might or might not include
the twisting moment Mxy. The inclusion of Mxy is user selectable on the Material Properties input panels. (more...)

It is important to note again that for the slab steel design the envelope bending moment is used. The envelope moment is the maximum moment from a list of user
selected strength load combinations. The envelope design moment is the maximum value of bending moments (either positive or
negative) automaticaly identified from a list of user selected load combinations. The load combinations included in the moment envelope are selected on the "Load
Combination Factors" input panel on the main menu. (more...)

The user may choose to include the twisting slab moment Mxy the steel design. This option is available on the [Material Properties] input panel: “Include Mxy in
Design”

For the positive moments field the following equations are used:

Mx2 = Mx1 + K | Mxy |

My2 = My1 + 1/K | Mxy |

For the negative moments field the following equations are used:

Mx2 = Mx1 ­ K | Mxy |

My2 = My1 ­ 1/K | Mxy |

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 203 of 308

Where Mx1 and My1 are the initial values of the slab moment, while Mx2 and My2 are moments used in the steel design, which include the twisting moment Mxy.

In SLABS software we assume K=1 for the most efficient arrangement of the steel in X and Y directions.

Reference: Reinforced Concrete Slabs, 2nd Edition, Robert Park & William L. Gamble, page 226.

Also see: Material Properties Input Panel >>> Slab Reinforcement Properties

Date Modified: 30/03/2014

BEAM RESULTS - SLABS

- Beam Elements

- Beam Stiffness and its Effect on Moment Diagram

- Minimum Reinforcement for Strength

- Wide Beams

Title: Beam Results: Beam Elements

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Beam Results ]

Description: How the beam elements are represented numerically, including detailed notes on beam results in SLABS

In order to use the beam results properly, it is important to understand the way that the beam­slab connection is modelled. The mathematical model assumes that a
beam is only an additional structural element, which contributes to the global stiffness of the structure. Along a beam line, there is a plate element and a beam
element connected together. The bending moment will be divided among the slab (plate) and the beam, according to their relative stiffness. Usually, the slab will take
much less of the total bending moment.

The moment in the slabs (referred to as Mslab in the figure below) is available in the slab moment results. The moment in the beam (referred to as Mbeam in the figure
below) is available in the beam results.

The reinforcement in the beam should cover the moment Mbeam, and the reinforcement in the slabs should cover the moment Mslab. If mid­span is considered, the
reinforcement layout is shown below.

If there is no reinforcement in the slab along the beam, then the beam reinforcement should take the total bending moment Mbeam + Mslab

Once the analysis is performed the beam results can be obtained by selecting [ Results > Beam Load Case/Combin <or> Beam Envelope Design ] followed by clicking
on a beam element within the model. This will bring up the beam results box displaying the results graphically, as shown in the sample screen shot below;

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 204 of 308

The left and right arrows located on the results window allow the user to review results along the selected beam element. The red circle displayed over the beam
element indicates the location of the results in relation to the position along the beam element, as highlighted in the screen shot below;

A beam can be generated in the model as a single element, or it can be subdivided in several segments. Modelling a continuous beam as a series of smaller segments
will not affect the analysis and the results in any way as the software will consider the continuity automatically. The results can be reviewed for each segment
separately, or the user can choose to extract the segments as a continuous beam by setting the ‘Line’ switch in the Beam Results panel to ‘On’. The software will
automatically identify all segments of a beam when the user chooses to use this option.

Clicking on the Report button the results for the current beam will be opened as a text file in Notepad. When the beam results report is used, it is recommended to
produce a print­out of the slab geometry with beam numbers and beam directions for reference.

In order to extract the required longitudinal reinforcement for flexural strength and stirrup results, the user needs to select [ Results > Beams Envelope/Design ] from
the Main Menu. Once a beam element has been selected by the user, the program will then display the envelope results, and the detailed results along the beam can
be extracted using the arrows. The reinforcement results are displayed as a report by clicking on the ‘Report’ button while the envelope results are displayed.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 205 of 308

Beam results are also available for BS 8110 ­ 1997 and CSA A23.3 ­ 1994.

BS 8110

Beams longitudinal reinforcement design is based on BS 8110, Clause 3.4.4.4. Each beam section can be single or double reinforced. The shear design of the beams is
based on BS 8110, Clause 3.4.5.2.

CSA A23.3

Beams longitudinal reinforcement is calculated in the same manner as the slabs reinforcement. Shear design of beams is based on CSA, Section 11.

Torsion design in the beams, is not included. On the [ Material Properties ] input panel there is an option to include or exclude beam torsion. If beam torsion is
included in the analysis, the user shall perform a spot check to confirm that a particular beam has sufficient torsional capacity to resist the design torsion moment.
The check may be performed by INDUCTA's BEAM software.

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Beam Stiffness and its Effect on Moment Diagrams

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Beam Results > Beam Stiffness... ]

Description: Explanation on the effect of beam stiffness on the beam moment diagram

In any structural system, the internal forces are distributed among the structural elements according to their relative stiffness. We may say that the stiffer structural

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 206 of 308

elements will “attract” large portion of the internal forces, virtually “taking” the internal forces away from more flexible elements. So, if in a structural system there is
a very stiff element, regardless is it a beam, column, wall of a slab, that particular element will have significantly larger internal forces.

We need to be aware about the above concept when examining the internal forces in the beams and I the edge columns supporting the beams.

For instance, let us consider a beam supported by a column and a wall. The wall is pinned, so the moment at the wall will be zero. But, the column is fully fixed to the
beam, and we are expecting some negative moment at the column (see picture below).

Flexible Beam

If the beam is relatively flexible, i.e. if the beam is supported by an column with a comparable stiffness (see picture above), then the column will provide a significant
fixity, which will generate larger negative moment at the beam end (see picture below). Also, the column will have a larger moment of a similar magnitude.

Moment diagram in a Flexible Beam

However, if the beam is much stiffer, especially if the beam is supported by a significantly more flexible column, then the column, although fully fixed to the beam,
will act as a pinned support and the beam will get only a very small negative moment. (see picture below).

Stiff Beam Supported by a Flexible Column

Although the column is fully fixed to the beam, because of its relatively smaller stiffness the column is acting as a pinned support, and therefore the beam will have a
moment line like a pinned support. (see picture below) As a consequence, the column will have very small moments. We may observe that the column is action like a
as a flexible hinge, which will “relax” the beam, and the moment diagram in the beam will sag, reducing the negative moments and increasing the positive mid­span
moments.

Moment Diagram in a Stiff Beam Supported by a Flexible Column

­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 207 of 308

It is important to keep the above ides in mind when increasing the beam stiffness in SLABS software. See [ Material Input Panel > Beam Stiffness Factor ]. When a
beam factor of 4 is used, then as a consequence the beam will attract larger bending moments and more steel, but the moment diagram will also change. The
negative moments at the beam ends will be reduced, and the mid­span positive moments will increase. Also, the moments in the supporting columns will be
reduced.

In R/C BUILDING software the beam stiffness is controlled by the Beam Stiffness Factor and the Veridical Offset parameter. Both parameters are on the [ Model and
Solvers Settings ] Input panel.

The above concept is significant for the Line Beams, and much less important for Band Beams.

See: Beam Igross

Date Modified: 30/08/2013

Title: Beam Results: Minimum Reinforcement for Strength

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Beam Results ]

Description: General notes regarding the minimum reinforcement requirements for beams in SLABS

AS 3600­2001

Minimum reinforcement in the beams for AS 3600­2001 can be calculated according two alternative methods:

! Muo > 1.2 Mcr (AS 3600 ­ 2001, clause 8.1.4.1)

! Ast ­ deemed to be satisfy (AS 3600 ­ 2001, clause 8.1.4.1, last paragraph)

It is considered that the condition (Muo > 1.2 Mcr) will provide the most accurate estimate of the minimum reinforcement.

AS 3600­2009

Minimum reinforcement in the beams for AS 3600­2009 are calculated according:

Muo > 1.2 Mcr (AS 3600 ­ 2009, clause 8.1.6.1)

BS 8110

Minimum reinforcement in the beams for BS 8110 are calculated according:

Muo > Mcr (BS 8110 ­ 2: 1985, Clause 3.6)

CSA A23.3

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 208 of 308

Minimum reinforcement in the beams for BS 8110 are calculated according:

Muo > 1.2 Mcr (CSA A23.3, Clause 10.5.1.1)

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Beam Results: Wide Beams

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Beam Results > Wide Beams ]

Description: Detailed notes about the wide beam elements and how to extract results, including examples in SLABS

Traditionally floor systems were made of narrow and deep beams, (300mm wide by 600 to 800mm deep), with thin slab plates in between (90mm, 120mm or 150mm
thick). These floor systems were analysed manually considering the slab plates separately and applying the entire load from the slabs onto the beams. The system of
beams was then designed independently of the slabs and the contribution of the slab plates was generally ignored in the overall floor analysis. The concrete quality
many years ago was much lower and larger cracks and deflections were acceptable.

The design codes were written with these types of floors in mind, emphasising the role of the beams, and ignoring the two­way slab action and the beam­slab
interaction. However, nowadays the beams are much wider (1.2 m, 1.6m, 2.4m wide) and much shallower (300 to 400mm deep), and the slabs are much thicker
(200mm to 250mm thick). This type of geometry makes the beams only fractionally stiffer than the slab, and the beams are not the dominate elements supporting the
floor. The structural system then becomes a ‘beam­slab system’, and very often the beams are eliminated completely, relying on the plate action entirely.

Even though beams as wide as 2.4m are not uncommon nowadays, the beams wider than 2m may not work as a single section, and also the results of beams wider
than 2.4m should be checked with alternative methods.

An issue to consider is that the design tradition and the underlining design code philosophy has not changed. Many engineers continue to treat the shallow beams
(which are much more flexible) as stiff supports, and the flat slabs without any beams are treated as a grillage of imaginary beams. This imaginary beam approach is
very simplistic and inferior to the 2D plate theory implemented in SLABS. Flat slabs and slabs with shallow band beams are plates with emphasised two­way action
and they should be analysed by plate theory. The plate theory is fully developed and has been successfully implemented in finite elements since the early 1950’s.

There are more complex issues that are associated with shallow beams. If we consider a section of a wide beam and treat is as T beam working in one­way action (as
recommended in the code for narrow beams), then the T beam will have large flanges and the moment of inertia will be very large. These parameters will result in an
element with large stiffness and consequently smaller deflections. Wide band beams due to simply the geometry, act more like two­way plates rather than T beams.
The T beam approach ignores the flexibility in the perpendicular direction, which should not be ignored. The wide beams and the flanges act more like two­way plates
and they should therefore be treated as plates. The plate approach will result in a more flexible structure as there is flexibility in both directions. We consider this as
the most suitable approach for analysing band beams, and therefore we recommend that in SLABS the band beams are modelled with slab panels. This approach will
generally yield larger deflections, smaller bending moments and lightly reinforced beams.

In SLABS the band beams are modelled as two­way plates, but for the design of the reinforcement they are still treaded as singly reinforced sections. SLABS provides a
set of tools to extract the results from the slab zones (plates) to be designed as singly reinforced sections.

Once the Wide Beams have been created and the model has been analysed, the Wide Beam results can be extracted by selecting [ Results > Wide Beam Load
Case/Combin. <or> Wide Beam Envelope / Design ] from the Main Menu. The example model shown in the screen shot contains one Wide Beam (displayed as orange
coloured lines), and the following results files are extracted for a Load Case and for the design envelope.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 209 of 308

Selecting [ Results > Wide Beam Load Case/Combin ] from the Main Menu will generate a results file for the current Load Case or Load Combination. In this example
the results file below is based on Load Case 1 (Super Imposed Dead Load). Note that the reinforcement results are not shown as the design envelope is not
considered.

The results for the design envelope can be generated by selecting [ Results > Wide Beam Envelope / Design ] from the Main Menu. This output file contains the
reinforcement requirements along the Wide Beam as the design envelope is considered. A major improvement in SLABS4 (and SLABS) is this single report contains the
results for the top and bottom of the Wide Beam (in previous version of SLABS, the user had to repeat the process of extracting the Wide Beam results for the top and
bottom independently). Another improvement is that the user doesn’t need to show specific results prior to extracting the results. SLABS will automatically extract
the result along the Wide Beam, and if the Wide Beam is positioned at an angle to the major X and Y axes, the final results are rotated and presented along the local
coordinates of the Wide Beam.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 210 of 308

Note: if Thick Plate Theory is selected to calculate the shear in slab, then in the wide beam shear calculations these results will be used by default. On the other hand,
if this option is not selected, then the shear results derived from the moments (indicatice shear results) will be used. The selected option will be printed on the wide
beam reports as "Shear Results: Thick Plate Theory" or "Shear Results: Indicative (derived from moments)". See also Slab Shear.

---

WIDE BEAMS ACCURACY

The Wide Beam results are extracted by integrating the slab plate bending moment results in a number of sections across the Wide Beam. Note that the bending
moment results are available only at the nodal pints (see picture below), and if the mesh is course, there will be only two nodal points at each wide beam section, and
therefore the Wide Beam integration might not be accurate. Therefore, when Wide Beams are used it is highly recommended to use finer mesh, so more nodal
points will be used when integrating at each section.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 211 of 308

See: Structrual Elements > Band Beams

Date Modified: 30/04/2014

Title: Crack Control (Slab and Beams)

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Crack Control ]

Description: Detailed notes about the crack control algorithms and factors that affect the final results in SLABS

The software will automatically check the crack design criteria in the slab and in the beams according to AS 3600.

Initially, the software will design the steel for strength considering the selected load combinations (moment envelope). Once this process has been completed, the
crack control criteria is checked using the values selected for the bar diameters, as selected by the user.

For the beams clause 8.6.1 is fully checked and for the slab, the crack control criteria is checked following clause 9.4.1.

Prior to performing the analysis, the user needs to specify appropriate bar diameters for the slabs and for the beams. These value are entering in the Material
Properties input window available under [ Input > Material Properties ] from the Main Menu. In general, smaller bar diameters are more likely to satisfy the crack
criteria.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 212 of 308

The software will indicate the zones where the amount of steel was increased due to crack criteria by displaying dots those areas.

If the amount of steel is increased due to crack criteria, the user may choose to reduce the bar size and re­analyse the model in order to reduce the amount of
reinforcement.

The bar spacing is used to check all crack control criteria and if this condition is not met, the bar spacing is reduced until all crack criteria is satisfied. By reducing the
bar spacing (for a given bar diameter), the amount of steel will increase. Bar sizes for the slab and the beams are selected by the user, at the beginning of the analysis.

The "Critical Tensile Zone" for slabs and beams is determined and used in the crack criteria check, as defined in AS 3600.

The software will choose an appropriate bar spacing, in the slab and in the beams, considering the weather exposure and the bar diameter in order to limit the width
of the cracks, as per AS 3600 requirements. Note that SLABS does not check the minimum steel requirements in the secondary direction for shrinkage, AS 3600, clause
9.4.3.4. This need to be performed manually by the user.

The beams (and wide beams) are designed assuming that all bars are placed in one layer. If this is not the case critical beam sections must be checked against the
Crack Control criteria manually. Skin reinforcement for beams is not considered in the software.

Weather Exposure is a critical design parameter for cracks control, clause 8.6.1 and 9.4.1, AS 3600.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 213 of 308

Note: Crack Control is only available for AS 3600.

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

REACTIONS - SLABS
- Static Analysis

- Area Method

- Self Weight of the Walls Below

Title: Reactions: Static Anlaysis

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Reactions > Static Anlaysis ]

Description: Detailed notes about the reaction results by the Static Analysis in SLABS

The column and wall reactions can be calculated by three alternatives methods:

Static Analysis

Contributory Floor Area - Basic

Contributory Floor Area - Advanced

During the analysis SLABS will evaluate the reactions by two methods: Static Analysis and Tributary Area Method.

The Static Analysis approach should be used for slabs supported by R/C columns and walls, where there is proper frame action. The Area Method
provides more realistic values for a slab predominantly supported by masonry walls, when the frame action is not present.

Static analysis assumes that loads or displacements are applied very slowly to the structure and therefore neglects the inertia and velocity dependent
damping forces. The software solves a set of equilibrium equations [K] {U} = {R} to obtain nodal displacements {U}, where [K] is the structural stiffness
matrix and {R} is the external load vector. Internal forces (axial force, shear force, moments…) are calculated based on nodal displacements.

The axial load calculated by the Static Analysis in the supporting columns and walls can be displayed by selecting [ Results > Reactions - Static
Analysis ] from the Main Menu. Like other results, SLABS will display the results based on the Load Case or Load Combination that is selected by the

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 214 of 308

user prior to displaying the results. The screen shot below shows the reactions in the supporting elements for the Dead Load (Permanent Load) case
only;

The bending moments in the top and at the bottom of the columns are given in the local x and y directions separately. If the angle of the column section
in plan is equal to zero, then the local x axes is parallel to the global X axes. The bending moment Mx is acting in the direction parallel to side A of the
column. The bending moment My is acting in the direction parallel to side B of the column, as shown in the figure below;

In a SLABS model the top of each column is attached to the slab and the bottom end is attached to the structure below.

The column fixity can be set to ‘pinned top and bottom’, ‘fixed top and bottom’ or ‘fixed top - pinned bottom’. The type of fixity can be set independently
for each column in the model by selecting the appropriate option from the property table. In SLABS the columns that have the fixity option set to ‘fixed
top and bottom’ or ‘fixed top - pinned bottom’ can have a reduced fixity or partial fixity assigned. The partial fixity is set as a percentage of a fully fixed
connection, ranging from 100% to 10% by 10% increments. If a pinned support is selected there will be no bending moment results for those columns.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 215 of 308

A tabulated report of the Static Analysis reactions is generated by selecting [ Reports > Reactions – Static Analysis ] from the Main menu.

Note: The moment load is not included in the calculation of the reactions when Floor Area approach is used. The Static Analysis method will only include
the effects on the slab due to the moments.

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 216 of 308

Title: Reactions: Area Method

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Reactions > Area Method ]

Description: Detailed notes about the reaction results by the Area Method including numerical examples in SLABS

SLABS software can be used to evaluate the reactions on the walls and columns by the Tributary Area Method.

The (Tributary) Area Method implemented in the software tries to mimic the manual calculations performed by hand, when the load is distributed among
the surrounding supports considering the distance and location of the supporting elements. This method will apply appropriate fractions of a point and
line loads to the surrounding column and wall supports.

The Area Method is very accurate if there is only a uniformly distributed load applied on the slab. But, if there are point or line loads applied to the slab then
the software needs to "decide" how to distribute the load among the surrounding supports. This idea is demonstrated using the following example, were
we consider a rectangular slab, supported by 6 columns and a point load of 50 kN (the point load is applied to the Live Load Case to exclude the self
weight calculations).

The Area Method will distribute the point load on four columns considering the distance between the point load and the supporting columns, and also
considering the area of slab that each column supports.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 217 of 308

The following generalised procedure outlines the steps and calculations performed by the software in order to determine the reactions in the supporting
elements by the Area Method.

1.) Determine distance between the supporting elements and the load
2.) Exclude the elements that will have 0 (zero) reactions due to either a large distance (>15m) between the load and the support or are located within a ‘shadow’ zone.
3.) Determine the dissecting angle between the supporting elements and the load
4.) Solve the final equation ‘Fi’ for the reaction
5.) Repeat steps 1­4 for the next supporting element

For the numerical example below, the calculations are based on the point load and 'Column A' highlighted in the screen shot below:

There are two conditions that exclude any supporting elements from the reaction calculations by the Area Method. These include either a distance
greater than 15m between the load and the supporting element, or if the support is located within a shadow zone.

The screen shot below indicates that in this example the distance (d) between the point load and each supporting column is within the maximum 15m:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 218 of 308

The second condition is to determine if any of the supporting elements are located within a shadow zone. A shadow zone is created for each supporting
element by a 120 degree angle placed at each supporting element as shown in the screen shot below:

The dashed orange coloured lines in the screen shot above indicate the placement of the 120 degree angles relative to the 50kN point load. The grey
coloured zones are the shadow zones, and all supporting elements that are within these zones are excluded from the calculations.

Once the supporting elements that satisfy the exclusion conditions are known, the next step in the calculations is to determine the bisecting angle (!) between these supporting
elements.
Using the parameters calculated in the previous steps, the following equation is solved for each supporting element to determine the reaction:

In the case of 'Column A', the step by step calculations are:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 219 of 308

The factor k is a "Distance Weight" and it is used to controls the distribution of the load considering the distance to the support. If the Weight Factor is k=3, then most of the
load will go to the closes support. This is a default settings in the software. But, if the Weight Factor is k=1, then the load will be distributed to the supporting elements in a similar
manner as the Linear Static analysis. The "Distance Weight" factor k can be selected by the user on the "Model and Solver Settings" input panel (see picture below).

Also see Wall Subdivision.

---

In the case of supporting walls, the shadow zones are generated in a similar manner with the only difference being that are two 120 degree angles
placed at each end of the wall. The screen shot below is an example that illustrates this concept;

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 220 of 308

The process outlined above is repeated for each point load in every Load Case. All line loads and pressure loads in a model (in each Load Case) are
reduced to point loads and the entire procedure is again repeated for each supporting element.

Date Modified: 09/12/2013

Title: Reactions: Self Weight of the Walls Below

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Reactions > Self Weight of the Walls Below ]

Description: How to Include Self Weight of the Walls below in the Reactions

SLABS model can have walls above and below the floor. The self weight of the walls above is not included in the analysis. The self weight of walls
above has to be applied on the slab as line loads manually by the user.

Walls Above and Below

However, the self weight of the walls below may or may not be included in the reactions, which is selected by the user. If the self weight of the walls
below is not included in the reactions, then these reaction are on top of the walls. But, if self weight of the walls below is included in the reactions, then
the reaction are at the bottom of the walls.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 221 of 308

Wall Reactions Top and Bottom

Inclusion of the self weight of the wall below is control by a switch on the [ Model and Solvers Setting ] Input panel. Also, the same check box is located
on the The Load Case Label input table that is available by selecting [ Input > Load Labels and Factors > Basic Load Case Labels ] from the Main Menu.

======================

Wall Reactions Example

If we do not include the self-weight of the walls under, we will calculate the reactions on top of the walls.

In the Basic Load Case No 1, there is the self-weight of the slab 200mm and 1.0 kPa pressure.
The total reaction at the top of the walls is 571 kN.
0.2 x 100 x 24 x 0.981 + 1 x 100 = 571 kN (INDENTICAL)

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 222 of 308

Now, if we include the self-weight of the walls, we will get the reactions at the bottom of the walls.

Wall: 10 x 3 x 3 x 0.2 x 24 x 0.987 = 424 kN

Slab: 571 kN
Total (bottom of the walls) 995 kN (INDENTICAL)

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 223 of 308

Date Modified: 28/02/2014

PUNCHING SHEAR - SLABS

­ General

­ Average Effective Depth

­ Critical Shear Perimeter

­ Design of Closed Ties

Title: Punching Shear: General

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Punching Shear ]

Description: Detailed notes about the calculation procedure, assumptions and limitations of the punching shear calculator in SLABS.

The punching shear check implemented in SLABS follows the general procedure of section 9.2 Strength of Slabs in Shear in AS 3600­2009. The punching shear check is
performed for rectangular, complex and circular columns that are above and below the slab.

User Input in SLABS

1. Once the model has been analysed select the primary or load combination case to display punching shear results for from the drop down list (if you want to
display for an individual case).
2. Display punching shear results for the case of no closed ties:
[Results > Punching Shear > Display Results (Current Case) or (Envelope)]
3. S < 1 indicates a potential punching shear failure. To check if the additional capacity provided by closed ties will give adequate strength open the report:
[Results > Punching Shear > Report].
4. If a section is still failing with shear ties then the concrete depth in must be increased.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 224 of 308

Calculation Procedure Within SLABS:

The general punching shear calculation procedure, along with any assumptions, being performed in SLABS is as follows:

1. determine critical shear perimeter (u) and mean value of do (dom)

The critical shear perimeter is calculated automatically based on the column's size and is shown, in scale, on screen. For more information see Critical Shear
Perimeter .
For more information on how the mean value of do is calcualted see Average Effective Depth for Punching Shear .
2. determine ultimate shear strength of the slab (Vuo) where M*v is zero
It is assumed there is no shear head so equation 9.2.3(1) is used:

3. determine the moment being transferred from the slab to a support in the direction being considered (M*v)
Moment has the effect of reducing the punching shear capacity of the slab. SLABS takes the value that is in the top of the column below as M*v in the direction
being considered. In the case the column is above it takes the reaction that was exported from R/C Building.
In the case the column is pinned the user has the option of applying minimum moment as per Section 10 of AS 3600­2009. [Input > Material Properties >
Punching Shear > Apply Minimum Moment (0.05D)]. See Design of Closed Ties for more information.

SLABS only considers the stiffness of the column below the slab, hence the out of balance moment calculated will be lower than if there was a column above
and full frame action was considered (as in R/C Building ). To simulate the extra out of balance moment from the column above, the column below can be
modelled as 50% of its true height, to increase its stiffness and attract more moment. An alternative method would be to determine the additional out of
balance moment in R/C Building and apply it as moment load. When using these methods the values of M*vX and M*vY should be checked in the Punching
Shear Report.

4. determine ultimate shear strength of the slab (Vuo) where M*v is not zero
If the moment is not zero or if the minimum bending moment has been applied then the ultimate shear strength for each direction is initially calculated
assuming that no closed fitments will be used as per equation 9.2.4(1).

5. determine the ultimate shear force (V*) and compare against the ultimate shear strength with no closed fitments ( Vu) and display on screen.
The ultimate shear force is calculated as the reaction in the column below (N) less any reaction from the column above (F) (if any).
V* = N ­ F
In the case the column is above only the shear force (V*) is simply the reaction being applied to the slab (F): V* = F
The safety factor for shear failure in each direction is then calculated and displayed on screen:
Sx = Vux / V*
Sy = Vuy / V*
Where Vu is Vuo or Vu from the equations above as applicable. As per the screenshot below, when S = Vu / V 1, the columns has adequate shear capacity
with no closed fitments in that direction and is displayed in black. When S = Vu / V < 1 then the column does not have enough capacity and is displayed in
red. In this case extra closed fitments may be needed and are designed as per Clause 9.2.4 to 9.2.6.

Punching Shear Results Output: Example

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 225 of 308

The punching shear calculations can be shown either using static analysis reactions or floor area reactions. As floor area reactions use the tributary area
method and hence have no moments (M*v) the worst case of the static analysis moments and the moment created by applying the tributary area reaction
with some 0.05D eccentricity are used.

How to switch between the two types of reactions is shown in the screenshot below.

Switching Between Rection Types

6. Design of closed fitments

See Design of Closed Ties for Information on the assumptions and calculations procedure used in SLABS.

Limitations of the Punching Shear Calculations to AS 3600­2009 using SLABS

The punching shear calculations to Section 9 of AS 3600­2009 are for flat slabs supported by columns with limited guidance provided for the case of a spandrel beam.

In the case the slab thickness changes within the critical shear perimeter (u) SLABS takes the average value for the calculation of Vuo along a number of points along
the punching shear perimeter. It is recommended that in the case the column is critical and there is a change in slab depth the calculations in SLABS be verified by
hand.
Penetrations are only taken into consideration when they lie directly on the critical shear perimeter. If they are some distance away as per Figure 9.2.1(A)­(b) SLABS will not take
them into consideration and will therefore overestimate the capacity. This case must be checked by hand. For more information see Critical Shear Perimeter .

If there are beam elements that intersect with supporting columns, the software will assume that the shear will be taken by the beam and the Punching Shear check
will not be performed for the supporting column.

If the beam is modelled as a “wide beam” SLABS will calculate punching shear results however as it is a beam, according to AS 3600­2009, punching shear does not
have to be checked. In the case of thin band beams it can be argued that this can be classified as both a slab and a beam. Verification against hand calculations is
recommended in this case.

SLABS does not consider the effects of the spandrel beam in shear tie calculations as per Clause 9.2.4. For more information see Design of Closed Ties .

See also: Critical Shear Perimeter Design of Closed Ties Average Effective Depth

Date Modified: 10/02/2014

Title: Punching Shear: Average Effective Depth

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Punching Shear ]

Description: Detailed examples about the calculation procedure used to calculate the mean value of do averaged around the punching shear perimeter, dom .

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 226 of 308

Example 1
The procedure used to determine the average effective depth for punching shear calculations will be outlined through the following example. A rectangular column is
underneath the 400 thick slab zone and there is a 200 thick zone that will be in its critical shear perimeter. Cover + One Bar = 32mm.

Example 1: Finite Elements Used for dom Calculations

Initially SLABS will create a preliminary critical perimeter. The slab depths of the finite elements that are touching the column are averaged to get the average depth
above the column. Due to the location of the geometry line all of the finite elements will have a depth of 400mm and the average effective depth is then determined:
Dav = (D1 + D2 + D3 + D4 ) / 4= 400 mm

dav = Dav – (Cover + One Bar) = 368 mm

The preliminary critical perimeter is created at a distance of dav / 2 from the face of the column as per the figure below. For the case of a rectangular and complex
columns the effective depth is calculated at 8 points along this preliminary perimeter. For a circular column 12 points are used. Referring to the figure below d2 to d6
= 368 mm and d1, d8 & d7 = 168 mm.

Preliminary Critical Shear Perimeter

Averaging the values of effective depth:

dom = (d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 + d5 + d6+ d7 + d8) / 8 = 293 mm

The critical perimeter is then re­calculated based on this mean value and used for all subsequent calculations. The perimeter is then checked to determine if it falls within
the slab and it is a sufficient distance from the edge to be effective. For more information see Critical Shear Perimeter .
The total slab depth is average around the 8 points and is used for all subsequent calculations. The average total depth now becomes:
Dav,8pt = (D1 + D2 + D3 + D4 + D5 + D6+ D7 + D8) / 8 = 325 mm

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 227 of 308

Critical Shear Perimeter (u) Used in Design

Example 2

In this example the step in the slab has been modelled passing directly through the column centreline. Following the same procedure as outlined above. The following
effective depth is calculated by PT3D.

Example 2: Finite Elements Used for dom Calculations

Dav = (D1 + D2 + D3 + D4 + D5 + D6) = 300 mm

dav = Dav – (Cover + One Bar) = 268 mm

d1, d7, d8 = 168 mm

d2, d6 = 268 mm

d3, d4 & d5 = 368 mm

dom = (d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 + d5 + d6+ d7 + d8) / 8 = 268 mm

The preliminary punching shear perimeter that is created is based on the average depth overall depth Dav = 300mm. The points d2 and d3 that fall directly on the
geometry line have their depth's averaged based on the depths on either side of the geometry line. The average slab depth becomes:
Dav,8pt = (200 + 300 + 400 + 400 + 400 + 300+ 200 + 200) / 8 = 300 mm

Comparing the two examples it is evident that the average effective depth is different based on the location of the geometry line in relation to the columns centre.
Each case will have different punching shear capacities.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 228 of 308

Date Modified: 10/02/2014

Title: Punching Shear: Critical Shear Perimeter

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Punching Shear ]

Description: General notes and assumptions about the calculation of the Critical Shear Perimeter (u) in SLABS.

When there are columns positions along the slab edge or near voids in a slab, SLABS will automatically adjust the geometry of the critical perimeter (u) to represent
the actual location of the column as it will be constructed. Care should be taken when a model contains complex column sections and the critical perimeter calculated
by SLABS should be checked to Figure 9.2.1(A) of AS 3600­2009.

Penetrations are only taken into consideration when they lie directly on the critical shear perimeter (u). The ineffective portion as per figure 9.2.1(A) of AS 3600­2009
due to a penetration some distance < 2.5 bo away from the column centre is not calculated. These cases must be checked by hand.

SLABS uses a series of points when calculating the depth of the critical shear perimeter. If there is a change in slab depth within the shear perimeter SLABS will take
the average as per AS 3600­2009 however, it is recommended the values produced by SLABS for the dom and the critical perimeter be verified by hand calculations if
the column is critical.

A sample of this automatic adjustment for a column positioned near the slab edge is shown in the screen shot below;

With the introduction of the Slab Geometry Lines in SLABS, using CAD files to build models will result in a very accurate representation of the location of the
supporting column elements relative to the slab geometry. The screen shot below shows a hatched column (supporting the slab) near a corner of the slab perimeter.
The critical shear perimeter calculations have been refined in SLABS to recognise this type of arrangement in a model, however it is very important that all the results
are carefully checked for a combination of inputs similar to the screen shot below.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 229 of 308

The introduction of complex column sections in SLABS also includes the critical shear perimeter calculations for these types of elements. The example screen
shot below shows the critical shear perimeter for two supporting complex columns sections. The position of the columns is such that the edge of the slab perimeter is
aligned with the face of the columns, and the critical shear perimeter is shown based on this arrangement.

Despite extensive internal testing the user should thoroughly check all calculations and results when models contain complex column sections.

Assumption

SLABS assumes that if the edge of the critical perimeter is within 800 mm of the slab edge it will be ineffective for punching shear calculations despite being within the
extent of the slab. The critical shear perimeter (u), as calculated by AS 3600­2009, is only based on the distance dom/2 extending out from all sides of the column. In
the case of the critical perimeter being just inside the slab as per the figure below, if the code was followed to the letter, the two edges would be able to be included
in the design capacity and the design would be unconservative. In reality only the two sides would be effective as the majority of the shear force would be entering
the column from those two sides.

The extent of the critical perimeter as calculated by AS3600­2009 is simplified. According to the fib Model Code to find the true perimeter a detailed shear field
analysis must be performed. In other words, determining exactly where the shear force is passing through.

SLABS uses the simplified approach to AS3600­2009 however, for the case of edge or corner columns SLABS assumes that the edge(s) closest to the slab perimeter do
not become effective until the edge of the perimeter is more than 800mm from the slab edge.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 230 of 308

This reduced punching shear perimeter will be used for the calculations of the punching shear strength with no closed ties to eqns. 9.2.3(1) and 9.2.4 (1) but the full
width of the torsion strip will be used in the calculation of the capacity with closed ties as per eqns. 9.2.4(2) and 9.2.4(4).

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 231 of 308

Also see: Design of Closed Ties

Date Modified: 10/02/2014

Title: Punching Shear: Design of Closed Ties

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Punching Shear ]

Description: General notes about the design on closed ties in SLABS when S < 1.

If the column fails in punching shear as per equation 9.2.4(1) in AS 3600­2009, as per the "General" explanation, additional closed ties will be required. These are the
columns with safety factors S < 1. To view the required number of ties and spacing see [Results > Punching Shear > Report] or the see the layout for an individual
column, [Results > Punching Shear > Plot Single Column > (Column number)]. Note, ties can only increase the capacity so much (to the upper limit of Vu.max ). If the
shear force is greater than this upper limit the section depth will need to be increased, eg. adding a drop panel.

SLABS will perform two sets of calculations:

1. Ties transverse spacing/number of legs determined from the requirements of clause 8.2.12.2 (beams) then calculations are performed to section 9.
2. 2 legs only as per the requirements of section 9 alone.

According to section 9 alone there are no limits to the width of close ties therefore 2 legs are minimum. It is up to the user to choose if they are to use only 2 legs or
more as may be required by section 8.

Calculation procedure:

The general punching shear calculation procedure, along with any assumptions, being performed in SLABS is as follows:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 232 of 308

1. determine Asw:
From the bar size chosen in the Punching Shear Design Parameters, [Input > Material Properties > Punching Shear], the cross sectional area of bar forming the
closed fitment is calculated based on the number of legs for each set of calculations.

Punching Shear Input

2. determine Vu.min
As per equation 9.2.4(2):

where a is the width of the torsion strip in the x or the y direction. The columns location (edge, corner, interior) is taken into consideration.

3. determine Vu.max
As per equation 9.2.4(5):

where x and y are calculated assuming punching shear is occurring on a flat slab only. The case of a spandrel beam is not considered in SLABS.

4. determine maximum centre to centre spacing (s) of fitments

As per Clause 9.2.6.

5. check if V* > Vu.max

This is checking is the load is above the upper limit of sections punching shear capacity. Inspecting the equation of Vu.max, 9.2.4(5) it can be seen that this is
independent of the amount of closed fitments. Therefore, if V* > Vu.max the section depth must be increased.

6. find the spacing required (s) to resist the loads.

A spacing of closed fitments is chosen, that satisfies the requirements for minimum reinforcement as per clause 9.2.5 and that provides enough capacity to
resist the design loads, Vu > V*, within the limit of the maximum spacing requirements. Equations 9.24(2) for Vu.min and 9.2.4(4) for Vu are used as
applicable.

The label convention used in SLABS for the design of closed ties is shown below:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 233 of 308

Assumptions and Limitations

SLABS performs the closed ties calculations to Clause 9.2.4 assuming there are no spandrel beams. In the case of the case the column is below a spandrel beam the
torsion strip width calculated by slabs will be inaccurate. The value of V u.maxmay also be incorrect. The user must not use the punching shear results in this case and
must verify the punching shear capacity by hand.

As per the screenshots below, the closed tie calculations are only accurate if the torsion strips are orthogonal.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 234 of 308

See also: Critical Shear Perimeter

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 235 of 308

Date Modified: 10/02/2014

Frequency & Mode Shape ­ SLABS

- General

- Example

Title: Frequency & Mode Shape ­ SLABS

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Frequency & Mode Shapes ]

Description: General notes on the frequency analysis module

SLABS software can be used to evaluate the first six natural frequencies of the free vibrations of a suspended concrete floor. The Frequency (f) or the Natural Period
(T) of the free vibrations are properties of the structure and can be used to evaluate how the structure will behave (respond) if subjected to dynamic loading.

To perform a frequency analysis using SLABS, the user needs to generate a Load Combination which will be used to evaluate the mass used in the frequency
analysis. The natural frequency depends on the stiffness and the mass of the structure. The stiffness is evaluated from the floor geometry (considering the thickness
values), spans and the modulus of elasticity. The mass is evaluated from one Load Combination which represents the most likely load on the structure as a service
load:

Residential: 1.0*G + 0.3*Q (100% dead load plus 30% live load).

Storage: 1.0*G + 0.7*Q (100% dead load plus 70% live load).

Note that for the frequency analysis the gross section properties will be used and if a different stiffness is required the user may vary the stiffness by using different
values for the modulus of elasticity.

As a general guide the natural frequency for general purpose floors should be greater than 5 Hz. For structures that are to be used as gymnasiums or dance halls, the
natural frequency for these types of structures should be greater than 10 Hz.

SLABS will also calculate the modal mass which can be used for further calculations if required.

Note that SLABS cannot be used for frequency analysis of a Raft slab or slab on ground.

Also see: Forced Vibrations

Date Modified: 31/10/2012

Title: Frequency & Mode Shape ­ Example ­ SLABS

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Frequency & Mode Shapes ]

Description: Frequency and Mode Shape worked example ­ Suspended Reinforced Concrete floor in a Residential Apartment Building

The following worked example is based on a suspended slab of a small building. The slab is supported by a number of columns and several walls as shown in the 3D
screen shot below;

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 236 of 308

Load combination No 3 is used to evaluated the mass used in the frequency analysis. This Load Combination represents 100% dead load and 70% live load and it
is assumed that all dead load is entered in the Basic Load case No 1, and all Live Loads are already entered in the Basic Load Case No 2.

The frequency analysis can now be performed by selecting [ Solve > Frequency Analysis ] from the Main Menu. At this moment we have the enter a Load
Combination number representing the mass, in this case No 3.

SLABS will then evaluate the dominant frequency by an iterative process as shown in the screen shot below;

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 237 of 308

From the frequency analysis we can see that the dominant frequency of this floor is 7.3 Hz. Usually a dominant frequency greater than 5 Hz indicate satisfactory
dynamic behavior. The associated mode shape of the free vibrations can be displayed by selecting [ Result > Frequency and Mode Shape ] from the Main Menu.

From the mode shape results we can observe that the left side of the floor will vibrate much more than the right side. The maximum amplitude of the vibrations will
be at the tip of the cantilever, marked with '1'.

The software will also display the Modal Mass and the Generalized Mass ­ these results can be used in further calculations if required.

Also see: Forced Vibrations

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Forced Vibrations - SLABS

Theoretical Background

Software Usage

Evaluation of Floor Vibrations

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 238 of 308

Date Modified: 31/10/2012

Title: Forced Vibrations ­ Theoretical Background

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Forced Vibrations ]

Description: Forced Vibrations

The concept of the static analysis of a structural system can explained be with a simple single­degree­of­freedom model (see picture below). In the picture below, K is
the stiffness of the elastic spring, P is the applied force and U is the displacement. The system has only one degree of freedom and it can move only in the U
direction. The equilibrium of the system can be expressed by the following equation:

KxU=P

Model of Static System

Usually, in static analysis K (stiffness) and P (applied load) are known and we solve the system for the unknown U (displacement). Generally, the above equation is a
system of simultaneous linear equations which has to be solved in order to perform the Static Analysis. Once U is evaluated we can calculate the force in the spring.
The force in the spring is equivalent to the internal forces in the structural elements: N, M, S (axial load, bending moment and shear force)

We can say that that two forces with equal magnitude and opposite directions are acting on the system (see picture below), therefore the system is in equilibrium.

Static System in Equilibrium

In the static analysis we assume that the applied force is not changing in time, so it is a “static” problem. In this case the time does not play any role.

However, if the force is changing during the time it is a dynamic problem.

Applied force changing during time (Force Time History)

Now, the displacement of the model will vary during time as well, U(t). A dynamic structural system can be explained with a simple model shown below.

Model of Dynamic System

Now, in the dynamic system, there are four forces acting on the system, and all of them are changing during time:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 239 of 308

Dynamic System in Equilibrium

The equilibrium of a dynamic system is expressed with the following second order differential equitation:

The equation defining the equilibrium of a dynamic system must be satisfied for any time (t). The solution of the above differential equation is the displacement
function U(t), which will vary in time.

Displacement Time History

Generally speaking, in a forced vibration problem, the applied force time history is known, and by solving the differential equitation of the dynamic equilibrium, we
can evaluate the time history of the displacement U(t). Then, at any time (t) we can use the displacement magnitude and we can obtain the internal forces in the
structural elements which also vary in time. In the Static Analysis the applied force is given with its magnitude, which does not change over time. While, in the
dynamic problem, the applied force takes different magnitude at different times, and it is given as a force time history.

Note that the K (stiffness of the structure), M (mass of the structure), C (viscous damping constant) are also known values, and they are constants; they do not vary
over time. These values are properties of the structure, which are determined by the geometry of the structural elements and the density of the material itself.

The time history of the displacement U(t) is the solution of the dynamic problem. Once the time history of the displacement is know, then we can easily evaluate the
velocity as the first derivative of the displacement, and the acceleration as the second derivative of the displacement.

So, in SLABS software we can apply a vertical dynamic force at any point on the slab, which will vary over time, and we can evaluate the time history of the
displacement, velocity and acceleration due to the applied force at any point on the floor.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 240 of 308

Forced Vibrations in SLABS

Also see: Forced Vibrations Benchmark 5 Benchmark 6 Benchmark 7 Benchmark 8

Date Modified: 31/10/2012

Title: Forced Vibrations ­ Software Usage

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Forced Vibrations ]

Description: Forced Vibrations

The Forced Vibrations solver in SLABS, in its current form, is suitable only for vibration analysis due to human activity, such as walking and running. Although the
solver provides a solution for any type of forced vibrations, the input form is limited to vibration due to human activity, as the most common cause of the floor
vibrations.

­­­

The usage of the Forced Vibration solve in SLABS consists of two step:

1. Frequency Analysis (more…)

2. Forced Vibration Analysis

During the frequency analysis the natural frequency of a floor will be determined. The natural frequency is a frequency of the free vibration of the floor and is a
property of the structure. The natural frequency depends of the stiffness of the structure, and the mass. Usually, the mass is evaluated from the service load
combination (1G+0.3Q).

The forced vibration solver requires several input parameter (see picture below):

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 241 of 308

Input for Forced Vibrations Solver

The “Node Number” defined the location where the vertical dynamic force is applied. The dynamic force is given as a time history. At the moment in SLABS only one
vertical dynamic force may be applied at one point. In order to display the node numbers we can go to [Settings > Viewing Options], set Node Number: On. Then, we
can zoom into the zone where the force will be applied, and we can display the Mesh. Then, we can record the node number and we can enter it into the input box.

Select Time History Pattern: At the moment there are only two time history patterns we can use:

Sin Wave

Abs( Sin Wave)

The Sin Waves are defined by their period and amplitude, and they are called harmonic excitation because they are made of a series of identical load pattern
segments, which are repeated at regular intervals. This interval is called period of the harmonic force.

Peak Amplitude of the Sin wave.

Half Period of the Sin Wave. Note the Sin wave is shown graphically.

Load Duration in seconds. The load time history is give each 0.001s.

Total time for the response.

Damping ration [%]

A list of node numbers where: vertical displacement, velocity and acceleration will be evaluated.

The resuts from the forced vibration anaysis are: vertical displacment, velocity and acceleration (see picture below). The results are given in a graphical form, at one
node at the time. All these results are the dynamic response. We may use the “range” [ ] button, to zoom in into a shorter time segment.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 242 of 308

Forced Vibrations Results

Generally speaking the dynamic response from the harmonic force has three stages (see picture below):

Transient Stage

Steady State Stage

Free Vibration Stage

Transient Stage: the dynamic force is just applied on the structure and the structure is “negotiating” with the loading until it settles into a regular patter of
movement. Usually, this stage is of a short duration and it is not important for any practical consideration.

Steady State Stage: After the initial period of “negotiation” the structure settles in into a regular patter of movement. As long as the Harmonic force is present during
the steady­state period the structure will vibrate in a regular manner with the same period as the period of the applied force.

Free Vibration Stage: As soon as the applied dynamic force stops being applied on the structure, the structure continues vibrating until it gradually stops. This stage is
not important, because the magnitude of the vibrations is smaller, and gradually it will reduce to zero.

Also see: Forced Vibrations Benchmark 5 Benchmark 6 Benchmark 7 Benchmark 8

Date Modified: 28/03/2013

Title: Forced Vibrations ­ Evaluation of Floor Vibrations

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 243 of 308

[ SLABS > Results & Reports > Forced Vibrations ]

Description: Forced Vibrations

The most common applications of the Forced Vibrations solver in SLABS is the evaluation of the acceptable level of the floor vibrations due to human activity. Often,
at the design stage of a PT or a reinforced concrete floor, a question will arise about the potential risk of excessive vibrations. It is expected that the floors will not
vibrate above the threshold of human perception. The vibrations of any floor should not be noticeable and should not cause any discomfort to the occupants. Also,
some sensitive medical equipment might have very strict limitations on the acceptable level of vibrations.

In any case, the Forced Vibrations Solver in SLABS can be used to determine the floor vibrations due to human activity, or due to vibrating equipment. Note that the
Forced Vibrations Solver in SLABS is not an approximate method that only estimates the vibrations; it is a strict theoretical method which will provide very accurate
results of the floor vibrations.

There are several important points to be considered for this type of application.

Slab Natural Frequencies

During the Frequency Analysis the natural frequencies of the floor will be determined. The natural frequency is a frequency of the free vibrations of the floor, and it is
a property of the structure. The natural frequency depends on the stiffness of the structure and the mass. Generally, stiffer structures will have larger frequencies,
and heavier structures will have smaller frequencies. The stiffness is determined by the spans, the slab and beam thickness and the modulus of elasticity of the
concrete. For example, if we need to increase the frequency of a particular floor, then we can use smaller spans. The mass is evaluated from a service load
combination, usually 1.0G+0.3Q.

We understand that if the natural frequency of the floor matches that of the applied force, the response caused by this walking frequency will be amplified due to
resonance. In the case of footfall (walking) resonance might also occur in subsequent frequencies and can also be triggered by harmonics other than the first
harmonic. For more information on footfall response refer to A Design Guide for Footfall Induced Vibration of Structures (Willford, 2006).

Resonance

Modulus of Elasticity for Dynamic Loading

For dynamic loading the modulus of elasticity of the concrete can be increased. This is done because the initial tangent of stress­strain curve governs the behaviour of
concrete for vibration effects (see figure below). Different design codes specify different methods to calculate the dynamic elastic modulus of concrete. AISC 1997
recommends to take the elastic modulus of concrete under dynamic loading as 1.35 times the static modulus. Other literature may provide different values and it is
left to the user to determine the most suitable input.

Initial tnagent to stress-strain curve

For concrete grade f`c = 40 MPa, we can increase of modulus of elasticity by 35%. We need to enter this increased value for E in the Material Properties input panel.

Ec.dyn = Ec*1.35

Ec.dyn = 45,900 MPa

FE Node Selection
The node where the vertical force is applied can be selected at the same location where the mode shape of the dominant frequency has the largest magnitude (1.0),
see picture below. It is also recommended to try a few other points, in order to examine magnitude of the vibrations when the vertical force is applied at some other
locations or to see the effect the loading on one point has on another.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 244 of 308

Maximum Magnitude of the Mode Shapes

Selection of Force Parameters

Normal human activity such as walking has a frequency range of about 1.0 ­ 2.8 Hz (Wilford, 2006). It is essential to examine the forced vibration response of several
selected frequencies in this range.

To simulate footfall forces in SLABS, we assume that the dynamic force generated by a human walking on a flat surface can be approximated with a Abs(Sin) pattern.
Then for each selected input frequency the user will have to calculate the time duration associated with each step.For example a person walking on the floor with
footfall frequency of 2.5 Hz will make one step every 0.4 s (fast walk). To simulate this in SLABS software we can enter the “Half Period” of the forced vibrations to be
equal to 0.4 s. The resulting input force is shown in the figure below:

The other important input parameter is the magnitude of the dynamic force generated by a human foot­fall on a flat surface. The magnitude of the foot­fall force,
depends on several factors such as the weight of the person, the speed of walking and the floor surface. Often the magnitude of the footfall force is calculated by
multiplying the static weight of the person by a Dynamic Load Factor (DLF). The dynamic response is caused by this force, not by the static weight alone. Again, several
sources prescribe different DLFs based on the walking frequency. The figure below shows the DLF for the first harmonic of the loading force adapted from TR 43
(2005):

Dynamic Load Factor for the first harmonic of the loading force. After TR 43 (2005).

The above figure shows the range for walking. The DLF values for running or jumping will be higher, approximately 1.2 for running and greater than 3 for jumping
(Bachmann, 1991).

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 245 of 308

We recommend that the user considers the magnitude of the applied force very carefully and consults some literature on this topic. Also, it is recommended to
inform the end client about the magnitude of the force used in the evaluation of the floor vibrations.

Load Duration and Total Time For The Response

The load duration can be between 2 to 5 seconds. There is no need to apply the load for longer period, because only a few cycles of the steady­state vibrations are
needed in order to determine the maximum values of the dynamic response. After the analysis we have to examine the results, especially the time history of the
vertical vibrations, and we have to confirm that we have several cycles in the steady­state range.

The “Total time for the response” input parameter is used to set the duration of the response that is displayed as the output. If the user only wants to consider the
steady state vibration then this parameter should be identical to the “Load Duration", otherwise it should be set as a longer time period.

Damping Ratio
The damping ratio is another very important parameter, which will influence significantly the maximum magnitude of the dynamic response. We recommend these
values, taken from Allen and Murray (1993) :

2% ­ PT slabs and new concrete floors (no partitions)

3% ­ older concrete floors

5% ­ concrete floors with partition walls, which will reduce the vibrations

Analysing the Results

The results produced by the Forced Vibration Solver in SLABS have to be compared against the acceptable limits specified in the design brief, or recommended in the
appropriate standards, such as AS2670.2 : 1990, Evaluation of Human Exposure to Whole Body Vibration, Part 2. Note that SLABS only calculates the peak values for
velocity and acceleration output, so it is up to the user to compute Root Mean Squared (RMS) values if required.

Note that Forced Vibration Solver provides results for a specific load magnitude, which has a specific period, applied at a specific locating on the floor. So, SLABS will
evaluate the peak values of the dynamic response for a specific combination of the input values. Sometimes the floor vibrations are examined using a statistical
approach and the RMS value is used. In this case the user may want to vary some of the input parameters in order to examine the sensitivity of the results and to
implement some statistics.

References:

TR43, 2005, Post­tensioned concrete floors: Design Handbook, Second edition, The Concrete Society , Surrey, UK.

AISC/CISC, 1997, Steel Design Guide Series 11, Floor Vibrations Due to Human Activity. Chicago, IL: American Institute of Steel Construction.

Willford M. R., Young P., 2006, A Design Guide for Footfall Induced Vibration of Structures, published by The Concrete Centre, Camberley, Surrey, UK.

Bachmann, Hugo, 1991, Vibrational Behaviour of Partially Prestressed Footbridge­ and Gymnasium­Beams, FIP.

Allen, D. E., and Murray, T. M., 1993, Design Criterion for Vibrations Due to Walking , Engineering Journal, Fourth Quarter, American Institute of Steel Construction,
1993, pp. 117­129.

Also see: Forced Vibrations Benchmark 5 Benchmark 6 Benchmark 7 Benchmark 8

Date Modified: 08/08/2014

BENCHMARK - SLABS
- Example 1 - Simply Supported Beam

- Example 2 - Simply Supported Rectangular Slab

- Example 3 - Temperature

- Example 4 - Frequency Analysis - Beam

- Example 5 - Forced Vibrations - Beam - Harmonic Load

- Example 6 - Forced Vibrations - Beam - Periodic Load |sin(t)|

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 246 of 308

- Example 7 - Frequency Analysis - Slab

- Example 8 - Forced Vibtarions - Slab - Periodic Load

Title: Example 1: Simply Supported Beam

[ SLABS > Benchmark ]

Description: Numerical comparison between SLABS output and theoretical results

The purpose of this example is to check the accuracy of the results in a simple situation. In order to compare the results with the theoretical solution, the moment of
inertia is calculated for an uncracked section.

The geometry of the problem and all input data are listed below

Geometry and Cross Section:

! L = 10.0 m
! D = 0.350 m
! b = 1.0 m
! I = 0.0035729 m4 (based on D)
! concrete cover = 0
! q = 15 kN/m
! E = 30.0 GPa
! Poisson’s Ratio = 0.20 (irrelevant in this case)
! Effective Moment of Inertia, Ief = Igross (no cracks)
! Self Weight Not Included
! FE Mesh 2009, Mesh Sub­division: 0.25m

The theoretical solution is given by the following expressions:

Theory SLABS Error %

Deflection, mm 18.2 18.0 1.0
Moment, kNm 187.5 187.5 0

The deflections results in SLABS are shown in the following screen shot;

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 247 of 308

The moment results (X­X) at mid­span in SLABS are shown in the following screen shot;

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Example 2: Simply Supported Rectangular Slab

[ SLABS > Benchmark ]

Description: Numerical comparison between SLABS output and theoretical results

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 248 of 308

The geometry of the problem and all necessary data are given below:

! Supporting Conditions: Pinned all four sides

! a = 8.0 m
! b = 4.0 m
! t = 0.15 m (thickness)
! q = 17.0 kPa (uniformly distributed pressure)
! E = 25 GPa (modulus of elasticity)
! ! = 0.30 (Poisson's ratio)
! Self weight not included
! Mesh 2000, Sub­divisions: 4
! Effective Moment of Inertia, Ief = Igross (no cracks)
! Concrete Cover = 0

Reference: Formulas for Stress and Strain, Fifth Edition, by R.J. Roark & W.C. Young, McGraw Hill, 1976, (page 386, Table 26)

The theoretical solution is given by the following expressions:

Theory SLABS Error %

Deflection, mm 5.7 5.7 0.0
Moment Y­Y, kNm 27.66 27.7 0.0

The deflections results in SLABS are shown in the following screen shot;

The bending moment results (Y­Y direction) in SLABS are shown in the following screen shot;

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 249 of 308

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

Title: Example 3: Temperature

[ SLABS > Benchmark ]

Description: Numerical comparison between SLABS output and theoretical results

Temperature Example

The purpose of this Benchmark example is to check the accuracy of the results in a simple situation. The beam in consideration is 8 meters long and 1 meter wide as
shown in the free body diagram below. The moments and maximum deflection due to the temperature difference on the top and bottom surfaces at midspan are
calculated using both theoretical solution and SLABS.

Figure 1

Theoretical solution

Moment of inertia of the uncracked cross section:

Modulus of elasticity of the concrete:

E = 30000000 kPa

Coefficient of thermal expansion for concrete:

Equivalent hogging moment in the middle of the beam due to temperature difference:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 250 of 308

Maximum deflection in the middle of the beam due to temperature difference:

vmax= 3.96 mm

A comparison between the theoretical results and the results obtained from SLABS are summarised in the following table;

Theory SLABS Error %

Deflection, mm 3.96 3.9 1.5
Moment X­X, kNm 18.75 ­21.2 13.0

The deflection results in SLABS for the temperature Load Case are shown in the screen shot below;

The Bending Moment results in SLABS for the temperature Load Case are shown in the screen shot below;

Date Modified: 01/09/2009

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 251 of 308

Title: Example 4: Frequency Analysis ­ Beam

[ SLABS > Benchmark > Exampke 4 ]

Description: Numerical comparison between SLABS output and theoretical results

Consider a simply supported beam with the following dimensions and properties:

! L=8m
! b=1m
! h = 0.3 m
! f'c = 32 MPa
! density = 2500 kg/m3
! E = 31799 MPa
! Ig = 0.00225 m4 (assume uncracked section)

Theoretical Modal Frequencies

For a simply supported beam with uniformly distributed mass and stiffness the frequency for each mode of vibration can be calculated using the following formulas:

,where m is the mass per unit length, in this example m = 2500 * 1 * 0.3 = 750 kg/m

Modal mass is given by:

For n = 1 (the first mode of vibration), the frequency is calculated to be:

Comparison with SLABS output

Frequency analysis in SLABS yields the following results for the first natural frequency:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 252 of 308

The summary of results of the first 6 modal frequencies is as follows:

n Theoretical fn, Hz SLABS fn,Hz Error

1 7.58 7.58 0%
2 30.32 30.35 0.1%
3 68.23 68.34 0.16%
4 121.29 83.55 Twisting mode shape in SLABS
0.26% (compare to theoretical
5 189.52 121.61
mode shape 4)
6 272.90 169.34 Twisting mode shape in SLABS

Comparison of modal mass values for theoretical results and corresponding SLABS output (ignoring twisting mode shapes):

n Theoretical Mn, kg SLABS Mn, kg Error, %

1 3000 2986 0.5
2 3000 2960 1.3
3 3000 2891 3.6
4 3000 2845 5.2

Date Modified: 23/06/2014

Title: Example 5: Forced Vibration ­ Beam ­ Harmonic Load

[ SLABS > Benchmark > Example 5 ]

Description: Numerical comparison between SLABS output and theoretical results

Consider a simply supported beam with the following dimensions and properties:

! L=8m

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 253 of 308

! b=1m
! h = 0.3 m
! f'c = 32 MPa
! density = 2500 kg/m3
! E = 31799 MPa
! Ig = 0.00225 m4 (assume uncracked section)

A harmonic force P with amplitude = 0.36 kN and period = 1 s is being applied at midspan.

The model was analysed in SLABS with lumped mass represented as 5 point loads acting along the surface of the beam (self­weight not included). Magnitude of each
point load = 9.81 N/kg *(2500 kg/m3 * 8 m * 0.3 m * 1 m) /6 = 9.81 kN (divided by 6, not 5, since we assume some mass will go to the supports).

3D view of the beam and the point loads in SLABS

Natural frequencies:

Mode shapes from SLABS frequency analysis:

When considering the forced vibration response at midspan (node 3) it is clear that mode shapes 2 and 4 will not contribute to the output, so only mode shapes 1, 3
and 5 will be considered further.
Excitation load P is applied only at midspan:

Modal representation:

for modes 1,3 and 5

Modal mass from SLABS analysis:

Modal mass obtained from SLABS can be verified by hand calculations using the following formula:

Hand calculations values compared with SLABS values:

Hand Calcs SLABS Error, %
M1, kg 2978.56 2980 0.05
M3, kg 2952.192 2948 0.14
M5, kg 2999.912 2999 0.03

Knowing the natural frequencies associated with each mode, we can calculate the modal stiffness:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 254 of 308

Damping ratio = 0.03 (3%)

Response
The displacement is a superposition of modes:

When the force for each mode is given by the response for each mode during the steady state phase of vibration is calculated by

Hence for each mode of vibration:

Combining the results above with the mode shapes, the following expressions for the response of the structure at midspan are produced:

Below is the visual comparison of the results of steady state vibration response produced by hand vs the output from SLABS:

Steady state response output by hand calculations vs from SLABS

Comparison of peak values:

Hand calculations SLABS output (steady state) Error
Displacement 5.4603E­05 m 5.4483E­05 m 0.22%

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 255 of 308

Velocity 3.4308E­04 m/s 3.4266E­04 m/s 0.12%

Acceleration 2.1489E­03 m/s2 2.2968E­03 m/s2 6.88%

The values and graphs are closely matched, so SLABS accurately predicts the steady state response to the vibration caused by a sine­wave excitation.

Date Modified: 24/06/2014

Title: Example 6: Forced Vibration ­ Beam ­ Period Load

[ SLABS > Benchmark > Example 6 ]

Description: Numerical comparison between SLABS output and theoretical results

Consider a simply supported beam with the following dimensions and properties:

! L=8m
! b=1m
! h = 0.3 m
! f'c = 32 MPa
! density = 2500 kg/m3
! E = 31799 MPa
! Ig = 0.00225 m4 (assume uncracked section)

A periodic force P with amplitude = 0.36 kN and period = 0.5 s is being applied at midspan. A graphic representation of the force P is shown below:

Force P = 0.36 Abs[sin(2pt)] acting at midspan

The model was analysed in SLABS with lumped mass represented as 5 point loads acting along the surface of the beam (self­weight not included). Magnitude of each
point load = 9.81 N/kg *(2500 kg/m3 * 8 m * 0.3 m * 1 m) /6 = 9.81 kN (divided by 6, not 5, since we assume some mass will go to the supports).

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 256 of 308

3D view of the beam and the point loads in SLABS

Natural frequencies:

Mode shapes from SLABS frequency analysis:

Note:When considering the forced vibration response at midspan (node 3) it is clear that mode shapes 2 and 4 will not contribute to the output, so only mode shapes
1, 3 and 5 will be considered further.
Modal mass from SLABS analysis:

Knowing the natural frequencies associated with each mode, we can calculate the modal stiffness:

Damping ratio = 0.03 (3%)

Calculating the response

S ince the load P is not a harmonic function, we will employ Fourier transformation to produce a sum of harmonic functions.

After Fourier transformation, the load P can be written down as:

Here the first 7 terms are used to produce very accurate results. Note that the first term is a step function, while the rest are cos functions.

Response to the step function PA

Or in modal form:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 257 of 308

For each mode, the response to the step force is calculated by:

Therefore, in steady state the response for each mode is given by:

Hence for each mode:

And the total response to the step function is then:

Response to the harmonic function PB

Or in modal form:

For each mode, the response to the step force is calculated by:

Following the calculations for harmonic forcing for modes 1, 3 and 5:

Hence, the total response to the first harmonic component of the load is:

Total response
The response to functions PC,D,E,F,G can be calculated following the same procedure as outlined for PB above.

The total response is obtained by summing the responses to functions PA­G

Below is the visual comparison of the results of steady state vibration response produced by hand vs the output from SLABS:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 258 of 308

Steady state response output by hand calculations vs from SLABS

Comparison of peak values:

Hand calculations SLABS output (steady state) Error
Displacement 6.4633E­05 m 6.4511E­05 m 0.2%
Velocity 9.2398E­04 m/s 9.1839E­04 m/s 0.6%
Acceleration 2.9610 E­02 m/s2 3.0517E­02 m/s2 3%

The values and graphs are closely matched, so SLABS accurately predicts the steady state response to the vibration caused by a periodic P=0.36*Abs[ sin(2pt) ].

Date Modified: 27/06/2014

Title: Example 7: Frequency Analysis ­ Slab

[ SLABS > Benchmark ]

Description: Numerical comparison between SLABS output and theoretical results

Consider a concrete slab with the following dimensions and properties:

! a = 6.4 m
! b=8m
! t = 0.2 m
! Density = 2500 kg/m3
! E = 31799 MPa
! Poisson's ratio = 0.2
! All edges simply supported

3D view of the slab in SLABS

The following loads are applied to the slab:

! Self­weight = 2500*0.2*9.81/1000 = 4.905 kPa

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 259 of 308

! Superimposed Dead Load = 0.5 kPa

! Live Load = 2 kPa

For purposes of calculation of the natural frequencies of the slab we will assume the load combination to be 1.0G + 0.3Q. Under this load combination the total
factored load w = 6.005 kPa.

Natural frequencies for a rectangular flat plate with short edge a, long edge b and thickness t, with all edges simply supported, are given by:

where

(From Warren C. Young, Roark’s Formulas for Stress and Strain, Sixth Edition. Table 36, p.714­717)
The first three natural frequencies are:
f1 = 11.7338 Hz

f2 = 25.4233 Hz

f3 = 33.1734 Hz

Comparison to SLABS output:

n 1 2 3
f, Hz (Hand calcs) 11.7338 25.4233 33.1734
f, Hz (SLABS) 11.94 25.91 33.78
Error 1.8% 1.9% 1.8%

This comparison indicates that SLABS accurately evaluates the natural frequencies.

Date Modified: 30/06/2014

Title: Example 8: Forced Vibrations ­ Slab

[ SLABS > Benchmark ]

Description: Numerical comparison between SLABS output and theoretical results

Consider a concrete slab with the following dimensions and properties:

! a = 6.4 m
! b=8m
! t = 0.2 m
! Density = 2500 kg/m3
! E = 31799 MPa
! Poisson's ratio = 0.2
! All edges simply supported
! Damping ratio = 0.03

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 260 of 308

3D view of the slab in SLABS

A periodic force P with amplitude = 0.36 kN and period = 0.5 s is being applied at the middle of the slab as shown in the image above. A graphic representation of the
force P is shown below:

Force P = 0.36 Abs[sin(2p t)] acting at the middle of the slab

The following loads are applied to the slab:

! Self­weight = 2500*0.2*9.81/1000 = 4.905 kPa

! Superimposed Dead Load = 0.5 kPa
! Live Load = 2 kPa

For purposes of calculation of the natural frequencies of the slab we will assume the load combination to be 1.0G + 0.3Q. Under this load combination the total
factored load is 6.005 kPa.

The following formula is widely used to calculate the peak acceleration of a slab panel due to vibration (AISC/CISC 1997):

Where:

! ap = peak acceleraton;
! g = gravitational acceleration = 9.81 m/s2;
! P0 = constant force representing the walking force;
! ß = modal damping ratio;
! W = effective weight of the panel and the load;
! fn = natural frequency.

To represent the walking force exerted by an average person walking:

Wperson = 0.72 kN

DLF = 0.5 (walking)

Therefore, P0 = 0.72*0.5 = 0.36 kN

Damping ratio = 0.03

From previous example, the first natural frequency = 11.94 Hz

The AISC does not suggest the means of obtaining the effective weight W, so several alternatives are presented below. Substituting all known parameters into the
AISC 1997 formula and comparing with SLABS output:

SLABS AISC 1997

W taken as ­­ Modal mass * g 100% 75% 50% 25%
1.0G + 0.3Q 1.0G + 0.3Q 1.0G + 0.3Q 1.0G + 0.3Q
W, kN ­­ 76.86 307.46 230.59 153.73 76.86
apeak, m/s2 0.011981 0.023454 0.005863 0.007818 0.011727 0.023454
Error ­­ 96% ­51% ­35% ­2% 96%

This comparison shows that SLABS software will agree with the AISC formula when 50% of the load is used to a 2% error. A discussion on the reliability of the AISC
1997 method follows.

Note on AISC formula for determining peak acceleration of a floor due to footfall­induced vibration.
When designing a reinforced concrete floor, the peak acceleration due to footfall would often need to be considered. Along with velocity, peak acceleration of a floor
is an important criterion in our perception of vibration. Therefore, an accurate estimate of the peak acceleration of a floor will facilitate better design for
serviceability.
Several methods of calculating the peak acceleration of a floor exist. One widely used method is the formula obtained from American Institute of Steel Construction

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 261 of 308

(AISC). AISC 1997 recommends the following relationship for the peak acceleration(AISC/CISC, 1997):

Where
ap = peak acceleration;
g = gravitational acceleration;
P0 = constant force representing the walking force;
ß = modal damping ratio;
W = effective weight of the panel and the superimposed dead load;
fn = first natural frequency.

Despite its widespread use, the formula has some limitations.

The primary objective of AISC 1997 guide is to provide basic principles and simple analytical tools to evaluate steel framed floor systems and footbridges for vibration
serviceability due to human activities (AISC/CISC, 1997). Therefore, the appropriateness of applying the above formula to a reinforced concrete structure is debatable.
Wilford has compared a number of methods that are currently available for the prediction of footfall­induced vibration in structures, including the AISC method
(Wilford, et al., 2007). He points out several shortcomings of the method:
! AISC method (along with other methods considered in the paper) is based upon semi­empirical ‘hand calculation’ techniques that aim to approximate the
real­world situation, where several or many modes of low­ish natural frequency can be present, using a single equivalent mode. A degree of approximation
inherent in this approach may produce a significant error.
! It is reasonable to expect floor size to have some effect on total response, and all methods except that due to the AISC show this to be the case.
! The variation of harmonic force with frequency it proposes is grossly oversimplified and is very un­conservative in some frequency ranges in relation to
measured data.
! The AISC method incorporates forces that are clearly inconsistent in trend with measured data.
! AISC calculations show that response should increase with increasing mass. The other methods, and basic structural dynamic theory, show that response
decreases with mass.

Middleton and Brownjohn also note the inaccuracies in AISC method in estimating modal properties, especially with modal mass (Middleton & Brownjohn, 2011). In
their paper they show that AISC and similar design methods are not always appropriate for assessing floor vibration response, especially for multi­bay structures.
Wilford then argues in favour of a finite­element based approach to determining the dynamic response of a floor to footfall­induced forces. Modern software and
computing power allow this approach to be implemented and to adequately consider all the modes of dynamic excitation. A method that uses an adequate set of all
relevant natural modes as its basis is likely to be more accurate and robust than one that is based on an empirical estimation of the fundamental mode only (Wilford,
et al., 2007).
In the UK the most current relevant guidelines are SCI guide and the latest Concrete Centre guide, which recommend response prediction using modal superposition
using finite element analysis (FEA) for determination of modal properties (Middleton & Brownjohn, 2008).

References

AISC/CISC, 1997. Steel Design Guide Series 11, Floor Vibrations Due to Human Activity. Chicago, IL: American Institute of Steel Construction.
Middleton, C. J. & Brownjohn, J. M. W., 2008. Response of high frequency floors to a footfall. Orlando, Florida, Society for Experimental Mechanics.
Middleton, C. J. & Brownjohn, J. M. W., 2011. Simplified Methods for Estimating the Response of Floors to a Footfall. Las Vegas, Nevada, American Society of Civil
Engineers.
Wilford, M., Young, P. & Field, C., 2007. Predicting Footfall­Induced Vibration: Part 1. Structures and Buildings, April, 160(SB2), pp. 65 ­ 72.
Wilford, M., Young, P. & Field, C., 2007. Predicting Footfall­Induced Vibration: Part 2. Structures and Buildings, April, 160(SB2), pp. 73 ­ 79.

Date Modified: 02/07/2014

Tutorials - SLABS
- Example 1

Title: Tutorial: Example 1

[ SLABS > Tutorial > Example 1 ]

Description: Tutorial example explaining how to build a simple model, and an overview of the common input parameters

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 262 of 308

The best way to learn how to use the SLABS software is to go through this tutorial example. The general procedure and most of the features are explained here.

Design Task

The design task is to generate a computer model of a simple slab (shown below) and to analyse and design the slab. The slab consists of two spans supported by three walls, one
column and one beam. Two of the walls provide pinned supports (left­hand­side and the middle walls), and the third wall is a fixed support (the 200mm wall on the right­side).

The dead load consists of self weight and some superimposed dead loads (one 3.0 kN/m line load and one 7.0 kN point load). The live load is a uniformly distributed pressure of 3.0
kPa, over both spans. All other necessary input data are given in the figure below.

Concrete Strength: 32 MPa

Steel Yield Strength: 500 MPa

Modulus of Elasticity of Concrete: 30.406 G Pa

Poisson’s Ratio of Concrete: 0.20

Concrete Density: 2.5 t/m3

Dead Load:

Self Weight and Superimposed Dead Load: Line Load: 3.0 kN/m

Point Load: 7.0 kN

Live Load:

3.0 kPa (uniformly distributed over entire floor)

Reinforcement bar diameter = 12mm

Final Design Shrinkage Strain: 0.000650

Preparation

The program is launched by double clicking on the SLABS icon.

In order to use SLABS with new modelling concepts, the default switch labelled '4­Node Slab Panels' needs to be set to 'Geometry Lines (Polylines)' in the [ Settings > System
Settings ] window, as shown below.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 263 of 308

At the bottom of the software interface, there is some useful information such as (x, y) co­ordinates of the mouse pointer, and some comments. Move the mouse pointer over the
working area (the white square), and observe the change of the (x, y) co­ordinates in the bottom left hand corner.

Before any geometry is defined, it is important to record any relevant information for each project. Under [ Input > Titles ] there is a window that will allow the user to input the
relevant information for each design which will be saved with the file. The Job Report Titles below was used for this tutorial.

Geometry

Work on the model starts with the definition of the grid size, which can be defined in the [ Settings > Grid Settings ] window. Enter 0.5m in both 'Grid Size in X' and 'Grid Size in Y'
input boxes. Additional switches also let the user define Grid Area Limits and Minor Grid options.

The larger span is defined by clicking on the Geometry Line Tool (hover the mouse cursor over the buttons in the tool box to see the name of each particular tool), selecting the 'Snap
to Grid' option (snap options can be toggled by pressing F2) and then followed by clicking on the grid as shown in the picture below to define the corners of the slab. Note that the 4
points are created in a clock­wise direction with the first point being created when the mouse cursor was at the position (x = 0.5, y = 4.5 ) in the Working Area.

Coordinates of the four points for the first slab are:

Point x y
1 0.5 4.5
2 6 4.5

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 264 of 308

3 6 9.5
4 1 9.5

Once the 4th point has been created, closing the geometry line is the final step. This is done by clicking on the right mouse button and selecting 'Close'. The Geometry line will be
automatically closed as shown in the screenshot below.

The slab on the right side of the floor is created following the same process outlined above, using the corordiates shown in the following table;

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 265 of 308

Point x y
1 6 9.5
2 11 9.5
3 11 6
4 6 6

An alternative method to define slab geometry is by clicking on the Slab Tool followed by clicking on the 'Show Angle­Distance Input' button. This method allows the user to enter
the exact length and angle (to the horizontal) of the line to be drawn.

It is important to understand that then when the 'Show Angle­Distance Input' icon is selected, the snapping mode is completely IGNORED by the software. The angle and distance
input boxes can be turned on and off by pressing the 'f' key on the keyboard, but only when there is an element selected in the tool box (including the select
mode). The Orthogonal Mode option (turned off and on by pressing the 'o' key on the keyboard) will automatically set the input for the angle input box as
perpendicular/parallel to the global X/Y based on the position of the mouse.

The first step that needs to be performed is to set the 'Show Angle­Distance Input' option to on, and while the snapping mode is set to 'Snap to Grid', the first point is created by
clicking the left mouse button while the cursor is at the location (x = 0.5, y= 4.5) on the Working Area. Once this point has been created, the Ortho mode is turned on by pressing the
'o' key on the keyboard.

The mouse needs to be positioned to the right side of the first point (as shown in the screen shot below) and then the distance to the second point is entered: '5.5' followed by
pressing the 'Enter' key. The angle doesn't need to be specified as the Ortho Mode has been turned On and the software will created a 5.5m slab geomtery line that is parallel to the
X­X axis on screen.

The other segments are created in a similar manner (incremental steps shown below) and once the 4th point has been created the shape is closed by clicking on the right mouse
button and selecting the 'Close' option.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 266 of 308

Once the slab geometry has been generated, save the model under an appropriate file name. The model is saved by selecting [ File > Save ] or [ File > Save As ] from the main menu.

In the [Save] or [Save As] dialogue box select the appropriate subdirectory and type in the file name, e.g. "Tut­01.slb" and click on the [OK] button.

A beam is defined by clicking on the Beam drawing tool (above the Slab drawing tool). When Beam drawing tool is pressed down, the property table of the beam to be drawn will
appear at the right­hand­side of the screen. Within the property table the coordinates, width, depth, and type can be set (vertical off set is not included in this version of SLABS).

Enter 0.3 for the width and 0.6 for the depth to specify the dimensions of the beam in metres. Then either enter the coordinates of the beam on the property table or create the
beam by clicking at the first and second end locations on the grid. The beam will appear on the working area. You may check and change the properties of the beam by selecting it
using the left mouse button. The direction of the beam will not make any difference in the analysis. The following image illustrates the process of creating a beam element

A column is defined by clicking on the Column drawing tool (next to the Select button). When the Column tool is selected the property table of the column to be drawn will appear at
the right­side of the screen. Within the property table the coordinates, dimensions (A and B), shape (rectangular, circular or complex), angle, end fixity, type, height, location (either
below or above the slab) and the partial fixity can be set. Note: Complex shape columns can only be defined by importing from CAD drawings.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 267 of 308

In the property table, enter A = 0.3 and B = 0.3 and the rest of the parameters as default values. In this example, the column fixity will be treated as fully pinned.

To generate the column, ensure the snapping mode is set to either 'Snap to Grid' or 'Snap to Corner' and using the left mouse button click on the location where the column element
is shown in the screen shot below. You may check and change the properties of the column by selecting it using the mouse. The process of creating a column element is shown in the
following image:

A wall is defined by clicking on the Wall drawing tool (below the Column icon in the Tool Box). When the Wall tool is selected the property table of the wall will appear at the right­
side of the screen. Within this property table, the coordinates, thickness, end fixity, type, height, location (either below or above the slab) and the partial fixity can be set.

In the property table, input the thickness of the wall to be 0.2m and the rest of the parameters as default values.

In the example there are two pinned and one fixed wall as shown in the screen shot below. A wall is defined either by entering the coordinates of the wall on the property table or by
clicking at the first and second end locations using the snapping mode set to 'Snap to Corner' (toggle snap modes with F2). Once drawn, you may check and change the properties of
the wall by using the Select tool and clicking the wall with the left mouse button. Individually change the fixity of the walls to make sure they are modelled correctly.

Once the walls have been created and adjusted, the screen should look like this:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 268 of 308

Basic Load Cases and Load Combinations

Before any load is applied to the model, the user need to decide on how many Basic Load Cases will be used. In this exercise we use 2 Basic Load Cases.

The descriptions of the Basic Load Cases are summarized below:

1. Self Weight + Superimposed Dead Load (the line load and the point load)
2. Live Load

Basic load cases can be defined in the Load Case Labels input table which is displayed by selecting [ Input > Load Labels and Factors > Basic Load Case Labels ] from the Main Menu.

The self weight of the slab and the beam elements is automatically included in the Load Case shown in the drop down option on the Load Case Labels input table. In this example,
the self weight is included to the first basic load case. Note that the magnitude of the self weight is not shown anywhere on the screen, but it is considered automatically in the load

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 269 of 308

calculations.

If the self weight of the supporting column and wall elements is to be included in the reactions, the check box labeled 'Include Self Weight of Walls and Columns BELOW in Reactions'
needs to be checked.

The self weight of the column and walls elements above the slab are NOT automatically included in the reaction calculations and users need to apply the appropriate line or points
loads to the model in order to represent the columns and walls above the slab.

Once the Load Case numbers and labels have been entered, the user can apply Pressure, Line, Point and Moment Loads in any Load Case.

Load Combinations are entered in the Load Combination Label and Factors input table that is available under [ Input > Load Labels and Factors > Load Combination Factors ] from the
Main Menu. Each Load Combination is created by combining and applying factors to any of the ten Basic Load Cases. In this exercise we will use a total of 5 Load Combinations. The
first combination will be used for the design of the reinforcement. The fourth represents the incremental deflections and the fifth will be used to evaluate the long term deflections.
(Load Combinations 2 and 3 are used to represent service loads, Ms and Ms1).

Load Combination Description (LC1 and LC2 are Basic Load Cases):

1. LC1 * 1.2 + LC2 *1.5

2. LC1 * 1.0 + LC2 *1.0
3. LC1 * 1.0 + LC2 *0.7
4. LC1 * 1.4 + LC2 *1.26
5. LC1 * 2.4 + LC2 *1.26

Load Combination Label and Factors input table will look as in the figure below:

The First Load combination has a load factor of 1.2 for the Dead Load and a load factor of 1.5 for the Live Load. SLABS will calculate the Bending Moments for all Load Combinations
and make an envelope (in this tutorial that is not required as we are using only one Load Combination for strength). The Moment Envelope is calculated from the Load Combinations
that have ticked appropriate check boxes in the 3rd column in the Load Combination Factor input panel. This envelope of the maximum moments will be used to design the
reinforcement (strength design). The Load Combinations 2 and 3 are service load combinations and they will be used to evaluate the Ief (effective moment of inertia), and for crack
control. Further, Ief will be used in deflection calculations and Load Combination 4 will be used to evaluate the long term deflections using the Kcs Method.

The Australian Code AS 3600 allows usage of a simplified method for deflection calculations baseed on the Kcs factor. This method is widely used and yields reliable results for almost
any practical design job.

Below is a summary of how kcs is used to calculate load factors that are then entered into SLABS to evaluate deflections.

!tot = !s + kcs * !s.sus

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 270 of 308

kcs = [2-1.2(Asc / Ast)] > 0.8

where:

!tot - total long term deflections

!s - short term deflections from load: G + "s*Q

!s.sus - long term deflections from load: G + "l*Q

G - Dead Load

Q - Live Load

"s - short term service load factor, in this example equal to 0.7

"l - long term service load factor, in this example equal to 0.4

Asc / Ast = 0.5 ratio between compressive and tensile reinforcement, equal to 0.5

Considering the assumed values for all the factors above, we can calculate the Load Factors for the forth Load Combination.

kcs = [2-1.2*0.5] = 1.4

Load for !tot:

(G + "s *Q) + kcs (G + "l *Q)

G + "s *Q + kcs*G + kcs*"l *Q

(1 + kcs)G + ("s + kcs*"l)Q

G(1 + 1.4) + Q(0.7+ 1.4*0.4)

2.4G + 1.26Q

The above load factors assume a compression to tensile reinforcement ratio of 50%. For any other amount of compression reinforcement a new set of load factors must be
evaluated.

SLABS is the first version of the software that includes methods to calculate long term deflections by methods other than the Kcs approach. The new methods referred to as the
'Advanced Methods' and include the Age­adjusted Effective Modulus Method (AEMM) and Eurocode 2 (EC2). The two new methods do not use the 'increased load factors' approach
that Kcs is based on in order to capture the effects of long term effects such as creep and shrinkage.

The AEMM and EC2 methods use a Service Load Combination that represent the load on the floor, and the long term effects are calculated directly using the required input
parameters shown in the Long Term Deflections input window, available from [ Input > Long Term Deflections ] from the Main Menu. Further references about the detailed approach
of the advanced methods can be found in the Manual SLABS: Results & Reports: Deflections ­ Advanced Methods: AEMM & EC2.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 271 of 308

Note: The last five Load Combinations are not used and the software will not generate any results for these Load Combinations.

Applying Loads

In order to apply the line load to the model, select the Load Case No 1 (Self Weight + Superimposed Dead Load) from the drop down list, then select the Line Load icon in the tool
box. Set the 'Ortho Mode' to On (by either clicking on the Ortho Mode icon, or pressing the [ o ] key on the keyboard) and enter the Line Load magnitude value of 3.0 kN/m.

The line load is created by specifying two points on the Working Area. For point 1 the snapping mode should be set to 'Snap to Grid' and for point 2 the snapping mode should be set
to 'Snap to Edge' (the snapping mode can be changed at any time by pressing the [ F2 ] key on the key board.

Point (2) will snap to the slab edge (wall centre line), while remaining horizontal in relation to the first point as Ortho Mode is 'On'. If you make a mistake you can select and delete
the line load and repeat the process outling above. A snap shot of the process is shown in the following two screen shots;

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 272 of 308

In order to enter a point load in Basic Load Case No 1, click on the Point Load icon in the Tool Box and enter the magnitude of 7.0 kN in the property table. While the snapping mode
is set to 'Snap to Grid', click on the appropriate location at the mid­span, as shown in the following screen shot;

Note: In order to apply pressure load the model needs to be meshed ­ see next section.

Generating the Finite Element Mesh

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 273 of 308

In SLABS, any information related to the slab (pressure load and thickness) needs to be defined after the model is meshed. During the meshing process, the software will
automatically create slab zones based on the geometry lines that were entered by the user. The slab zones can then be assigned the appropriate thickness (input 0 [zero] for voids)
and pressure loads accordingly.

We can generate the finite element mesh by selecting [ Solve > Mesh ] from the Main Menu.

On the Mesh input panel 'FE Mesh 2009' will be selected by default and it cannot be changed. For 'Mesh Sub­division' select 1.0m (the value of 1.0 m determines the size of the finite
elements). Generally speaking, a mesh size of 0.5m or 1.0m is adequate for the majority of the models. Finer mesh should generate results of higher accuracy and bigger mesh can
be selected to provide a quick but rough initial set of results.

After the mesh is finished, the finite element triangles will be shown on the working area as shown on the figure below.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 274 of 308

Clicking on the 'Redraw' icon will refresh the Working Area and remove the mesh from display. (Selecting [ Tools > Show Mesh ] from the Main Menu or using Shift+E
keyboard shortcut will display the mesh again). SLABS will use the arrangement of geometry lines within a model and create slab zones during the mesh ­ in
this example there are two slab zones. Each slab zone can be selected by clicking anywhere within the slab zone area using the left mouse button with Select tool
on. The software will colour the selected zone as shown in the figure below (Slab Zone 2 is selected). On the top right corner of the interface SLABS will display a
property table that represents the parameters associated with the selected slab zone.

Assigning Pressure Load and Thickness to the Slab Zones

By default, during the first time the mesh is generated a default thickness of 0.2m is automatically assigned to all slab zones in a model. This value can be changed by
selecting slab zones within a model and entering a different value in the property table.

For this example, Slab Zone 2 is selected and a value of 0.18m is entered for the thickness. If the model was to be meshed again, the software will remember the new
thickness for that particular slab zone.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 275 of 308

In order to apply pressure to slab zones ensure that the Basic Load Case No1 (Self Weight + Superimposed Dead Load) is displayed from the drop down list and then select
the Pressure Load icon in the Tool Box (as shown on the following figure). Enter a magnitude of '0.5' and click on each slab zone. For the Live Load
pressure, select Basic Load Case No 2 from the drop down list, and enter a value of '3.0' in the property table. Apply the pressure by clicking on each slab zone. As in
the case of thicknesses, when you re­mesh the model, the software will remember the pressure loads that have been applied to the slab zones.

Material Properties

To display the Material Input window select [ Input > Material Properties ] from the Main Menu and enter (or confirm) all the material properties contained within this window (see
figure below).

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 276 of 308

In this example the 'Crack Control' option is set to 'Fully Enclosed' ­ this setting will affect the crack control criteria.

In the [Material Properties] input panel, there is an input parameter labeled 'Concrete Cover + One Bar'. This value defines the position of the reinforcement centroid in the section.

This value will be used for the design of the reinforcement and an average is taken as a sum of the concrete cover plus one diameter of the assumed bar size (this value is identical
for both directions). In this example it is taken as 32 mm, assuming a concrete cover of 20 mm plus 12 mm for the assumed bar diameter.

The minimum strength (minimum steel) of the slab is determined according AS 3600 ­ 2009, clause 8.1.6.1, assuming two­way action.

The Final Design Shrinkage Strain should be set to 0.000650, which is used in calculations of Mcr AS 3600, Clause 8.5.3.1.

Make sure the service load combinations are displayed correctly and match the ones used in the example.

The input variable 'Ief Max' (located on the right­side of the window) will set the upper limit for the maximum vale of Ief (Effective Moment of Inertia). According to AS 3600 this
value may be set to 1 (Igross = Ieff), however this is approach is not suggested as there is no 'built­in' safety for the estimate of the deflection results. If we set the upper limit of Ief to
0.7, i.e. Ief < 0.7* Igross, then the deflections will be slightly over estimated. This parameter is not defined in the design code, but it is a common design practice to introduce some
additional safety in the calculations of the deflections.

The Slab Moment Redistribution factor should be set to 10%. This will reduce the negative moments by 10% and increase the positive mid­span moments accordingly.

The Beam Stiffness Factor should be set to 4 as this will make the beam artificially stiffer and will 'force' the beams to work harder. By applying this factor to the beam elements, the
software is instructed to redistribute more reinforcement in the beam and less in slab. This will provide similar steel redistribution as for manual calculations were the role of the
beams is over­emphasized.

Analysis and Design

Unless an any of the information or data contained within the model has been changed, the mesh does not need to be re­generated. The analysis can be started by selecting [ Solve
> Analyse and Design ] from the Main menu. During this process SLABS will generate all the results including: bending moments, reactions (by Static Analysis and Area Method],
deflections and reinforcement.

The deflections and bending moments are calculated in accordance with AS 3600. The software implements an automated 4­step procedure:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 277 of 308

1. Calculate M and Reactions, using Igross.

2. Design Steel, Ast.
3. Calculate Ief.
4. Calculate Deflections, using Ief.

Note that SLABS software will consider two­way action automatically and the user does not need to 'instruct' the software of the primary/secondary directions. For instance, if there
is a long and narrow rectangular slab, SLABS will produce much larger moments in the shorter span. The primary direction is determined by the software automatically, i.e. it is
governed by the floor geometry and supporting conditions and it is not based on any 'judgment' made by the user.

Reviewing Results

If there are no error messages reported during the analysis, the results may be viewed. The long term deflections are given in Load Combination 5. This Load Combination represents
the total long term deflection because of the Load Factors we have entered: 2.4G + 1.2 Q.

On the Main Task Bar, select [ Load Combination ] and [ 5: Long Term Deflections ] followed by selecting [ Results > Deflection ] in the Main Menu. The deflection results are given as
a set of contour lines were each line connects the points with the same values. The same results can also be displayed as colours (See figures below).

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 278 of 308

From the figure above, it can be observed that the maximum long term deflection is 9.5mm. This value should be compared with the allowable value for the long term deflections,
say Deflection/Lef > 250. The effective (support to support) length (Lef) at this area is 5m. In this case (5000mm/9.5m) = 526 larger than 250 and we may assume that the deflections
are acceptable.

All other results may be displayed in a similar fashion, and the results in any nodal point may be viewed by clicking on the slab using the left mouse button.

The bottom reinforcement in X­X direction at the mid­span of the right­side of the slab is shown below. Reinforcement results can be displayed by 'Rate', by 'Bar Spacing' or by 'Rate
+ Bar Spacing'.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 279 of 308

It can be observed that the maximum positive reinforcement in the X­X direction of the left slab is 377mm2/m. The dots on the slab indicate that reinforcement of 377mm2/m is
required to satisfy the crack control criteria. This is equivalent to N12/300mm. Te dots indicate that N12 could have been placed on a larger spacing to satisfy the strength criteria,
but pacing was reduced to control cracks.

The results for the beams, such as Bending Moments, Shear Force and Torsional Moment, are also available from [ Results > Beams Load Case/Combin. ]. The beam results for Load
Combination No1 are shown below. Note that in this particular example beam torsion has not been considered.

Date Modified: 09/04/2013

Title: Tutorial 1 ­ Basics

[ SLABS > Tutorials > Tutorial 1 ­ Basics ]

Description: Tutorial example explaining how to build a simple model, and an overview of the common input parameters.

We strongly recommend that first­time users of the software follow this tutorial to familiarise themselves with the software. The general procedures and most commonly
used features will be illustrated in this chapter.

This tutorial is subdivided into several topics. We recommend that the users go through the following chapters in sequence:

1. Design Task
2. Model Set Up
3. Bitmap Import and Geometry Input
4. Meshing the Model
5. Thicknesses and Loads
6. Analysis and Results

Note

SLABS shares some basic functionality and interface features with other major INDUCTA software. Browse other tutorial chapters to learn more about the basics of
modelling.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 280 of 308

See also: R/C Building Tutorial 1 ­ Basics

Date Modified: 28/08/2014

Title: Design Task

[ SLABS > Tutorials > Tutorial 1 ­ Basics > Bitmap Import and Geometry Input ]

Description: Tutorial example explaining how to build a simple model, and an overview of the common input parameters.

The design task for this tutorial is to construct a SLABS model of a floor and perform an analysis and design of the slab. The following preliminary drawing is to be used
to produce a model in SLABS:

The geometry of the slab is to be entered as shown above. The loading is to be taken as:

G, kPa Q, kPa
Interior 1 1.5
Balcony 2 2
Corridors 1 4

Additionally, partitions shown in red in the drawing are to be entered as 3 kN/m dead loads.

Please proceed to the next chapter Model Set Up .

Date Modified: 28/08/2014

Title: Model Set Up

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 281 of 308

[ SLABS > Tutorials > Tutorial 1 ­ Basics > Model Set Up ]

Description: Tutorial example explaining how to build a simple model, and an overview of the common input parameters.

The following tutorial chapter will explain the common set up procedure to be completed in preparation for modelling a slab in SLABS software. After reading the
Design Task , p lease familiarise yourself with the major components of the software interface which will be referenced throughout the tutorial:

To create a new model, select [ File > New ] from the Main Menu. A blank model similar to the one in the screenshot above will appear on your screen. Then Titles,
Grid Properties and Material Properties will need to be set by the user.

Titles

It is important to record relevant information for each project. To access Job Report Titles, select [ Input > Titles ] from the Main Menu, then fill out the table as
following:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 282 of 308

Press 'OK' after entering all the information to return to the main screen. The information will be stored within the file and could be viewed or edited at any time.
Additionally, the user may choose to display these notes on any printed reports.

Grid Properties

The grid is a useful tool for defining the model geometry. In this tutorial we will set the grid size to be 0.1 x 0.1 m . This is appropriate as the geometry of the slab will
be entered manually and this grid size will allow the necessary degree of accuracy. The default grid setting is 1 x 1 m. To adjust the grid size, select [ Settings > Grid
Size ] from the main menu and modify the settings as the following:

After setting up the grid, you may press 'OK' to return to the main screen. Note that you can turn grid visibility on or off at any time by pressing the Grid Visibility
button on the Main Task Bar or by using [ Shift + F10 ] shortcut on your keyboard.

Material Properties

SLABS allows the user to set the material properties of concrete and reinforcement. For complex realistic jobs, these can be adjusted in great detail, however for the
purposes of this example will will use the default Material Properties . To view the settings, select [ Input > Material Properties ] from the Main Menu. Verify that the
following material properties are used and press 'OK' to return to the main screen:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 283 of 308

To save the model, select [ File > Save ] from the Main Menu.

Once the model set up has been completed, please proceed to the following chapter Bitmap Import and Geometry Input.

Date Modified: 28/08/2014

Title: Bitmap Import and Geometry Input

[ SLABS > Tutorials > Tutorial 1 ­ Basics > Bitmap Import and Geometry Input ]

Description: Tutorial example explaining how to build a simple model, and an overview of the common input parameters.

The following chapter will explain the procedure to be followed when the geometry of the model is to be input manually into SLABS using a bitmap (.BMP) image as a
reference. Please go through this chapter after completing Model Set Up .

Bitmap Import

Bitmap import is one of the several methods of inputing geometry into INDUCTA software. This method is most appropriate for preliminary modelling, when only
a set of drawings, such as butter papers or PDF files, is available to design the slab. Other methods (import from CAD or Revit ) can be used to produce more accurate
models if the necessary files are available. These methods are discussed in depth elsewhere in this manual.

Please download the following bitmap file to be used in this tutorial: http://inducta.com.au/Tutorial/SLABS_tut01.bmp (2.07 MB)

(If file does not download please copy/paste the link into your web browser and right click the image and select "Save Image As" )

Note that for import into INDUCTA software, bitmap images will need to be saved as a 256­colour quality or lower. If the file is a PDF then a screenshot can be taken
and pasted into an image editing program such as Microsoft Paint and saved as a bitmap.

To import the bitmap file to be used as an underlay in the SLABS model, select [ Tools > Bitmap > Import ] from the Main Menu and open the bitmap file you have
downloaded in the previous step. After loading the bitmap, the background image will be shown in the working area:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 284 of 308

Next, the background image will need to be scaled to match the grid settings. A 10 m long line was drawn to scale on the image to make scaling easier. Scroll with the
middle mouse button to zoom into the image on the working area. Then under the Main Menu, select [ Tools > Bitmap > Scale ] and press 'OK' in the dialog box. After
this, you will need to click 2 points in the Working Area the distance between which is known and specify that distance. Follow the instructions in the screencap below
to scale the image:

After completing this, the bitmap is scaled correctly.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 285 of 308

Note - Bitmap Scaling

The rest of the chapter will provide thorough guidance on how to use the imported image to input the slab geometry and supports. It is important to note that the
bitmap underlay may be scaled slightly differently by different users, and it may be difficult to replicate exactly the same results. This is to be expected, and this is why
bitmap import is recommended only for preliminary models. Please follow the steps below to create your model, however note that is may differ to some
degree from the one built in this tutorial. The link to the finished model will be provided at the end of this chapter to ensure consistensy with the tutorial, however
you may choose to proceed with your own model.

Slab Geometry

To enter the slab geometry (such as slab boundaries, voids, areas of different thickness and loading) in SLABS, the user must use the Geometry Line tool, located in
the Tool Box. After selecting the 'Geometry Line' tool, left­click and release at the grid points in the working area using the bitmap image as a reference. Clicking each
point will define a node of the geometry line. Two nodes are always joined by a straight line. To zoom in and out of the model and pan across the Working Area, use
the mouse wheel. While entering the geometry manually, it is important to pay attention to which Snapping Mode is currently active, since Snap Mode selection will
influence the geometry input. Select 'Snap to Grid' mode. Snapping modes can be toggled by pressing the Snap Mode button in the Main Task Bar or by pressing [ F2 ]
on your keyboard.

To create a single geometry line bounding the entire perimeter of the slab follow the steps as shown in the image below:

After defining the last node, right click anywhere on the screen and select 'Close' from the menu that will appear to create a closed geometry line. Please note that
SLABS, along with other INDUCTA software, requires one closed geometry line to define the slab edge. The geometry lines located within the slab edge may be both
open or closed.

The image below will illustrate how to close the geometry line:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 286 of 308

To create open geometry lines, the same procedure is to be followed. After defining the last node, right­click anywhere in the working area and select 'End' from the
menu. Alternatively, to end (not close) the geometry line, press the 'Space' key on your keyboard.

Press [ F4 ] on your keyboard to hide the bitmap image (note that it will not erase the image from the software and it can be shown again at any time by pressing the
[f4 ] key again) and press [ F1 ] to view the entire model so far (see the image below). To view properties of a geometry line (or any other element in SLABS), use the
'Select' tool and left­click the element of interest. The relevant properties will be displayed in the Property Table and can be manually adjusted from there. Additional
information, such as element number, is shown in the Information Window:

In the image above, the slab outline was selected. The Property Table displays the coordinates of the nodes used to define the slab. The Information Window can be
used to confirm that the geometry line is closed.

Tips and Techniques

The following tips and techniques will assist you in specifying the slab geometry quickly and efficiently.

! The geometry lines (or any other SLABS elements) can be hard to see against the bitmap. Note that you can turn the bitmap underlay on or off at any time by
pressing [ F4 ] on your keyboard. This will allow you to verify the placement of the geometry.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 287 of 308

! To manually adjust the the nodes of the geometry line, use the 'Select' tool then left­click and drag a node to a new location. As 'Snap to Grid' mode is on, the
node will snap to the closest grid point:

Note that the same can be done through the Propery Table. Again, use the 'Select' tool then left­click to select the geometry line. Select the coordinate to be
shifted through the Property Table (note that the node will be highlighted autpmatically by SLABS). You may enter the new position of the node as relative
coordinates (as shown in the image below, to shift the node in the Y axis by ­0.1 m ­ similar to a spreadsheet operation) or absolute coordinates (simply enter
the new location). Press 'Enter' to commit the changes. See the image below for an illustration:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 288 of 308

! To enter the geometry more efficiently, use orthogonal mode. This can be turned on from the Dynamic Task Bar or by pressing 'O' on your keyboard at any
time. When the orthogonal mode is switched on, the geometry lines can only be drawn parallel to the X and Y axes of the model:

! Toggle the active snapping mode by pressing [ F2 ] on your keyboard. So far, we have been using 'Snap to Grid' mode. Use 'Snap to Corner' snapping mode to

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 289 of 308

snap the geometry line (as well as any other element) to the existing nodes of the geometry lines, column centroids and beam and wall endpoints. Using 'Snap
to Edge' snapping mode will allow you to snap the geometry line to the the closest point of point of a geometry line, wall or beam element. See the images
below for an illustration.

With 'Snap to Corner' and Orthogonal Mode on, select the 'Geometry Line' tool. Left click as shown to snap the first point of the new geometry line to an
existing corner (the existing geometry line is highlighted in green in the image below):

Following this, press [ F2 ] twice to switch the snapping mode back to 'Snap to Grid'. Left click as shown to define points 2 and 3:

After that, press [ F2 ] twice to select 'Snap to Edge' snapping mode and click on the existing geometry line as shown to create point 4. Following that, press
'Space' on your keyboard to close the new geometry line:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 290 of 308

To visually check that the new geometry line has been drawn in correctly, press [ F4 ] to hidde the bitmap image. The geometry should be as the following:

The rest of the balconies can be drawn in a similar fashion.

! Additional tools can be used to quickly specify the geometry lines for the folds. The balcony edge has already drawn following the instructions above. Firstly, we
will explode the existing geometry line into its components. Use the 'Select' tool from the Tool Box and left click to select the geometry line. With the geometry
line selected, press 'Explode Slab Geometry Lines' from the Dynamic Task Bar, than press 'OK' in the dialog box that will appear:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 291 of 308

After the geometry line has been exploded, each component of the geometry line can now be selected and edited separately. We will select each component
line, create a copy 0.3 m away and join them together to create the fold.

Repeat the above instructions for the remaining geometry lines. After all the geometry lines have been copied, the model should look like the following:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 292 of 308

Next, we will need to tidy up the geometry lines by extending and trimming. To extend the line, use the 'Select' tool and left click the line to be extended. Next,
right click next to the endpoint of the line that is to be extended and select 'Extend by Value' from he menu (note that if you click too far away, the option will
not appear ­ please try right clicking closer to the endpoint). Enter '0.3' to extend the line 0.3 m, then press 'Enter' on your keyboard:

To clip the geometry line, use the 'Select' tool again and left click to select the geometry line. Next, right click next to the endpoint and select 'Extend with
Mouse and Clip'. Left click past the line that is to be used as a reference for clipping as shown in the image below:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 293 of 308

Use 'Extend by Value' and 'Extend with Mouse and Clip' commands to finish the rest of the fold. The end result should be as follows:

The rest of the folds can be created using the same technique.

! After drawing in the folds following the above instructions and using the grid references and the bitmap image as a guide, you may want to verify the
dimensions. To check the dimensions, use the Distance tool, located in the Dynamic Task Bar:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 294 of 308

Continue drawing the geometry lines using the instructions given above. Ensure that the geometry lines are drawn around the voids and steps in the slab. Also use the
geometry lines to define the corridors. Remember that the grid size is 0.1 by 0.1 m, and use that as a guide when entering 300 mm step at the balconies.

Note that to define slab thicknesses the model will need to be meshed first. These operations will be discussed later in this tutorial.

Once you have finished drawing the geometry lines, your model should look similar to the one shown in the image below:

Once the slab geometry has been entered and adjusted, you may proceed to define walls and columns.

Walls and Columns

Walls and columns below the slab provide vertical support for the slab.

In SLABS, walls are considred as line support elements with the support being along the centreline of the wall. Walls are defined using the 2 endpoints.

To draw a wall, select the 'Wall' tool from the Tool Box. Press [ F4 ] on your keyboard to turn on the bitmap image to use it as a guide to place the walls. With 'Snap to
Grid' on, left­click two points in the Working Area to define a wall as shown below:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 295 of 308

Follow the above instructions to define the rest of the walls in the model.

Note that the default thickness of the wall is 0.2 m. You can adjust the thickness of an individual wall at any time by using the 'Select' tool to select the wall and then
changing the value in the 'Thickness' box in the Property Table. Since all the walls in the model are to be 0.22 m thick, we will need to select all the walls in the model.
Use the 'Select' tool, then press 'Select by Type' from the Dynamic Task Bar. Then select the following options in the menu that will appear:

Once all the walls are selected, you can change the thickness. Simply enter the new thickness in the appropriate box in the Property Table and press 'Enter' to apply
the changes:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 296 of 308

It is important to keep Finite Element Modelling principles in mind when modelling a structure in INDUCTA software. Note that walls are considered as line supports
by the software, hence tthe slab is supported by the centreline of the wall only. For that reason, make sure you draw the walls with the centrelines matching the
edges of the void as shown below:

Columns are defined in a similar way to walls. Columns in SLABS are considered as point support elements, so only one point is necessary to specify a column location.

Two different types of rectangular columns are to be used in this model (C1 and C2) as well as 2 circular columns.

To create C1 type columns (800x300 mm), select the 'Column' tool from the Tool Box, then enter the dimensions in the Property Table and left click in the Working
Area to define the first column:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 297 of 308

The rest of the C1 and C2 columns can be entered using a similar procedure. Note that some of the columns have their longer (800 mm) dimension in the y­y axis.
To rotate these columns you may either enter '90' in the Angle box in the Property Table or switch the A and B dimensions of the column. The results of the analysis
will not be affected.

To define the circular columns, in the Property Table change the Shape to 'Circular' and enter the Diameter of the column:

Line Loads

While walls and columns can be drawn both above and below the slab, it is important to note that SLABS software does not consider the walls and columns above in
the analysis. Instead, these elements should be represented as Line Loads or Point loads respectively in order to influence the results accordingly.

The partition walls in this SLABS model are to be entered as 3 kN/m Dead Load using line loads.

Line Loads are drawn in essentially the same manner as wall elements, by left clicking two points inside the working area. Follow the instructions in the screenshot
below to enter the line loads:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 298 of 308

Please use the steps outlied above to create the rest of the line loads.

Note that using Basic Load Cases and Load Combinations and applying Pressure Loads will be discussed in depth later in this tutorial as this procedure can only be
done once the model was meshed.

Once all the geometry and the line loads have been entered, the model will look similar to the one shown in the following image (note that the Bitmap has been
temporarily hidden) when the "1: Dead Load (Auto Self Weight)" Load Case is selected in the main task bar and the line load button pressed on the toolbox:

Shift Coordinates

You may have noted that when entering the geometry, some of the coordinates were negative. That will result in an error later as the analysis in SLABS and other
INDUCTA software does not handle negative coordinates. To ensure the model coordinates are in the appropriate range, select [ Edit > Shift­Scale­Rotate Model >
Auto Shift ] from the Main Menu.

After this operation, the basic geometry of the model has been entered and the model is ready to be meshed.

To save the file again, select [ File > Save ] from the Main Menu.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 299 of 308

Note

As mentioned above, the model you have created following the instructions in this tutorial chapter may differ minutely from the one shown in the text due to the
nature of bitmap import. The degree of accuracy is based on the grid size and the line weight of the pen used in the sketch. Therefore the coordinates of the
model most likely will not match the model in this example exactly. If you continue using the model that you have created, please be aware that the results in the
latter part of the tutorial may be somewhat different, which is to be expected. If you would like to ensure consistent results in the remainder of this tutorial, please
download the following SLABS model from the INDUCTA website:

SLABS_tut01.slb (model data file)

SLABS_tut01.rst (results file containing bitmap image)

After downloading, open the model by selecting [ File > Open ] from the Main Menu, then proceed to the following chapter Meshing the Model .

Date Modified: 28/08/2014

Title: Meshing the Model

[ SLABS > Tutorials > Tutorial 1 ­ Basics > Meshing the Model]

Description: Tutorial example explaining how to build a simple model, and an overview of the common input parameters.

The following tutorial chapter will guide the user through the basics of meshing a simple model in SLABS. Please go through this chapter after completing Bitmap
Import and Geometry Input.

In order to apply the loads and slab thicknesses, the Finite Element Mesh needs to be generated. The precise results, such as slab moments and deflections, will only
be available at the nodes of the mesh. Finer mesh sub­division will generate more precise results, but will increase the run­time of the model accordingly.

To mesh the model, select [ Solve > Mesh ] from the main menu or press F5 on your keyboard. The following menu will appear:

The default mesh subdivision is 1 m. Verify that this mesh sub­division size is selected, then press 'OK' to mesh the model. The meshing algorithm will run and you will
see the following window once the mesh is finalised. Press 'Exit' to view the mesh:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 300 of 308

Meshing Errors

The simple model used in this example will run without any meshing issues. If you are using the file you have created in Bitmap Import and Geometry Input chapter,
you might see some meshing errors. Please ensure that these are eliminated prior to analysing the model. Cleaning up meshing errors are not covered in this tutorial.
If you are a first time user or cannot clean up the errors please download the error­free model from the slabs website.

To view the mesh at any time, press the 'Show Mesh' button located at the bottom of the screen or [ Shift + E ] on the keyboard. Note that if the geometry was
altered, the mesh will be deleted, however viewing mesh will still allow you to view any meshing errors.

Once the mesh has been finalised, please proceed to the next chapter Thicknesses and Loads.

Date Modified: 28/08/2014

Title: Applying the Loads

[ SLABS > Tutorials > Tutorial 1 ­ Basics > Applying the Loads ]

Description: Tutorial example explaining how to build a simple model, and an overview of the common input parameters.

After the model has been meshed, the user can apply the pressure loads and thicknesses to the slab zones that have been defined previously. The following tutorial chapter will
guide the user through the basics of entering slab thicknesses and pressure loads, as well as defining load cases and combinations in a simple model in SLABS. Please
go through this chapter after completing Meshing the Model .

Apply Slab Thicknesses

Slab thicknesses can only be entered once the model has been meshed. The information is stored by the software, so if the model is meshed again, the user will not need to re­enter
the slab thicknesses.

To assign a thickness to a slab zone, use the 'Select' tool to select the slab, then enter a thickness in metres in the Property Table as shown below. Press the 'Enter' key on your
keyboard to commit the value.

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 301 of 308

To define a slab zone as a void, follow the same procedure as above, but enter '0' in the Thickness tab.

You can view the assigned slab thicknesses at any time, provided the mesh is available. Changing the geometry will erase the mesh and the slab thickness and
pressure load information will not be available. To view the slab zones by thickness, choose the 'Geometry Line' tool from the toolbox and select 'Colour by Thickness' button
from the Dynamic Task Bar as shown below. After applying the slab thicknesses, the model will look like this:

Defining Basic Load Cases and Load Combinations

For this tutorial example we will use the default Basic Load Cases and Load Combinations.

To access the Basic Load Cases, select [ Input > Loading Labels and Factors > Basic Load Case Labels ] from the main menu. The following form will appear:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 302 of 308

Press 'OK' to return to the main screen after verifying that the inputs are entered as above.

The next step is to verify the load combination factors. This can be accessed by selecting [ Input > Loading Labels and Factors > Load Combination Factors ] from the
Main Menu. The Load Combination Factors used by default will be shown:

Columns of the above table contain factors that correspond to the Basic Load Cases, so LC1 is Dead Load, while LC2 is Live Load.

Note that the load combinations that have been marked as 'Envelope' will be used to calculate Global Design Envelope that will be used to design the slab
reinforcement.

Press 'OK' after confirming the values to return to the main screen.

Apply Pressure Loads

Pressure loads are to be applied to the slab in accordance with the Design Task.

To apply a pressure load to a slab zone, select a basic load case (in this case LC1 ­ Dead Load) from the main task bar, then select the 'Pressure Load' tool from the
Tool Box. Enter the magnitude of the pressure load in the Property Table, then click anywhere within the slab zone to apply the pressure. The process is shown in the
image below:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 303 of 308

Repeat this to apply the dead load to the rest of the slab.

To view all the applied pressure loads for a particular Basic Load Case at any time, select the 'Pressure Load' tool from the Tool Box and left­click 'Colour by Pressure'
from the Dynamic Task Bar. Once the dead loads have been applied to all the slab zones, verify that the loads have been entered as the following:

Hit 'Escape' on your keyboard to clear the screen.

Enter the live loads using the instructions above, making sure you switch the active Basic Load Case to Load Case 2: Live Load. Once finished, verify the loads:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 304 of 308

The procedure for applying slab thicknesses and loads is common to all INDUCTA software. Please compare with Slab Thicknesses and Loads in R/C Building Basics
Tutorial for more information.

After all the slab thicknesses and loads have been applied successfully, the model is ready to be analysed. Proceed to the next chapter Analysis and Results .

Date Modified: 28/08/2014

Title: Analysis and Results

[ SLABS > Tutorials > Tutorial 1 ­ Basics > Analysis and Results ]

Description: Tutorial example explaining how to build a simple model, and an overview of the common input parameters.

After all the properties and loading has been set, the model is ready to be analysed. This chapter will guide the user on how to analyse the model and extract the
results. Please go through this chapter after completing Thicknesses and Loads .

Analysis

To produce the results, the model needs to be solved. This can be done by selecting the [ Solve > Analyse and Design ] from the Main Menu or by pressing [ F6 ] key
on your keyboard. The following dialog box will appear, displaying the log:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 305 of 308

You can review the log to check for any errors. After the analysis is complete, press 'Exit' to return to the main screen and view the results.

Results: Deflections and Slab Moments

The procedure to view the results is the same across the INDUCTA software. The method of extracting slab deflections and moments, as well as some useful tools, has
been discussed in depth in Analysis and Results chapter of R/C Building Basics Tutorial.

To view the long­term deflections, select Load Combination 3: Long Term Deflections and go to [ Results > Deflections ] under Main Menu. The following screen shows
the deflection values:

The software will highlight the point of maximum and minimum deflection automatically (in this case 52.1 mm and ­2.3 mm respectively). Thick green lines indicate
the lines of contraflexure. To view the magnitude of the deflection at any location, simply left click that spot in the model. Note that for deflection, as well as other
results, precise values are available only at the nodes of the Finite Element Mesh . Intermediate values used to generate the image above are interpolated from these
results.

The deflection results are available for any Basic Load Case or Load Combination.

It is often more useful to check the span / deflection ratio, rather than simply the magnitude of deflection. To calculate that, while the deflection results are being
displayed, select the 'Distance' tool from the Dynamic Task Bar and click on two points in the Working Area as shown below, making sure the snap setting is set to
'Snap to Grid':

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 306 of 308

The slab moments can be displayed in a similar manner. Firstly, select the desired Basic Load Case or Load Combination, then choose [ Results > Bending Mx ] or
[ Results > Bending My ] from the Main Menu. Shown below are the bending moments for bending in the Y­axis under Basic Load Case 1: Dead Load. To view the
bending moment at any points, left click on the slab zone.

To show the maximum value in an area, drag the cursor across the screen while pressing the left mouse button to define a rectangular area. SLABS will then display
the maximum value in that range:

Another useful tool available for the extraction of the moment results in SLABS is the Moment Line . This tool will display the moment results along the user­defined
line in the same direction as the results displayed by the user. Follow the instructions in the image below to cut a moment line:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 307 of 308

Results: Reinforcement

In contrast to R/C Building, SLABS allows the user to design slab reinforcement. SLABS offers powerful and sophisticated tools for reinforcement design. The user may
choose to use the Refined Approach and manually specify minimal levels of reinforcement, however for simplicity we will only look at the General Approach in this
chapter.

To view the reinforcement, select [ Results > Reinforcement X ­ X ]. The following screen will be seen:

The software allows to easily switch the view to a different reinforcement layer. The results are available for both X ­ X and Y ­ Y axes and the user can view top and
bottom reinforcement.

Click anywhere on a slab zone to view the reinforcement at this area (note that the results will only be available at Finite Element Nodes). By default, the software will
show the reinforcement rate in mm2/mm, however the user can select to view the reinforcement bar size and spacing or both:

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015
SLABS Page 308 of 308

Date Modified: 28/08/2014

file:///C:/Users/mohammadh/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh7AFF.htm 20/05/2015